MAXI Installation instructions

MAXI
Delivery documentation
Plats för Aggregatskylt
likadan som på aggregat
Content
Front page
Installation instruction
Use instruction
Declaration of conformity Cat 1-2
Documentation
Declaration of conformity art 3.3
IQHeat Installation
IQHeat General documents
IQHeat Services
Setting/ adjustment controller
Electrical wiring of controller
Pump info
Pump Documentation
Actuator
Sensor
Control valve
Strainer
Safety valve
Fillling valve
Shut off valve
Non return valve
Environmental declaration
MAXI
Installation instructions
Arrival inspection
Remove the transport packaging and check
that the product has not been damaged in
transit and that the delivered unit agrees with
the specifications.
Lifting and handling
When lifting the unit, take great care to avoid
subjecting pipes and heat exchangers to
stresses that might affect their strength.
Use lifting eyes if provided, and a pallet lifter
where possible Note: Lifting objects as heavy
as a Maxi is a very hazardous operation.
Read all these instructions before
installation.
General information
This product must be installed by an authorised
installer. The installer must be qualified to
undertake electrical work and to work on pipes.
Before connection, the person in charge must
ascertain which regulations apply to the district
heating installation.
Check the weight of the unit before lifting it, and
use equipment capable of handling the weight.
The weight including packaging is stated on the
shipping paperwork.
If the unit has to be dismantled to move it to the
installation site, carefully mark all pipes and
electrical connections so that no mistakes are
made on re-assembly.
Installation space
MAXI is a unit or substation designed to heat
hot service water and/or space heating water
for buildings, by means of district heating.
The Maxi must be installed in a space where
the air temperature is between 0 and +40°C,
and where the humidity is lower than the
dewpoint. See also the IP class of the electrical
equipment supplied, in the respective manuals
or product data sheets.
See the information supplied with the delivery
documentation for an explanation of how the
district heating substation works and how it
should be connected.
Set up the unit so that the installation work can
be done easily and efficiently. It is important to
have access to the entire unit for subsequent
inspection and servicing.
Connecting the district heating substation,
electric power, pipework and safety equipment
incorrectly may result in a major hazard and is
not allowed.
The unit has adjustable feet to compensate for
minor irregularities in the floor.
This manual and other delivery documentation
must be kept accessible close to the district
heating substation throughout its life.
If the unit is subsequently added to or modified,
the documentation must also be updated.
The owner of the building must be instructed in
the operation, setting and care of the unit.
It is particularly important to provide information
about the safety systems and about hazards
that may arise in relation to the high pressure
and temperature of the district heating water.
If the floor is very uneven, it must be made
smooth before the unit is installed.
Safety valves release water to protect the
installation. The area should therefore have a
floor drain or some other means of draining
away the discharged water.
The unit must not be installed in such a way
that water from safety valves or any other
leakage that might occur cannot be drained
away.
Page 1 of 4
MAXI
Installation instructions
Approvals
The MAXI has been manufactured and
inspected in accordance with applicable
directives, i.e. the Machine Directive (MD), the
Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) and the
Low-Voltage Directive (LVD).
See the identification plate of the unit and the
Declaration of Conformity for marking and
further details of regulations invoked.
NOTE: It may take a long time after closing the
valves before work can begin without risk of
scalding.
When welding or soldering on or close to the
unit, combustible parts such as thermal
insulation or electrical cables must be moved
out of the way.
When certain materials are heated, there is a
risk of fire or toxic gases.
Safety regulations
Installation
Equipment to prevent excess pressure
Pipework
On its secondary sides, the district heating
centre requires safety equipment to prevent
excess pressure, which must protect the
installation in accordance with the current CE
regulations.
All pipes are marked so that they can be
connected correctly. Connecting them
incorrectly is dangerous.
- Before the unit goes into service it must be
protected with non-closable safety valves on
each secondary circuit.
- These safety valves must protect both the
unit’s own components, such as heat
exchanger, and the components and pipes of
the heated system, against excessive pressure.
If these safety valves are not included in the
consignment, they must be retro-fitted to the
unit.
Electrical safety
A permanent installation must always include a
lockable all-pole safety switch on the supply.
This safety switch may be included in the
consignment. If not, it must be installed in the
permanent installation.
All electric power to the unit must be switched
off before any work is done on the electrical
installation.
Take-up of expansion of heating water
An expansion vessel that can handle the entire
volume expansion of the space heating system
must be connected at the time of installation.
The expansion vessel is not normally included
in the consignment, but it must be installed
before the system goes into service.
When working on the unit
Make sure that all valves are closed in the
circuit to be worked on. The unit normally
contains water at such a high pressure and
sometimes at such a high temperature that
steam may be formed.
To avoid the risk of scalding, discharge pipes
from safety valves and drain cocks must be
installed so that water is directed downwards
and close to the floor.
Connecting pipes must be fixed in such a way
that forces and movement from the pipework
are not transferred to the unit.
If strainers are not supplied with the unit, they
must be obtained and fitted to the primary side
and to each secondary side.
It may be necessary to fit additional drain cocks
and air bleed valves at the lowest and highest
points of the pipework. These must be fitted
with plugs to prevent scalding if they are
opened accidentally.
Pipework insulation
District heating pipes and space heating pipes
may sometimes reach temperatures at which
scalding may result if they are touched.
These pipes must be insulated at the time of
installation.
Other pipes should be insulated to prevent heat
loss (hot water and hot water circulation pipes)
or air humidity condensation (cold water pipes).
Condensation dripping on to steel pipes may
eventually cause corrosion.
Flushing
Before the system goes into service, every
circuit must be flushed to remove any debris or
contaminants in the system. Among other
things, contaminants in the water are harmful to
the heat exchanger and this may result in a
higher return temperature.
Page 2 of 4
MAXI
Installation instructions
Pressure testing
Before the installation goes into service, it must
be pressure-tested in accordance with local or
national regulations.
According to the PED Directive, the test
pressure must be at least 1.43 times the design
pressure for the respective circuit.
For certain materials and temperature levels, a
higher factor applies.
See the identification plate data for suitable test
pressures (PT) for the particular unit.
Before circuits with safety valves are pressuretested, the safety valves must be removed and
replaced with plugs.
DO NOT plug the outlets of installed safety
valves for pressure testing.
- This may damage the valves.
When pressure testing is complete, refit the
safety valves and check for leaks.
Filling
Before filling the system with water, re-tighten
all joints in the unit that are fitted with a gasket.
To fill, open the incoming cold water supply and
fill the service water circuit.
Then fill the heating circuits by opening the
respective filling valve.
Observe the pressure in the heating circuits
during filling, to ensure that the maximum
pressure is not exceeded. After filling, carefully
close manual filling valves.
Unless there is a strainer on the return line, the
primary (district heating) side should be filled by
opening the supply first.
If the unit is filled via a return line that has no
strainer, debris may enter the unit and lodge in
control valves, for instance. This might result in
incorrect operation or leakage.
Sealing leaks in gasket joints
If a bolted or flanged joint with a gasket is
leaking, de-pressurise the circuit before
tightening the joint. This is because there is
water between the gasket and the mating
surfaces. Continuing to tighten the joint with the
system under pressure will deform the gasket
and it will have to be replaced to stop the
leakage.
Bleeding
Air is bled from heating circuits in the
customary way. Depending on the equipment
level and system type of the unit, repeated
bleeding may be necessary in the initial period
after starting.
Electrical connection
The MAXI can be supplied with or without
electrical connection, and also without a control
centre, for connection to control equipment
already on site.
Electrical connection and installation work done
when the unit is installed must undergo
appropriate safety and function testing.
Electrical connection done at the factory
conforms to the rules for CE marking, and has
undergone electrical safety and function testing
to the extent possible for the degree of
completion of the unit.
In some cases, a ready-wired unit may be
supplied fitted with a plug so that the unit can
be started before a qualified electrician carries
out the permanent installation.
A ready-wired unit is supplied with a socket to
connect an outside sensor.
The outside sensor must be installed on the
coldest side of the building, normally the north
side, 2 metres or more above the ground.
Adjustment, settings
Pump, hot water circulation flow
The Maxi can be supplied with a pump for hot
water circulation. The purpose of this pump is
to ensure that the temperature of the water in
the circulation pipe of the building is at least 50
ºC on returning to the substation.
If the temperature is lower, bacterial growth
may occur and there may be a longer wait for
hot service water at each draw-off point.
Adjust the flow so that the temperature of the
returned water is about 50 ºC, which is about 5
degrees lower than the water in the hot water
flow pipe.
The flow rate can be adjusted by changing the
pump setting or with a balancing valve.
Page 3 of 4
MAXI
Installation instructions
Pumps and flows to the heating system
The Maxi can be supplied with a circulation
pump for one or more space heating circuits.
Each heating circuit should be adjusted in order
to extract the required performance from the
substation.
A high return temperature and high flow rates
on the primary side may result in excessive
energy cost.
Control equipment
Check that the available primary differential
pressure agrees with the design values of the
unit.
The control equipment must be set for the
relevant operating case, so that the control
system can operate optimally and so that
maximum comfort is achieved.
See separate documentation from the supplier
of the control equipment.
Temperature “hunting” may result in control
valves, actuators and heat exchangers having
to be replaced prematurely.
When commissioning hot water systems, make
sure that no-one draws hot water until the
temperature level has stabilised around the
recommended figure of about 55 ºC. – Risk of
scalding!
Modification of the unit
The MAXI has been marked and documented
by Alfa Laval in the configuration in which it left
the factory.
Any modification or extension requires a
documented assessment of compliance with
the directives and regulations applicable at the
time of the change.
Dismantling and recycling
Maxi consists primarily of metals, steel,
stainless steel, brass and copper in different
amounts, depending on the size of the unit and
the type of system.
Technical data - MAXI
Plate data
- Type designation
- Manufacturing no.
- Order no.
- Unit …
- design temperature TS
- design pressure PS
- test pressure PT
- Year of manufacture/week of pressure test
- Design data of heat exchanger, such as
- capacity, kW
- temperatures
- flow
- pressure drop
- volume in litres per side
- Relief pressure of any safety valves supplied
- Electric power supply, single- or three-phase
- Fluid group 2 according to PED
- CE marking if applicable
- Manufacturer
The identification plate is affixed in a clearly
visible position on the unit, and a copy is
provided with the delivery documentation.
Weight
The weight of the unit is stated in the shipping
document.
Sound level
The sound level from a Maxi does not exceed
70 dB(A) at 1.6 metres above the floor, at a
distance of 1 metre.
Appendices (depending on version)
- Flowchart, description
- Operating instructions
- Declaration of conformity as per directives
- Electrical diagram
- Product data sheets for included
components
When the time comes to dispose of the unit,
some of these can be separated and recycled.
Non-metallic parts and components must be
disposed of in the correct manner in
accordance with local or national regulations.
Page 4 of 4
MAXI
Operating instructions
General information
MAXI is a district heating substation designed to
connect buildings to district heating networks.
The standard version of MAXI is used for primary
connection (indirect connection) to the district
heating or local heating network. Other variants
of connections to different heat sources exists.
See the flowchart in the delivery documentation
for detailed information about the equipment and
how to connect it.
See the identification plate for technical data.
Operation
The main component is one or more Alfa Laval
heat exchangers which separate the hightemperature and high-pressure district heating
water from the secondary heating and hot water
systems of the building.
These heat exchangers have peripheral
equipment such as a control centre, control
valves, pumps and valves, which together form a
working district heating substation.
The heat exchangers have a high heat transfer
capacity in order to make efficient use of the
temperature of the district heating water. This
results in economical heating.
MAXI has been developed with well-planned
pipework and with all components easily
accessible for inspection and servicing.
After installation and adjustment, MAXI operates
completely automatically. Normally the
temperature of the heating circuit is regulated in
relation to the outside temperature, and the hot
water temperature is regulated to provide the
required constant temperature.
Safety equipment and inspection
- Every three months: check the safety valve
and the pressure in the heating system.
– Daily inspection: check for leaks from pipes
or components.
– Weekly: check that temperature regulation
works without “hunting”. Temperature hunting
causes unnecessary wear of valves, actuators
and heat exchangers.
For instructions on preventing hunting, see the
troubleshooting chart on the next page.
Note: During and immediately after hot water
draw-off, condensation may appear on the cold
water pipe.
To check the operation of the safety valve, turn
its wheel/knob until water escapes from the
waste pipe of the valve, then close the
wheel/knob quickly.
To fill the heating system manually, open the
filling valve. Be sure to close the valve when
the correct pressure is reached. (This depends
on the type of system and the building.)
In hard water areas, if the water temperature
goes too high, users should be aware of this and
immediately have any faults put right,
Automatic filling/pressure-keeping should be
checked to ensure that the correct pressure is
maintained.
- Otherwise the risk of lime scale deposits in the
heat exchanger may increase.
Hot service water contains a large amount of
dissolved oxygen. Using this water to fill seconddary heating circuits may lead to corrosion
in the system. This type of system should be
filled as infrequently as possible.
Before cleaning the heat exchangers with any
liquid, check that the liquid is not aggressively
corrosive to any of the materials that it comes into
contact with.
-Before returning the substation to use, flush the
heat exchanger out so that all traces of the
cleaning liquid are removed.
If a fault develops, contact a skilled service
technician. For information about suitable service companies, contact the heating supplier.
Only authorised personnel may work on the
system.
See important warnings on the next page.
Page 1 of 2
MAXI
Operating instructions
Troubleshooting chart
Symptom
Hot water not hot enough
Hot water too hot
Heating system temperature
too high or too low
No heat from the heating
system
Annoying noises in the
radiator system
Cause
Control valve not correctly set
Control valve or temperature
regulator not working
District heating filter clogged
Control valve set too high or
not working
Automatic heating control may
need adjusting
Circulation pump not running
Not enough water in the
system
Air pockets in the heat
exchanger or in the heating
circuit
Pump capacity too high
Temperature “hunting” of
hot water or heating,
clicking noises in the
heating system
Hot water or heating settings
not correct
Heating or hot water flow too
low
Heating system often needs
topping up
The expansion vessel cannot
handle the changes in volume.
Heating and hot water
temperatures both too low
Leakage
District heating filter clogged
District heating water
temperature too low
Action
Adjust
Call a service technician
Call a service technician
Adjust or call a service technician
The internal heating curve of the
control centre can be adjusted.
See separate instructions
Check that the power is on and
that the fuses are OK.
Top up the system
Bleed off the air at the expansion
vessel and in the heating circuit
(the radiators)
Reduce the pump capacity by
choosing a lower output setting on
the pump, if available
Adjust control parameters or call a
service technician
Increase the speed of the pump by
choosing a higher output setting (if
available) or adjust by opening the
balancing valve
Call service technician to check
the volume take-up and pressure
priming of the expansion vessel, or
possible leakage
Contact a service technician
Contact the district heating
supplier
See also the installation instructions.
Warning!
Parts of the MAXI may get very hot and should not be touched. Accessible hot surfaces
and pipes must be insulated at the time of installation.
Children must not be left unattended in the area of the district heating centre.
The temperature and pressure of the district heating water are very high. Only a specialist
appointed by the heating supplier may work on pipes or replace components.
Very hot water may escape when you open safety valves, drain cocks, filters and air bleed
valves. Take care.
If the district heating centre is not operated properly, the high pressures and temperatures it
contains may cause severe injury, as well as damaging the building.
To maintain the CE-marking status of the product, any replacement components fitted must
be identical to those replaced.
Page 2 of 2
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
Rev: 08/03/2013
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
Contents
1
General .................................................................................................................................. 3
1.1
1.2
1.2.1
1.3
Information about this document ...............................................................................................................3
Product overview IQHeat cabinets ............................................................................................................4
Base material list for IQHeat ................................................................................................................4
DDC1; Processing unit with Display and TCP/IP interface .......................................................................5
2
Communication principles ................................................................................................... 6
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
Internal Interface........................................................................................................................................6
LEDs for BSP and BUS diagnostics .....................................................................................................6
Upgrade with SD card ..........................................................................................................................7
Expansion module AHU with 14 I/O ..........................................................................................................7
Setting expansion module's DIP switches ...........................................................................................7
LEDs for BSP and BUS diagnostics .....................................................................................................8
Fuses .........................................................................................................................................................9
For the Swedish market .......................................................................................................................9
For the Norwegian market ....................................................................................................................9
3
The control panel ................................................................................................................ 10
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Display/HMI settings ............................................................................................................................... 10
Display layout ......................................................................................................................................... 11
Various line types ................................................................................................................................... 11
Setting parameters ................................................................................................................................. 12
4
Log in and set the clock ..................................................................................................... 13
4.1
4.1.1
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
Password and login ................................................................................................................................ 13
Log in ................................................................................................................................................. 13
Time functions setting of time and date ................................................................................................. 14
Reading date and time ...................................................................................................................... 14
Setting date and time ........................................................................................................................ 14
5
Alarm management............................................................................................................. 15
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
Alarm list ................................................................................................................................................. 15
Alarm history........................................................................................................................................... 16
Settings ................................................................................................................................................... 16
Alarms and their classification ................................................................................................................ 17
6
General functions ............................................................................................................... 18
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.3.3
Reading the current temperatures and valve modes ............................................................................. 18
Frost protection....................................................................................................................................... 18
System objects ....................................................................................................................................... 19
Plant information ............................................................................................................................... 19
Restoring the start-up settings .......................................................................................................... 19
Language selection ........................................................................................................................... 19
7
Heating circuit ..................................................................................................................... 20
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.5.1
7.5.2
7.6
Operating mode heating ......................................................................................................................... 20
Heat time program .................................................................................................................................. 21
Setting the value for the heating circuit .................................................................................................. 22
Setting the heating curve ........................................................................................................................ 22
Heating Limit ECO .................................................................................................................................. 23
Setting Heating limit (ECO) ............................................................................................................... 24
Heat limit function .............................................................................................................................. 24
Parallel offset of heating curve ............................................................................................................... 25
8
Hot water circuit .................................................................................................................. 26
8.1
8.2
Hot water operating mode ...................................................................................................................... 26
Setting the set point for the hot water circuit .......................................................................................... 27
9
Cooling circuit ..................................................................................................................... 28
9.1
Cooling circuit operating mode ............................................................................................................... 28
10
Service level ........................................................................................................................ 29
10.1
10.2
Change password .................................................................................................................................. 29
Building time constant ............................................................................................................................ 29
1
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
10.8
10.9
10.9.1
10.10
10.10.1
10.11
10.11.1
10.11.2
10.12
10.13
10.13.1
10.13.2
Frost protection....................................................................................................................................... 30
Pump and valve exercising .................................................................................................................... 31
Save and reset start-up settings and factory settings ............................................................................ 32
Setting up and activating the legionella function .................................................................................... 33
Change alarm limits for heating, cooling and hot water circuits ............................................................. 34
Settings hot water circuit ........................................................................................................................ 35
Settings cooling circuit ............................................................................................................................ 36
Settings for cooling circuit temperatures ........................................................................................... 36
Systemobjects settings ........................................................................................................................... 37
SMS alarm ......................................................................................................................................... 37
Communication settings ......................................................................................................................... 38
Set IP address, IP mask and gateway for Advanced WEB module .................................................. 38
Set IP address, IP mask and Gateway for Web onboard ................................................................. 39
Read and change the MBus parameters ............................................................................................... 39
Read and change the ModBus parameters ........................................................................................... 40
RS485 ............................................................................................................................................... 40
TCP/IP ............................................................................................................................................... 41
11
Tests .................................................................................................................................... 42
11.1
11.2
11.3
Testing the wirings ................................................................................................................................. 42
Testing the pumps .................................................................................................................................. 43
Testing the valves .................................................................................................................................. 43
12
Exceptions calendar ........................................................................................................... 44
12.1
Exceptions calendar ............................................................................................................................... 44
13
Services for IQHeat ............................................................................................................. 46
13.1
13.2
Standard services ................................................................................................................................... 46
Optional services .................................................................................................................................... 46
14
Schematic diagram ............................................................................................................. 47
14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
IQHeat50 ................................................................................................................................................ 47
IQHeat 60/110 ........................................................................................................................................ 48
IQHeat100 .............................................................................................................................................. 49
IQHeat50 Cooling ................................................................................................................................... 50
15
16
Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................. 51
Options ................................................................................................................................ 52
16.1
16.1.1
16.2
16.3
16.4
16.4.1
16.5
16.5.1
16.5.2
16.5.3
16.5.4
Communication module Web, Adv. Web ............................................................................................... 52
Services associated with Adv Web ................................................................................................... 52
Communication module BacNet IP ........................................................................................................ 53
Communication module ModBus ........................................................................................................... 53
Module MBus.......................................................................................................................................... 53
Services associated with MBus ......................................................................................................... 53
LEDs for BSP and BUS diagnostics ....................................................................................................... 54
BUS for Adv Web module ................................................................................................................. 54
BUS for BacNet ................................................................................................................................. 54
BUS for ModBus ................................................................................................................................ 54
BUS for MBus .................................................................................................................................... 54
17
Overview of available menus ............................................................................................. 55
2
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
1 General
IQHeat is an intelligent controller for district heating and district cooling substations.
Whether it is energy saving, energy cost reduction or comfort monitoring that is your ultimate goal, IQHeat from
Alfa Laval is an excellent choice.
IQHeat is fitted with a display.
Communication with the processing unit takes place with ModBus or TCP/IP.
Different methods of communication are available, depending on the external communication modules that are
connected.
Add-on modules give you the option of
 meter data via MBus
 Integrated WEB server where all data and history from IQHeat is available through a simple web
browser without requiring any special software or server connections
 BacNet and LON as well as ModBus give you the option of controlling IQHeat from the central building
automation system.
IQHeat always has a temperature sensor on the primary side supply and return, and on the secondary side
supply and return. The sensors allow for the effective limitation of return temperatures and simple monitoring
and remote troubleshooting of functional or comfort problems.
IQHeat is always factory tested and factory set for easy connection to an existing Maxi or Maxi Cooling system
and can be started immediately.
IQHeat comes in a range of models:






IQHeat50: serves one heating circuit
IQHeat60: serves two separate heating circuits
IQHeat100: serves one heating circuit and one hot water circuit
IQHeat110: serves two separate heating circuits and one hot water circuit
IQHeat120: serves three separate heating circuits and one hot water circuit
IQHeat50 Cooling: serves one cooling circuit
This manual describes all the services, functions and settings that can be made with the processing unit, which
is common to all models of IQHeat.
Not all of the services, functions and settings are utilised by the different models.
1.1
Information about this document
Temperatures given in °K, degrees Kelvin, refer to a temperature difference.
3
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
1.2
Product overview IQHeat cabinets
DDC1 Controller
with
HMI interface
,
DUC 2
Extension modu le,
not included in IQHeat50
230V outlet
Fuses
Earth Fault Breaker
1.2.1 Base material list for IQHeat
See Chapter 14 Schematic diagram for information on the components included in the various models of
IQHeat.
4
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
1.3
DDC1; Processing unit with Display and TCP/IP interface
DDC 1, Processing unit is fitted with an integral control panel where the plant values can be read and set.
The processing unit has the following characteristics
 RS-485 ModBus RTU for third party bus
 full modem port RS-232 for remote service
 process bus for connecting room units and external
control panel (DPSU)
 up to three additional communication modules for
integration into the master system
 local service contact for control panel (RJ45) and PC
tools (USB)
 SD card to upgrade applications and software versions
 Ethernet service port (remote or local) via standard web
browser.
USB interface is of the type B output.
5
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
2 Communication principles
2.1
Internal Interface
A ModBus interface is always available in the processing unit. The RS485 interface can be defined as master
or slave; if both master and slave are required, a communication module must be connected with ModBus.
The TCP/IP interface is always the slave – both can be switched off.
2.1.1 LEDs for BSP and BUS diagnostics
The processing unit has two LEDs, BSP and BUS, for diagnostics. The LEDs can light with three different
colours: yellow, green and red.
BSP indicates the status of the internal program in DDC1.
BUS indicates the status of the external communication.
BSP LEDs Start/Stop
Mode
Software update mode (download of
application or new software)
No application is loaded
Application loaded but is not in operation
Application is in operation
BSP error (software error)
Hardware error
Status LED BSP
LED BSP lights every second alternating between red and
green
Yellow LED flashing, lights 50 ms and off 1,000 ms
Yellow LED lights
Green LED lights
Red LED flashes at 2 Hz
Red LED lights
6
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
BUS LED
This LED only indicates the status of the integrated modem communication.
The LED does not indicate the status of internal communication (for input/output modules or communication
modules). This status is displayed on each expansion module.
Mode
Status LED BUS
No modem connected, or LED disconnected
Off
Modem connected and initiated, but
communication is not active
Modem connected and communication is
active
Modem connected but is defective (as well as
supply missing, initialisation is not possible)
Yellow LED lights
Green LED lights
Red LED lights
2.1.2 Upgrade with SD card
The processing unit can be upgraded with an SD card (FAT16 model, max 2GB). When
upgrading, connect the SD card to the memory card reader at the top right side of the
processing unit.
The upgrade requires logging in at service level.
There are two options for loading from SD card
 Apply - only control parameters loaded - recommended.
 Full - all settings given new values, including IP addresses and the like.
1.
2.
3.
4.
From the Main index select Systemobjects.
Select Save/load and press OK.
Select Settings load > SD and press OK.
Select from
 Execute- recommended
 Full> Wait 1m for Restart - not
recommended
5. From the menu Save/load
select Restart required!, press OK.
6. Select Execute and press OK.
7. The new settings take effect after restart.
NOTE: Connecting and disconnecting during read and write privileges may lead to data loss.
2.2
Expansion module AHU with 14 I/O
The module's universal inputs and outputs provide high flexibility.
Three expansion modules can be connected to the processing unit.
The expansion module is not included in IQHeat50 and IQHeat50 Cooling.
The expansion module has the following characteristics:



eight universal inputs/outputs (configurable inputs/outputs for
analogue or digital signals)
four relay outputs (NO contacts)
two analogue outputs (DC 0 ... 10 V)
2.2.1 Setting expansion module's DIP switches
The expansion module is fitted with DIP switches. These are used to set the communication address for
communication with the processing unit.
7
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
Switches 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are configurable and are used to set the slave addresses, while switch 6 is used for
termination.
For the last expansion module that is used, switch 6 must be set to ON.
With one
expansion module
(standard IQHeat
50, 100, 110)
With two expansion modules (first
and then second, IQHeat120)
2.2.2 LEDs for BSP and BUS diagnostics
The expansion module has two LEDs, BSP and BUS, for diagnostics. The LEDs can light with three different
colours: yellow, green and red.
Status of the LEDs:
Mode
Communication error
Communication OK
Communication OK but one or more
parameters are not configured
properly
Status LED BUS
Red LED lights
Green LED lights
Green and red LED (yellow) lights
Mode
Status LED BSP
Incorrect BSP or slave address
BSP in operation (DDC application)
Red LED flashes at 2 Hz
Green LED lights
8
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
2.3
Fuses
2.3.1 For the Swedish market
IQHeat50, IQHeat50 cooling
Fuse
Type
Current (A)
F0
F1
F2
Supply Measure Plug
Pump Heat/Cooling
Transformer
6A
6A
0.8 A
Draw. No:
D-738636
IQHeat60/100/110/120
Fuse
F0
F1
F2
F3
F4
Draw. No:
Type
Supply Measure Plug
Pump Heat 1
Pump Heat 2
Pump HWC
Supply Transformer
D-738596
2.3.2 For the Norwegian market
IQHeat50 2-phase, IQHeat50 cooling
Fuse
Type
F0
F1
F2
Draw. No:
Supply Measure, Plug.
Supply Transformer
Supply Transformer
D-738650
Current (A)
6A
6A
6A
2A
0.8 A
Current
(A)
6 Ax2
0.8 A
0.8 A
IQHeat60/100/110 (120) 2-phase
Fuse
Type
Current (A)
F0
F1
F2
Supply Measure, Plug.
Supply Transformer
Supply Transformer
6 Ax2
0.8 A
0.8 A
Draw. No:
D-738635
9
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
3 The control panel
All images in this document, in the menus in the control panel, are simply example images and should not be
used as a basis for settings.
The control panel is integrated into the processing unit.
Info-button
Push to change between
Main overview and
Main index.
Alarm button with LED
Off: no alarm
Flashing: ongoing alarm
Permanently lit: Alarm ongoing and
acknowledged
Press to to change between alarm menus
3.1
Select and OK knob
Turn to select menues, parameters and parameter
values.
Push: to exit the setting page and
adopt a changed value
Extended push: to go to the Password page
ESC-button
Push to go back to last active page or to cancel
Extended push: go back to the Main overvie w.
Display/HMI settings
1. Hold the ESC key down until the menu with HMI settings appears.
2. Select HMI settings to change the display's:
 background colour
 time shut-down
 contrast
 brightness
3. To return to the Main index press ESC and select
Process unit list > Local connection, press OK.
10
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
3.2
Display layout
a) current privilege level:
 no symbol - no privilege level
 one key - privilege level 6
 two keys - privilege level 4
 three keys - privilege level 2.
b) title for the displayed page
c) 7 - line number of the selected line
16 - total number of lines on the page
d) scroll arrow up - shows that the page contains additional lines above which appear when you scroll up
e) scroll arrow down - shows that the page contains additional lines below which appear when you scroll
down
f)
the arrow means that there are underlying levels below this level to go to
g) current line
h) Alarm indication
3.3
Various line types
Navigation bar:
A navigation bar displays the option on a black
background when it is selected. The current value of
the option appears in front of the navigation arrow.
Navigation:


select the line: turn the navigation dial
go to underlying level: press the navigation dial
Viewing bar:
A Viewing bar displays the option on a black
background even when viewing in read-only mode.
The current value of the option appears.
11
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
Settings bar:
A setting bar shows the parameter name and the
current value on a black background.
Setting value:





3.4
select the line: turn the navigation dial
switch settings page: press the navigation dial
set parameter value: turn the navigation dial
close the settings page and apply the changed parameter value: press the navigation dial
close the settings page without applying the changed parameter value: press ESC.
Setting parameters
When only one value is selectable:
The line with a tick in front (Fire Set point) shows the
set value
Change the value:
 select new value: turn the navigation dial
 apply the new value and close the settings page: press the navigation dial
 keep the old value and close the settings page: press the ESC key.
Setting analogue parameter values:
A scale displays the minimum and maximum values
that can be set.
Change set value:
 change the value below the arrow: turn the navigation dial
 apply the new value and close the settings page: press the navigation dial/OK
 keep the old value and close the settings page: press the ESC key.
12
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
4 Log in and set the clock
4.1
Password and login
The controller has password protection, allowing access to different menus.
The following log-in levels are available:
All users: no log-in, no password required
 read access to all menus except the system parameters, configuration and detail menus
 read access to alarm lists and alarm history
End user, level 6, password 1000
 appears with one key in the upper left corner of the display
 all rights as for in "all users"
 read access to all menus except configuration menus
 write access to the main set points (Setpoints/Settings. > Setpoints)
 alarms and alarm history can be acknowledged and reset
Service level, level 4, password 2000
Used for configuring I/Os and system settings. Only qualified service personnel should make changes at this
level.
 appears with two keys in the upper left corner of the display
 all rights as for "End users"
 access to all menus except I/O configuration and system settings
OEM, level 2
 appears with three keys in the upper left corner of the display
 all rights as for System Administrator
 access to all menus and system settings.
Contact Alfa Laval if there is a need to change anything at this level.
4.1.1
Log in
1. Keep the OK button pressed to access the
Password menu.
2. The first digit of four is marked with 0.
3. Turn the navigation dial until the desired number
appears.
4. Press OK to proceed to the next digit, continue
until all four are entered correctly and press OK.
The current key symbol will appear in the upper left
corner of the display window.
13
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
4.2
Time functions setting of time and date
The controller's clock includes the functions for summer and winter time changes and leap years. The clock has
a backup function to cover at least 24 hours of power cuts.
4.2.1
Reading date and time
1. Press Info to access Main overview.
2. The top line shows the set date and time.
4.2.2 Setting date and time
Requires login at end user level.
1. Press Info until the page with the date and time are displayed.
2. Move the cursor to the line for date and time.
3. Press OK to edit the day.
4. Set the correct day with the navigation dial, press OK to confirm and continue to edit the month and
year.
5. Continue to edit the hours, minutes and seconds in the same way.
6. Exit the menu with ESC.
14
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
5 Alarm management
The processing unit alerts for different situations. Alarms are indicated on the control display with the alarm
symbol
.
Alarms are divided into three classes:



A or 1 = Alarm, High
B or 2 = Alarm, Low
C or 3 = Alarm, Warning
Active alarms:
 alarm symbol in the display flashes
 alarm button on the control panel flashes
Acknowledged but still active alarm:
 alarm symbol in the display lights
 alarm button on the control panel lights
If a GSM modem is connected to the processing unit, an alarm is sent by text message to the specified
telephone number.
All incoming alarms generate an entry in the Alarm list and in Alarm history. When an alarm is no longer active,
it will disappear from the Alarm list.
The Alarm history contains the same information about the alarm as the Alarm list, i.e. time and date when the
alarm was sent. This also includes information on when the alarm was actioned. Incoming alarms are indicated
by a plus (+) before the name, while actioned are indicated by a minus (-). When the Alarm list is empty, there
should be as many + as – entries in the Alarm history.
5.1
Alarm list
The Alarm list contains all active alarms, acknowledged and unacknowledged. The Alarm list may contain up to
50 entries.
An alarm will remain in the Alarm list until it has been actioned.
The Alarm list menu has the option of selecting Acknowledge > Execute.
If Execute is selected, this means the alarm is confirmed, the Alarm button switches from flashing to steady
light. All information about the alarms remains.
1. Press the Alarm button once to see the details of the last alarm.
2. Press the Alarm button again to access the Alarm list.
3. A list of all active alarms now appears.
All active alarms correspond to an entry in the Alarm list.
+ Alarm name
Ex
+ IO in manual mode
15
Number of alarms that
are active.
In this example, eight.
Status
Alarm
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
4. To see detailed information about an alarm, select the desired alarm by using the navigation dial and
press OK.
All active alarms have the following information included in the Alarm list.
5.2
+ Alarm name
Status
Alarm class
Alarm class
Date
Time
Alarm history
The Alarm history may contain up to 50 entries.
Each new alarm generates an entry in the Alarm history list. Incoming alarms are indicated by a plus (+) before
the name, while actioned alarms are indicated by a minus (-).
1. Press the Alarm button three times to access the Alarm history.
2. All alarms, both active and actioned, are now listed.
+/- Alarm name
Number of alarms in the
list.
Status
3. To see detailed information about an alarm, select the desired alarm by using the navigation dial and
press OK.
5.3
Settings
In the Alarm entry, under Settings, you can see how many alarms there are in the Alarm list and Alarm history.
Here you can also set the sort order for how alarms are presented in the Alarm list and Alarm history. Each list is set
individually, so they may appear differently depending on the list that is opened.
Alarms can be sorted as:



Sort 1:




time
object ID
priority
state




time
object ID
priority
state
Sort 2:
Descending
 active
 passive
NOTE: Resetting the Alarm list and/or Alarm history in the Settings menu deletes the alarms from the lists. The
alarm indicator remains but the information about the alarm is deleted.
16
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
5.4
Alarms and their classification
All sensors use function alarms that are enabled when, for example, there is a cable break or short circuit. On
top of this, there are a number of different types of level alarms; high-level and low-level where the size of the
sensors' level can be limited. These level alarms are filtered with a delay time.
A selection of alarms is displayed in the table below.
Designation
Pump heating circuit
Frost alarm
Heating circuit, Supply
Hot water supply
Primary, Supply
Outside temperature
Heating circuit, Return
Heating circuit pressure/level
Temp deviation, Heat
Temp deviation Hot Water
HWC-temperature
Secondary circuit, Supply
Secondary circuit, Return
Temp deviation Cooling
Name
Level alarm
Function alarm sensor
Function alarm sensor
Function alarm sensor
Function alarm sensor
Function alarm sensor
Level alarm, pressure
Control deviation,
heating circuit
Control deviation, hot
water
Function alarm sensor,
level alarm
Function alarm sensor
Function alarm sensor,
level alarm
Control deviation
cooling circuit
17
Class
A
A
A
A
B
A
B
B
B
Remark
Signal input from pump
See description in point 2
B
Adjustable level and delay
B/B
Low level
Outside temperature is set to -1° C
High level, high and low pressure
High level or high and low pressure
Adjustable level and delay
A
B/B
B
Adjustable level and delay
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
6 General functions
6.1
Reading the current temperatures and valve modes
1. Press Info to access Main overview.
2. Here you can see information about all the
connected heating circuits, cooling circuits and
hot water circuits.
3. Scroll down in the menu with the navigation dial.
6.2
Frost protection
Regardless of the selected operating mode and settings for pump start and indoor temperature, the heat will be
activated if the outside temperature drops below approximately +1.5°C (factory set).
This function is installed to protect buildings and heating systems from frost. The hot water circuit also has a
frost protection function that cannot be turned off.
For each heating circuit and hot water circuit it is possible to set a range of temperatures to enable the frost
protection.
If the pumps are turned off in manual pump mode, this function does not apply.
The frost protection for the plant works in two ways.
 If the outside temperature is lower than the set temperature Setp.plant frost about +1.5°C the pumps
are activated every six hours for at least 10 minutes.
 If the outside temperature drops by 5° below the set temperature Setp.plant frost the pumps will run
continuously.
The temperature shut-down for frost protection and change of temperature Setp.plant frost can be made at
service level.
18
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
6.3
System objects
6.3.1 Plant information
Information about the plant name, location address and versions of component parts can be read in the System
parameters menu:
1. From the Main index select Systemobjects.
2. To read the name and location address select Plant information.
3. To check the current versions on connected parts, select Versions.
6.3.2 Restoring the start-up settings
For more information on start-up settings, see 10.5 Save and reset start-up settings and factory settings.
1. From the Main index select Systemobjects.
2. Select Save/load and press OK.
3. Select Execute and press OK to return to the start-up settings.
6.3.3 Language selection
Here you can set the preferred language for the display and snapshot.
1. From the Main index select Systemobjects.
2. Select Language selection and press OK.
3. Select preferred language and press OK.
 Swedish
 English
 German
 French.
19
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
7 Heating circuit
IQHeat gives you the option of making settings for various daily and weekly programs. These can be used, for
example, as automatic night lowering of the flow temperature and thereby the indoor temperature.
The time program that appears under Common cannot be used to control the heating circuits.
See also the description in Chapter 7.5 Heating Limit ECO.
The menus and setting options are the same for all heating circuits, which is why only one heating circuit 1 HC1
appears in these instructions.
7.1
Operating mode heating
The heating circuit can be set in one of four operating modes:




Auto -the plant is controlled by the time program see 7.2 Heat time program.
BuildProt - the plant is shut-down but is automatically started when the outside temperature is lower
than the value for Set Plant frost (1,5°), see 10.3 Frost protection.
Economy - plant uses set point Room temp eco.
Comfort - plant uses the set point Room temp comf
1. From the Main index select Heating Circuit1.
2. Select Operating mode and press OK.
3. Select preferred operating mode and press OK.
20
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
7.2
Heat time program
Each heating circuit can have six different times set per day in the week. For each time, one of three modes;
buildprot, economy and comfort, can be selected that are then in effect until the next time occurs. If only one
time is set, the circuit will always run with the selected mode.
1. From the Main index select Heating Circuit.
2. Select Time schedule and press OK.
3. Current value for the heating circuit appears
here.
4. Select Monday and press OK.
NOTE: Time-1 is always set to 00:00. This cannot be
changed.
5. Use the navigation dial to select the desired
values and transit times for Value-1-Value-6, and
Time-2-Time-6. Confirm each selection by
pressing OK.
6. Press ESC to exit the menu.
In the example, the current heating circuit on Mondays is
in Economy mode from midnight, 00:00 to 7:00 when it
switches to Comfort mode.
At 09:00 it reverts back to Economy mode and remains in
this mode until 16:00 when it switches back to Comfort
mode.
At 00:00 it goes into the mode that is set in the time
program for Tuesday.
*: * means that the time is disabled.
7. When the Time program is set for Monday, it can
be copied to other days.
8. Select Copy Moday to and press OK.
9. Select copy to:
 weekdays, Tu-Fri
 all week Tu-Sun.
21
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
7.3
Setting the value for the heating circuit
1. Press Info to access the Main index.
2. Select Heating Circuit and press OK.
3. Select the parameter to be changed and press
OK.
4. Set the desired value with the navigation dial,
press OK.
Parameter:
Operating mode
Shift room.t.comf.
Shift room.t.eco.
Room temp.comf
Room temp.eco.
Flow temp.design
(Y2)
Setp.fl.temp.high
(Y6)
7.4
Settings range
 Auto
 BuilProt
 Economy
 Comfort
-12…12 K
-12…12 K
20…50°C
10…21°C
25…130°C
0…65°C
Setting the heating curve
The heat curve is a 7-point heating curve, where point 1 is a maximum limit and point 7 is a minimum limit. The
five points, 2-6, is what forms the heating curve.
Points 2-6 can be adjusted at end-user level while adjusting points 1 and 7 requires logging in at service level.
The design outside temperature, X2, is determined by where in the country the substation is located.
X2 is set in service level.
The Y values of the curve depend on the building's insulation, exposure to wind and the dimensioning of the
heating systems in the building.
A curve that is set too low means that the heat will not be sufficient, that the secondary flows are too high.
A curve that is set too high results in unnecessary energy losses and can lead to excess temperatures in parts
of the buildings that are not adjusted for low flows.
22
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
1. Press Info to access the Main index.
2. Now select Heating Circuit> Curve points, press
OK.
3. In the Curve points menu select the parameter to
be changed and press OK.
4. Set the desired value with the navigation dial,
press OK.
Parameter:
Settings
Relates to
range
Outs.temp.
Design outside
design (X2)
temperature
Flow temp.
25…130°C
Flow temperature
Design.(Y2)
at X2, outside
temp design
Flow temp, Y3
0…130°C
Flow temp at
outside temp. X3
Flow temp. Y4
0…130°C
Flow temp at
outside temp. X4
Flow temp. Y5
0…130°C
Flow temp at
outside temp. X5
Setp.fl.temp.
0…65°C
Flow temp at
high(Y6)
outside temp. X6
7.5
Heating Limit ECO
The control has a built-in ECO function.
The ECO function ensures that heat is only started when needed. This means that savings are made for pump
energy, and ensures that no heat is present on the radiator side when it is not needed.
The temperature limit for when the heat is turned off is the result of the operating mode's set point minus the
Heating limit (ECO).
Example:
The controller is in Economy mode and Room temp.eco.is set to 20 °C. Heating limit (ECO) is set to -5.0°C.
When the outside temperature rises above 15°C (20-5) the heat is turned off.
The highest of the following values is used as input to compare with the heat limit:
 current outside temperature
 dampened outside temperature with standard building time constant (e.g. 20 hours)
 dampened outside temperature with summer-winter time constant (e.g. 70 hours)
This means that in summer, the current outside temperature temporarily drops during the night, without the
heat going on.
As summer nights are short, this has no appreciable effect on comfort, but can save energy as heat does not
switch on unnecessarily.
23
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
7.5.1
Setting Heating limit (ECO)
Setting the Heating limit (ECO) requires logging on at
Service level.
1. Press Info to access the Main index.
2. Now select Commissioning > Plant settings >
Heating circuit1.
3. Select Heating limit (ECO) and press OK.
4. Set the desired value, -20…0°C
7.5.2 Heat limit function
The temperature that is used as input data for the heating curve is called "use outside temp." The used outside
temperature consists of a combination of the calculated (dampened by the construction time constant, for
example 20 hours) and the current outside temperature. For quick changes it is appropriate to respond in part
directly, without waiting for the full change of the estimated outside temperature.
Activating the heat limit function requires login at
Service level.
1. Press Info to access the Main index.
2. Now select Commissioning > Plant Config >
Common.
3. Select the Heat lim. function and press OK.
4. Select preferred mode and press OK.
Parameter:
Relates to
None
The ECO mode is not
enabled, the heat is not shut
off during the summer
Filtered
Average value forms the
outside temperature
Fil+Act
The average value of the
dampened outside
temperature and the current
outside temperature
5.
6.
7.
8.
24
Return to Plant Config.
Select Restart, press OK.
Select Execute and press OK.
The new settings take effect after restart.
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
7.6
Parallel offset of heating curve
The set heating curve can, if necessary, be parallel offset.
Parallel offsetting of the heating curve requires login
at Service level.
1. Press Info to access the Main index.
2. Now select Commissioning > Plant settings. >
Heating circuit.
3. Select Flow temp. shift and press OK.
4. Select the number of degrees for parallel
offset of the heating curve, -10°C…0°C, and
press OK.
25
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
8 Hot water circuit
8.1
Hot water operating mode
The hot water circuit can be set in one of four operating modes:
 Auto - plant uses the set Set point and can be controlled via an external communication interface. To
activate the legionella function, you must select the Auto mode.
 PlanProt (Protective operation) - water is only heated if there is a risk that the water pipes might freeze
 Reduced - plant uses a reduced Set point. Reduced Set point can only be set if the hot water circuit
has timing control.
 Normal - plant uses the set Set point.
1. From the Main Index, select Domest.hot water
and press OK.
2. Select Operating mode and press OK.
3. Select preferred operating mode and press OK.
 Auto
 PlantProt
 Reduced
 Normal; recommended
26
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
8.2
Setting the set point for the hot water circuit
All countries have different rules for how hot or cold tap water should be.
Alfa Laval recommends the hot water temperature is at least 55°C and a hot water circulation not less than
50°C.
At a temperature below 50°C there is a risk of bacterial growth.
Note that at temperatures above 60°C the risk of scalding increases.
Set points above 63°C result in an increased risk of precipitation of lime on the surfaces of the heat exchanger.
1. From the Main Index, select Domest.hot water
and press OK.
2. Select Set point temp. normal and press OK.
3. Set the desired value using the navigation dial,
press OK.
Parameter:
Set point
temp normal
27
Settings range
45…80°C
Relates to
The set point is
used in Normal
and Auto
operating
modes
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
9 Cooling circuit
9.1
Cooling circuit operating mode
The cooling circuit can be set to Manually Off; Yes or No.
1. From the Main index, select Cooling Circuit
and press OK.
2. Select Manually Off and press OK.
3. Select preferred operating mode and press
OK.
 Yes
 No
28
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
10 Service level
The following settings and tests require logging in at Service level. See 4 Log in and set the clock.
10.1 Change password
1. From the Main index select Systemobjects.
2. Now select Password handling > Change
password.
3. Select the password to be changed and press
OK.
10.2 Building time constant
Different building temperature inertia gives different sensitivity to rapid changes in the outside temperature.
The inertia is affected by insulation, wall thickness, material and heating systems.
The value is used to calculate how the current outside temperature affects the indoor temperature, and thereby
how the heating will be affected in order to provide the best comfort and economy. The building time constant is
used to calculate the parameter "calculated outside temperature."
Typical values for setting the building time constant.
Thick walls, Stone building
Modern light building with good insulation
Light building, thin insulation
30-60 hours.
20-50 hours
10-20 hours
1. From the Main index select Commissioning.
2. Now select Plant settings > Common
> Calc.Outside temp.
3. In the Calc.outside temp. menu select the
parameter to be changed and press OK.
4. After each parameter change, press OK to save
the new settings.
Settings
Build.time
const
Su/Wi time
const.
Reset
outs.temp
29
Settings range
0…200 t
0…200 t
Apply
Explanation
Building time
constant
Summer/winter
time constant
Resets the
dampened
outside
temperature, and
sets it to the
current outside
temperature
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
10.3 Frost protection
The frost protection function can be switched off and on. You can also change the Setp.plant frost.
1. From the Main index select Commissioning.
2. Now select Plant settings > Common.
3. Select the parameter to be changed and press
OK.
4. After each parameter change, press OK to save
the new settings.
Parameter
Plant frost
Setp.plant frost
30
Settings
range
Yes
No
-4…15°
Explanation
Enable frost
protection for the
plant
At which the
temperature
function frost
protection is
enabled
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
10.4 Pump and valve exercising
The pumps are exercised to prevent them from "jamming" following long-term downtime. Exercising is active
when the pumps are idle, if the downtime is due to the pumps being turned off by the ECO function, i.e. it is
warmer outside than the ECO mode's set outT.
Exercising parameters can be set, for period time and duration. The factory setting is about 30 seconds running
time, 1 time/week.
The pumps must have been idle for at least one hour before they can be exercised.
1. From the Main index select Commissioning.
2. Now select Plant settings > Common.
3. From the Common settings menu select the
parameter to be changed and press OK.
4. After each parameter change, press OK to save
the new settings.
Parameter:
Pump &
valve kick
Settings
range
Mon-Sun,
00:0023:59
Duration
0…200 s
Standby time
0…2000 t
Explanation
Day and time for start
E.g.:
Mo, *. * > every Monday
at 00:00
Sa, 07:00 > every
Saturday at 07:00
*,*:* > exercising
activated in ranges
Sets the time for
exercising
E.g.:
10 > duration of 10
seconds
Time between activation
times
E.g.:
168 > after 168 hours
NOTE: Pump & valve kick = *,*:* and
Standby time =0 means no pump exercising.
31
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
10.5 Save and reset start-up settings and factory settings
The first time IQHeat is started, the Start-up settings and Factory settings are the same thing.
After adjustment of the plant-specific parameters such as heating curve, time programs and the like, it is useful
to save these settings for later use if something goes wrong.
The factory settings cannot be changed and they can only be restored from the service level, while the start-up
settings can be restored at end user level.
1. From the Main index select Systemobjects.
2. Now select Save/load.
3. From the menu select the desired action and
press OK.
Sett.service load
Reset to saved settings
Sett.factory load
Sett.service save
Reset to factory settings
Save the set settings as startup settings
4. Confirm with Apply.
32
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
10.6 Setting up and activating the legionella function
The legionella function is not enabled at the factory.
The set point for legionella must never exceed the temperature for district heating supply. If the legionella set
point is set too close to or above the supply temperature, this may result in a fully open control valve and
thereby large district heat flows.
Always check the supply temperature with the district heating supplier. This is especially important in the
summer.
NOTE: The hot water circuit must be in the Auto operating mode for the legionella function to be enabled.
1. From the Main index select Commissioning.
2. Now select Plant Settings > Domest.hot water.
3. From the HW settings menu select the
parameter to be changed and press OK.
4. After each parameter change, press OK to
save the new settings.
Parameter:
Setpoint legion.
Settings
range
55…100°C
Time legion.
00:00…23:59
Weekday 1-4
legion.
Legion hold
time
Legion. interval
33


none
Mon...Sun
0…600 m

0-200 days
Explanation
The hot water is
raised to this
temperature to
prevent bacterial
growth
Time when the
function is
enabled
Date when the
function is to be
enabled
None=the
function is
controlled by
"Legion range".
How long the
function is active
How often the
function is to be
enabled
0 = "Weekday X
set" controls the
function
1-200= Number
of days between
the activation of
the function
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
Parameter:
Legion.failure
Alarm delay
Settings
Explanation
range
The type of alarm to be sent if the
function fails.
 Plant.off
 Plant stopped.
(A)
 Plant shut
 Critical (A)
down.
 Affected part
 Low (B)
of the plant is
shut down
 Only
 Warning
message.
(C)
 No message,
no alarm.
 No alarm
Time
delay for
 0…18000
high and low
s
priority alarms
10.7 Change alarm limits for heating, cooling and hot water circuits
Alarm limits for flow temperature, return temperature and deviation alarms for flow temperature can be set
according to preferences.
The change is made in the same way as for heating, cooling, and hot water circuits.
Here the alarm change is described for the hot water circuit deviation alarm and alarm for the flow temperature.
1. From the Main index select Commissioning.
2. Now select Plant settings > Domest.hot water.
3. Select the parameter to be changed, press OK.
Parameter
Settings range
Explanation
Max.deviation
0…50 K
Maximum
difference
between actual
value and set
point before an
alarm
Start delay
0…36000 s
After the set
time, the
function is
enabled after
start.
Delay
0…65535 s
Time delay for
high and low
priority alarms.
Priority
Plant stopped
 Plant.off (A)
34

Critical (A)
Plant shut down.

Low (B)
Affected part of
the plant is shut
down

Warning (C)
Only message.

No alarm
No message, no
alarm.
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
4. Select Flow temp.
5. Select the value to be changed, press OK.
Parameter
High limit
alarm
Settings range
0…200°C
Low limit alarm
0…200°C
Alarm delay
0…18000 s
Alarm priority
Explanation
At which the
temperature
alarm is
enabled
At which the
temperature
alarm is
enabled
Time delay for
high and low
priority alarms.
Plant stopped

Plant.off (A)

Critical (A)

Low (B)
Plant shut
down.
Affected part of
the plant is
shut down

Warning (C)
Only message.

No alarm
No message,
no alarm.
6. Select Return temperature and make the settings in
the same way as for Flow temperatures.
10.8 Settings hot water circuit
1. From the Main index select Commissioning.
2. Now select Plant config> Domestic hot water.
3. Select the parameter to be changed, press OK.
4. Return to Plant config.
5. Select Restart, press OK.
6. Select Execute and press OK.
7. The new settings take effect after restart.
Parameter
Settings
Explanation
range
DW type
Flow
Flow should be
Tank
selected
Legion.function  No
 Not active
 Yes
 Active
 Circ.
 Legionella
Pump
function with
circulation pump
is recommended
Alarm flow temp
Time sch.cir
pump
Lim.h.met.
common
35
Yes
Activation of the
No
deviation alarm
 None
 No schedule
 Local
 Local schedule
 Common  Common
schedule
Limitation of
 No
common heating
 Yes
meters
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
10.9 Settings cooling circuit
1. From the Main index select
Commissioning.
2. Now select Plant config> Cooling circuit.
3. Select the parameter to be changed, press
OK.
4. Return to Plant config.
5. Select Restart, press OK.
6. Select Execute and press OK.
7. The new settings take effect after restart.
Parameter
Settings
Explanation
range
Control type
Heating
Cooling
Setp.type
 Heat
fl.temp
Dem
 Curve +
S/W
 Curve
 Fix +
S/W
 Fix
Alarm fl.temp
Yes
Activation of the
sec.
No
deviation alarm
10.9.1 Settings for cooling circuit temperatures
1. From the Main index select Commissioning.
2. Now select Plant settings > Cooling circuit.
3. Select the parameter to be changed, press OK.
Parameter
Setp.fl.temp.min
Setp.fl.temp.max
Setp. Flow temp
36
Settings
range
-10…30 °C
5…190 °C
-10…190 °C
Explanation
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
10.10 Systemobjects settings
10.10.1 SMS alarm
1. From the Main index select Systemobjects.
2. Now select Communication> SMS > Settings.
3. Here up to four different telephone numbers
can be given for SMS alarms.
4. Press OK to save the new settings.
5. Go back to the SMS menu and select SMS
number.
6. For information on settings made in the time
program see 7.2.Heat time program.
Instead of operating mode, the telephone
numbers in time program for SMS numbers
are listed.
37
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
10.11 Communication settings
10.11.1 Set IP address, IP mask and gateway for Advanced WEB module
If the communication module for IP/Ethernet is used, connect the accompanying TP cable to the output for
Internet traffic. The communication module is set in DHCP mode i.e. it gets its address automatically from the
server.
If a fixed IP address is used, this can be set via the Operator panel.
Here is a description of how to set the IP address. The IP Mask and Gateway are set in the same way.
1. From the Main index select Systemobjects.
2. Now select Communication > Modules > 1-Web
module.
3. Select Given IP and enter the desired IP
address.
4. Press OK to save the new settings.
5. Set Write settings. to Active.
6. Restart to activate the settings.
38
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
10.11.2 Set IP address, IP mask and Gateway for Web onboard
Here is a description of how to set the IP address. The IP Mask and Gateway are set in the same way.
1. From the Main index select Systemobjects.
2. Now select Communications > IP-configuration.
3. Select Given IP and enter the desired IP
address.
4. Press OK to save the new settings.
5. Restart to activate the settings.
10.12 Read and change the MBus parameters
To check that the serial number on the integrator matches the set address parameters in the processing unit.
See Main index > Communication > Modules > M-Bus module.
Also check that a value is received from the heat meter.
NOTE: The update times for the meter values from the integrator are based on the current flow, so when the
primary flow is low, for example, in the summer, it will take a long time to update the measurement values.
1. From the Main index select Systemobjects.
2. Now select Communication > Modules > MBus module.
3. Press OK to save the new settings.
4. Restart to activate the settings.
39
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
1. From the Main index select Commissioning.
2. Now select Integrations > MBus.
3. After each parameter change, press OK to
save the new settings.
4. Select Restart, press OK.
5. Select Execute and press OK.
6. The new settings take effect after restart.
10.13 Read and change the ModBus parameters
10.13.1 RS485
To check and, if necessary, change so that the master unit uses the same address and parameter ModBus
RTU (RS485).
1. From the Main index select Systemobjects.
2. Now select Communication > ModBus >
RS485.
3. Select the parameter to be changed, press
OK.
4. After each parameter change, press OK to
save the new settings.
5. Select Restart, press OK.
6. Select Execute and press OK.
The new settings take effect after restart.
40
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
10.13.2 TCP/IP
For ModBus across IP; check the address to the processing unit, and use port 502 in the master system.
1. From the Main index select Systemobjects.
2. Now select Communication > ModBus > IP
configuration.
3. Select the parameter to be changed, press
OK.
4. After each parameter change, press OK to
save the new settings.
5. Select Restart, press OK.
6. Select Execute and press OK.
The new settings take effect after restart.
41
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
11 Tests
All tests require login at Service level.
11.1 Testing the wirings
All cables are tested simultaneously.
The test shows whether the sensors with their connections are correct.
NOTE: Wiring test is active until it is set to Passive. For the control to work, the cable test in normal operation
must be set to Passive.
1. From the Main index select Commissioning.
2. Select Wiring test.
3. Set Wiring test in Active mode, press OK.
4. Read the test results by selecting Heating Circuit
1/2/3 or Domest. hot water.
5. The cables were OK and this is indicated by the
three OKs in the image opposite.
6. Wiring test is to be set to Passive after the test.
42
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
11.2 Testing the pumps
All the pumps are tested in the same manner. Here is a description of the test of the hot water pump. Wiring
test must be Active when testing the pumps.
The test shows if the pumps and their control are correctly connected.
NOTE: Wiring test is active until it is set to Passive. For the control to work, the cable test in normal operation
must be set to Passive.
NOTE: The pump must be manually put back into Auto or On mode after the test.
1. From the Main index select Commissioning.
2. Now select Wiring test.
3. Select Heating circuit 1/2/3 or Domest. hot water
depending on the pump to be tested.
4. Test the pump by putting the pump in one of the
following modes:
 on
 off
 auto.
Press OK.
5. After the test, the pump must be set in the same
position as before the test.
6. Wiring test is to be set to Passive after the test.
11.3 Testing the valves
All the valves are tested in the same manner. Here is a description of the test of the primary circuit valve.
Wiring test must be active when testing the valves.
The test shows if the valves and their control are correctly connected.
NOTE: Wiring test is active until it is set to Passive. For the control to work, the cable test in normal operation
must be set to Passive.
NOTE: The valve must be manually put back into the correct mode 0-100% after the test
1. From the Main index select Commissioning.
2. Now select Wiring test.
3. Select Heating circuit 1/2/3 or Domest hot water
depending on the valve to be tested.
4. Test the valve by changing the percentage for
the valve. Range 0-100%
Press OK.
5. After the test, the valve must be set in the same
position as before the test.
6. Wiring test is to be set to Passive after the test.
43
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
12 Exceptions calendar
12.1 Exceptions calendar
Exception days can be defined in the Calendar contained in the Common menu. The calendar controls the
exceptions that can be selected in the Time program for the heating circuits and cooling circuit.
These may include specific dates, periods or weekdays. Exception days override the weekly schedule.
Switching is done according to the weekly schedule and the exceptions are specified in the daily schedule
when a switching time is enabled on the exception calendar.
The plant is turned off when a Calendar stop is enabled.
1.
2.
3.
4.
From the Main index select Common.
Now select Calendar.
Select the parameter to be changed and press OK.
After each parameter change, press OK to save the
new settings.
Para-meter
Choice-1...
Choise-10
(Start)
Date
44
Factory
settings
Invalid
Settings
range
 Date
 Range
 Weekday
 Invalid
* ,* .* .**
* ,* .* .**
 Mon…Su
n
 01…31,
ld
 Jan...Dec,
uneven
even
 1…99
Relates to
Specification
of exceptiontype:
– On any
given day
(e.g. Friday).
– A period
(e.g.
holiday).
– A certain
day of the
week.
– Times are
disabled.
This value
should
always be
placed last,
after date.
Sel x =
range: Enter
start date for
the period.
Sel x = date:
Enter
specific date.
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
Parameter
End date
Factory
settings
* ,* .* .**
Settings
range
* ,* .* .**
 Mon…Sun
 01…31, ld
 Jan...Dec,
uneven
even
 1…99
Weekday
* ,* ,*
* ,* ,*
 1st ... 5th,
last
 Mon…Sun
 Jan...Dec,
uneven even
Relates to
Sel x =
range: Enter
end date for
the period.
The end date
must be later
than the start
date.
Sel x =
weekday:
Enter
weekday.
Example Sel-x = Date; only time (for start) is relevant.



- (Start) Date = *, 01.01.09
Results: 1 January 2009 is an exception date.
- (Start) Date = Mon,*.*.00
Every Monday is an exception day.
- (Start) Date = *, *. Even.00
All days in even months (February, April, June, August, etc.) are exception days.
Examples Sel-x = range, the times for (Start) Date and End date are applied.

- (Start) Date = *, 23.06.09 / -End date = *, 12.07.09
June 23, 2009 through July, 12 2009 are exception days (e.g. holidays).
- (Start) Date = *, 23.12.00 / - End date = *, 31.12.00
December 23 to 31 is the exception period each year. Time End date = *, 01.01.00 does not work as
January 1 occurs prior to December 23.

- (Start) Date = *, 23.12.09 / End date = *, 01.01.10.
December 23, 2009 through January 1, 2010 are exception days.

- (Start) Date = *,*.*.00 / -End date = *,*.*.00
Warning! This means that exceptions are always active!
The plant is continuously in exception mode or disconnected.
Examples Sel-x= weekday, times for weekday are applied.

Weekday = *, Fr,*
Every Friday is the exception day...
 Weekday = *, Fr, Even
Every Friday in even months (February, April, June, August, etc.) are exception days.
Weekday = *,*,*
Warning! This means that exceptions are always active! The plant is continuously
in exception mode or disconnected
45
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
13 Services for IQHeat
Alfa Laval has developed a number of services to be able to offer enhanced functionality for the substation.
Alfa Laval works continuously on developing new functions and improving old ones, in order to simplify the
handling of IQHeat and provide the ability to monitor and optimise plants.
Good comfort and lower energy consumption can be combined and monitored using IQHeat.
Many functions are always included in an IQHeat. In addition to factors such as internal display, ModBus
communications, easy WEB and pump control, there are several other functions that come with the basic
package.
Services related to an additional hardware or software and that can be ordered as an option.
Communication in the basic package for IQHeat is ModBus RTU, a modem port and a simple WEB. You can
also use ModBus IP through the WEB function.
This simple Web displays the same information as the operator panel on the controller. Possible to connect to
the Internet to monitor remotely. Option for OPC is available in this basic version of WEB.
13.1 Standard services
The following services are always included in IQHeat:
 IQMeter100: Reading the volume of the pulses and energy from thermal flow meters, applies to both
heating and cooling.

IQReturn100: Limitation of the difference between the primary return and secondary return for heating
or cooling. Kr1 and Kr2 are handled separately if there are multiple circuits.

IQReturn200: Limitation of return temperature on primary side. Set points set per season.

IQOptimal100: Selectable power or flow restrictor. Works best with M-Bus.

IQPump100: (Coming in 2012) Automatic control of secondary pump for heating circuits with 0-10V to
optimise cooling on the secondary side. Only P1, Kr1, on IQHeat110 are predefined but they also work
on P2, Kr2, if an output is available.
13.2 Optional services
The following services require some form of hardware or special software to work, which are not included in the
basic version:

IQWeb200: Advanced WEB function, with built-in web server. With a graphical interface across the entire
substation, and a simple overview of its functionality. No software requirements in addition to a PC with a
browser. Includes functions for E-mail and SMS alarms via TCP/IP (IQAlarm100).


IQReport: Report of history 1-8 days in computer interface or by year in Excel tables.
A function for the presentation of monthly values, energy monitoring in the interface is also available.
IQReport is included when ordering Advanced WEB, IQWeb200.
* Short-time database (Under dev, coming in 2012) for the last 2 hours for troubleshooting and controller
setting.
IQMeter200: Reading of measurement data from coolers/cold water/thermal flow meters via MBus
requires MBus in the meters in order to work.

IQWind: The heating curve is affected to supply extra heat in severe wind conditions.
Contains a wind meter. This service cannot be connected to IQHeat for district cooling.

IQAlarm200: Alarm via separate modem which sends alarms to recipients via SMS. Requires extra
modem and mobile telephone subscription, and is needed if there is no TCP/ IP connection.

BACNET/IP and LON: Means an additional hardware module for individual connections to BacNet and
LON networks. Allows monitoring in the SCADA system. Contact Alfa Laval for options, data points,
variable lists, etc.
46
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
14 Schematic diagram
14.1 IQHeat50
47
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
14.2 IQHeat 60/110
48
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
14.3 IQHeat100
49
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
14.4 IQHeat50 Cooling
50
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
15 Troubleshooting
Symptom
Hot water
temperature too
low
Hot water
temperature too
high
The heating
system
temperature is too
high or too low
Cause
The set point is incorrect
Action
Adjust the HW set point
Control valve not working
Check that the valve is working by
running in manual mode from the control
unit up/down, or check to see if the
valve reacts to changes to the set point.
Request service support on out of
service.
Order service support
District heating filter clogged Order
service support
Controller set in manual mode
The set point is set too high
Control valve not working
Knob on the valve can be manually
adjusted
Controller set in manual mode
The heating automation may need to
be adjusted
ECO function incorrectly set
Time schedule incorrectly set
No heat in the
heating system
Disturbing noises
in the radiator
system (buzzing)
The circulation pump is not working
Too little water in the system
Air accumulations at the heat
exchanger or in heating circuit
Capacity to high in the pump
Fluctuating
temperatures, HW,
or heating, clicking
in the heating
system
Incorrect control of HW or heating
Need to frequently
replace water in
the heating system
The expansion tank cannot deal with
the changes in volume.
Leakage
Temperatures too
low for both
heating and hot
water
Clogged district heating filter
District heating temperature too low
Flow, heat or hot water circulation too
low
51
Set the controller in Auto mode
Adjust the HW set point
See above
Check the knob on the valve/actuator.
This works in this case as a minimum
limit for the degree of opening.
Set the controller in Auto mode
Adjust the heating curve in the control
unit. Change the heating curve
parameters to ensure that the flow
satisfies the requirement.
Change in temperature of the Heating
limit (ECO)
Change the day/weekly schedule to
ensure the system works as desired
Check that the power is on and the
fuses are intact.
If the pump is controlled from the
controller station, make sure it is
running, in a day/weekly schedule, ECO
function.
Check that the pump is not set in
manual off mode.
Top up the water
Bleed the expansion tank and the
heating circuit (radiators)
Lower the pump capacity by switching to
a lower number on the pump's power
switch if applicable; change the settings
in the differential pressure controlled
pump control, if necessary.
Adjust the control parameters or call
Service support
Increase the pump speed by changing
to a higher power level if possible, or
adjust by opening the throttle valve if
fitted.
Order service support to check the
expansion tank's volume receiving
section and pre-pressure or for possible
leaks
Order service support
Contact the district heating supplier
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
16 Options
Further communication options with the integrated WEB Server, BacNet, M-Bus or LON requires one or more
of the following communication modules:

Advanced WEB: Allows the option of Internet-based interface (WEB), Ethernet (IEEE802.3) TCP/IP.
Web Server integrated in the module.

BacNet/IP Allows you to connect to a BacNet network.

ModBus: Allows you to connect to a ModBus RTU network.

MBus: For connection of thermal flow meter with M-Bus communications.

LON: Allows you to connect IQHeat to a LON network.
A maximum of three of these optional modules can be connected simultaneously
All the options are connected to the processing unit with a module-to-module connector.
The processing unit and the communication modules' programs and data lists can be updated by an SD card.
There is an SD reader in the processing unit and in the advanced WEB module.
Even the processing unit's operating systems can be updated in this way whenever necessary. See 2.1.2
Upgrade with SD card.
16.1 Communication module Web, Adv. Web
The communication module is used to activate the advanced web functionality of the processing unit.
It is therefore called Advanced Web module, Adv.Web.
The Adv Web module has the following characteristics:






built-in WindowsCE® platform with web server application
generic tree structure to read and write data points
platform for programming web applications
alarm server for SMS/E-mail
peer to peer communications, no server required
full modem RS-232 port
• GSM/GPRS support
• calling functions.
16.1.1 Services associated with Adv Web
The following services require Adv Web:
 IQAlarm 100
 IQReport
52
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
16.2 Communication module BacNet IP
The communication module BacNet IP connects the processing unit to a BacNet IP
network.
The BacNet IP module has the following characteristics:
 integration for building automation systems via BacNet IP
 client communication to other BacNet units
 pre-installed generic BacNet server
 supports BacNet/IP (B-AAC-profile and BBMD)
 network parameters are configured through the processing unit, HMI or
SCOPE
16.3 Communication module ModBus
The ModBus communication module connects the processing unit to a ModBus
network, for reading sensors. The ModBus module can be upgraded using an SD card.
The ModBus module has the following characteristics:



integration to a building automation system via RS 485 ModBus RTU
two ModBus slave communication ports
galvanic ally isolated connection to the ModBus network.
16.4 Module MBus
The MBus module is used to map the necessary data points from the MBus units to the
processing unit.
The MBus module has the following characteristics:
 The MBus network operates the MBus module such as MBus master and
periodically asks for data points from the MBus units.
 MBus mapping of the MBus module defines all MBus units and their required data
points (bonds) that will be integrated and mapped to the processing unit
 Up to 6 MBus units such as heating, water or electricity meters, can be connected
directly to the MBus module (up to 64 MBus units with MBus amplifiers)
 Up to 200 data points (bonds) can be defined in the MBus mapping
 Connecting the MBus module to the MBus network is galvanic ally separated by
optocouplers. The bus power supply is short circuit proof:
16.4.1 Services associated with MBus
The following services require MBus

IQMeter200
53
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
16.5 LEDs for BSP and BUS diagnostics
Optional modules have two LEDs for diagnostics. The LEDs can light with three different colours: yellow, green
and red.
LEDs for BSP and BUS diagnostics
The BSP LED has the same meaning for all modules.
Mode
Status LED BSP
BSP running and communication with
Green on
controller
BSP running but no communication with
Yellow on
controller
BSP error (software error)
Red blinking at 2 Hz
Hardware error
Red on
BSP upgrade mode
BSP LED green, BUS LED alternating at 1 Hz
between red and green
16.5.1 BUS for Adv Web module
Mode
IP running and communication ok
IP not running
Hardware or software error
Status LED BUS
Green LED lights
Yellow LED lights
Red LED lights
16.5.2 BUS for BacNet
Mode
BacNet IP running and communication ok
IP not running
Hardware or software error
Status LED BUS
Green LED lights
Yellow LED lights
Red LED lights
16.5.3 BUS for ModBus
Mode
All communication running, or if watchdog is
disabled.
Start-up or one configured channel not
communicating to the master.
All configured communications down
16.5.4 BUS for MBus
Mode
M-bus running and communication ok
At least one M-bus device is not running
No M-bus device is running
Status LED BUS
Green LED lights
Yellow LED lights
Red LED lights
Status LED BUS
Green LED lights
Yellow LED lights
Red LED lights
54
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
17 Overview of available menus
The following menus are available when logging in at End User Level.
55
Maxi IQHeat
Installation and service instructions
56
IQHeat
Quick manual start-up
Contents
1
IQHeat quick manual ............................................................................................................ 2
1.1
1.2
1.3
General ......................................................................................................................................................2
Equipment specific to IQHeat ....................................................................................................................2
Checks before start-up ..............................................................................................................................2
2
Start-up of IQHeat ................................................................................................................. 3
2.1
The operator panel ....................................................................................................................................4
3
Settings, adjustment protocol.............................................................................................. 5
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Checks of heating circuits .........................................................................................................................5
Checks of hot water circuit ........................................................................................................................5
Adjustment protocol ...................................................................................................................................5
Start-up is concluded .................................................................................................................................5
Rev:24/04/2012
IQ Heat
Quick manual start-up
1 IQHeat quick manual
1.1
General
These instructions cover the start-up of IQHeat. They includes a table with the factory settings/adjustment
protocol.
Please read these instructions fully before installing or starting. See also the general installation instructions
Maxi
For Installation of IQWeb200, see separate installation instructions.
These instructions assume that IQHeat is installed that is to be put in service by an installer/service technician
with sufficient general knowledge of district heating, heating technology or other experience usually required for
similar work.
1.2
Equipment specific to IQHeat
An operator panel is needed for start-up.
Adjustment protocol/table with factory settings is based on a menu structure in the operator panel. See the
IQHeat user manual for functions and description.
1.3
Checks before start-up
Check that:
 The hydraulic and electrical installations are implemented in accordance with local, national or other
requirements that apply to the relevant parts.

All sensors are mounted and undamaged.

External connections are made correctly. Examples of such connections are pumps that were not
connected on delivery, 3-phase pumps or pumps >6A, external alarm loops, outside temperature
sensors, etc.
How these are to be connected is illustrated in the wiring diagram.
2
IQ Heat
Quick manual start-up
2 Start-up of IQHeat
1. Make sure the electricity is wired to the equipment cabinet and pumps.
2. Ensure that the circuits with pumps are filled with water and deaerated.
3. Open the cabinet and check that the circuit breakers are closed.
4. Ensure that the control valve is in automatic mode (not manually open).
5. Turn on the control switch, Q1, and put the pumps in Auto mode. This is done by using switches S1S3, which should be in position II.
6. Check the processing unit, DDC1, that the BSP LED turns green. If there is an integrated modem,
DDC1's BUS LED must also be green.
7. Make sure that the built-in operator panel is running and that legible characters are visible in the
display.
If the characters are not legible, restart DDC1 by turning off the control switch Q1 and wait 20 seconds
before turning back on.
8. Let the controller build up for a few minutes and then check the actual values and setpoints in the
operator panel.
9. Check the date and time in the operator panel. If these are incorrect; login with "1000".
a. Press Info until the page with the date and time are displayed.
b. Move the cursor to the line for date and time.
c. Press OK to edit the day.
d. Set the correct day with the setting dial, press OK to confirm and continue to edit the month
and year.
e. Continue to edit the hours, minutes and seconds in the same way.
f. Exit the menu with ESC.
10. If there are any alarms, the Alarm button will flash or light.
a. Log in with "1000".
b. Press the Alarm button once to see the details of the last alarm.
c. Press the Alarm button again to access the Alarm list.
d. A list of all active alarms now appears.
e. Select Confirm/Restore and press OK. Select Apply and press OK.
f. Correct any errors.
g. When all errors are corrected, the Alarm list should be empty and the Alarm button should be
off.
11. If the communication module for IP/Ethernet is used, connect the accompanying TP cable to the output
for Internet traffic. The communication module is set in DHCP mode i.e. it gets its address
automatically from the server.
If a fixed IP address is used, this can be set via the Operator panel.
a. Log in with "2000".
b. In the Main Menu select Systemobjects-> Communication -> Modules -> Web-modl.
c. Select the parameter to be changed and press OK.
d. Set the desired value with the navigation dial, press OK.
e. The new settings take effect after restart. Select Restart and press OK.
3
IQ Heat
Quick manual start-up
12. If the SMS alert is used, connect the SIM card according to the instructions for the modem.
Refer to the manual Installation and service instructions for entering telephone numbers for SMS
alarms.
13. If MBus checks the serial number on the integrator and that it matches the set address parameters in
the processing unit.
Se Systemobjects-> Communication -> MBus.
Also check that a value is received from the heat meter.
NOTE: The update times for the meter values from the integrator are based on the current flow, so
when the primary flow is low, for example, in the summer, it will take a long time to update the
measurement values.
14. If Modbus RTU (RS485) is used note and if necessary change the ModBus parameters in the
processing unit to ensure the master unit uses the same address and parameters.
See Systemobjects-> Communication -> ModBus -> RS485.
For Modbus across IP; check the address to the processing unit, and use port 502 in the master
system.
See Systemobjects-> Communication -> ModBus -> TCP/IP.
2.1
The operator panel
Info-button
Push to change between
Main overview and
Main index.
Alarm button with LED
Off: no alarm
Flashing: ongoing alarm
Permanently lit: Alarm ongoing and
acknowledged
Press to to change between alarm menus
Select and OK knob
Turn to select menues, parameters and parameter
values .
Push: to exit the s etting page and
adopt a changed value
Extended push: to go to the Password page
ESC-button
Push to go back to last active page or to cancel
Extended push: go back to the Main overvie w.
4
IQ Heat
Quick manual start-up
3 Settings, adjustment protocol
Changing the settings requires logging on at end user level or service level.
3.1
Checks of heating circuits
Check:




building time constant
ECO function's start-up temperatures
setpoints for the indoor temperature
if applicable, daily/weekly schedule compared to the desired settings.
Check that the controller reaches its setpoint in a reasonable time, check the PID settings, if necessary, in the
controller in order to adjust the primary and secondary current operating conditions.
All heating circuits should be checked in the same manner as above.
3.2
Checks of hot water circuit
There is no time schedule for the hot water circuit.
The legionella function can be enabled, which requires logging into at service level.
Check that the hot water quickly reaches its setpoint.
Adjust, if necessary, the PID settings in the hot water controller if the regulation is unstable or takes too long to
reach its setpoint.
3.3
Adjustment protocol
Any changes to settings must be noted in the adjustment protocol
3.4
Start-up is concluded
After the start-up is complete, close the cabinet and submit a copy of the completed adjustment protocol to the
client.
5
IQHeat ModBus
Contents
1
General .................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
Connections and Hardware .......................................................................................................................1
ModBus/RTU general ................................................................................................................................1
Variables ....................................................................................................................................................2
Summary Variables ...................................................................................................................................3
Variables ....................................................................................................................................................3
Operation Card ..........................................................................................................................................4
Handling ModBus settings in the Operator Control Panel ........................................................................5
Rev 13, 2013-03-05
IQHeat ModBus
1 General
Alfa Laval IQHeat is adjusted after ModBus/IP and ModBus/RTU. This means that values in the controller can
be read or set, via ModBus.
This document describes how to connect an IQHeat to a ModBus network and witch variables are available.
Please contact Alfa Laval for more detailed list of available variables.
1.1
Connections and Hardware
IQHeat has three different ModBus connections.
One internal, RS485, placed on the lower long side of the controller and a special communication module,
POL902. Both these are serial interfaces often called ModBus/RTU.
Standard setting for a ModBus/RTU with IQHeat is;
 Address: One (1)
 9600 bps
 No parity
 One stop bite
 No terminator
A ModBus/IP interface is available on the controller via the standard Ethernet port.
ModBus/IP uses the port 502 and the controller IP address is assigned either dynamically via the Domain
Name System (DNS) or set manually
1.2
ModBus/RTU general
ModBus/RTU uses a serial communication with one sender with possibility for several listeners.
Each listener must have a unique address.
2
The connection cables should be AWG22 (0,33mm ) and two twisted pair. Connect one pair to REF/GND to
ensure that the voltage potential is maintained.
Connect the second pair to A+ and B-.
The cables must be terminated in both ends for the signalling to work correctly. Siemens Climatix has a built in
bus-termination of 120Ω.
If only two Nodes (two end points) are used on the bus, check that the hardware at the other end has a built in
termination, otherwise consider an end-of-line resistor of 120Ω between A+ and B-.
This is done to prevent signal reflections from the end of the cable.
For any other bus typology the signalling wires should only be terminated in the backbone cable and any
branching connection should be as short as possible without termination. The reason for this is that the
specification TIA-EIA-485-A does not specify more than one bus for every active transmitter.
See Picture 1.
1
IQHeat ModBus
Picture 1: Principle for communication via RS485/RTU
1.3
Variables
All variables representing measure values, set points and other real numbers are 16- bit words and
will be presented as integer.
Therefore are decimals multiplied with 10 or 100 and must be divided with the same number to get the correct
value.
To send a real value type it has to be multiplied with the right order of magnitude before sending it to the
register. Values can only be written or sent to a Holding register.
Note that the first outside temperatures in the heating curve are negative.
Binary variables, that usually indicate a state, can only be written to a Coil status register.
All address types starts with 1, and due to that some ModBus programs starts with 0
Do not read/write any addresses above 1000. Doing so causes an exception and communication fails.
Addresses used are divided into six address blocks; similar blocks have the same addressing.
Just the first address block of equivalent will be described.
Address 1-99
Address 101-199
Address 201-299
Address 401-499
Address 501-599
Address 601-699
Address 801-899
Common functions in the controller
Cooling circuit 1
Cooling circuit 2
Heating circuit 1
Heating circuit 2
Heating circuit 2
Hot water circuit
2
IQHeat ModBus
1.4
Summary Variables
The most frequently use variables for a heating or a hot water circuit and common data for both will be
described in this document.
For more detailed information about each variable, contact Alfa Laval.
The Operating Card shows a typical case with two heating circuits and one hot water circuit.
Note the increasing variable indexation with 100 from Heating Circuit 1 to 2.
1.5
Variables
Heat 1:
Supply temperature
Supply Sensor fault
Return Temperature
Return Sensor fault
Primary Return Temperature
Primary Return Sensor Fault
Pump indicator
Pump Alarm from Pump
Actuator Primary
Actuator Secondary
Dev. fl. temp.
Exp. vessel alarm Digital in
Press. exp. vessel
Used Outside temp (Common)
Room temp. comfort
Room temp.eco
Heat curve Outside temp. Design
Heat curve Flow temp.design
Heat curve Out temp.2
Heat curve Flow temp 2
Heat curve Out temp.3
Heat curve Flow temp 3
Heat curve Out temp.3
Heat curve Flow temp 4
Heat curve Out temp.5
Heat curve Flow temp 5
Heat curve flow temp. Min.
Heat curve flow temp. Max.
Act room set point
Reference 1 value
Reference 1 fault
Reference 2 value
Reference 2 fault
Reference 3 value
Reference 3 sensor fault
Reference 4 value
Reference 4 sensor fault
I450
S450
I451
S451
I452
S452
S492
S430
I498
I499
S445
S435
I474
I48
H420
H421
H425
H427
I436
H436
I437
H437
I438
H438
H426
H428
H433
H434
I420
I457
S457
I458
S458
I459
S459
I460
S460
Cooling:
Supply temperature
Supply Sensor fault
Return Temperature
Return Sensor fault
Primary Return Temperature
Primary Return Sensor Fault
Pump indicator
Pump Alarm from Pump
I150
S150
I151
S151
I152
S152
S192
S130
Actuator Primary
Actuator Secondary
Dev. fl. temp.
Exp. vessel alarm
Press. exp. vessel
Press. exp. Vessel alarm
Constant flow temp set point
Heat curve Outside temp.design
Heat curve Flow temp. design
Heat curve Out temp.2
Heat curve Flow temp 2
Heat curve Outside temp. design
Heat curve Flow temp. design
Act set point
Cumulate Cool energy M-bus
Cumulate volume M-Bus
I198
I199
S145
S135
I174
S174
H120
H121
H123
H122
H124
H125
H126
I120
I166
I165
Hot water:
Supply temperature
Supply Sensor fault
Return Temperature
Return Sensor fault
Primary Return Temperature
Dev. fl. temp
Hot water Temp. normal
Hot water Temp. reduced
Hot water Temp Legio .temp.
Actuator Primary
Actuator Secondary
I850
S850
I851
S851
S891
S845
H820
H822
H826
I890
I897
General/common
Primary Supply temperature
Primary Supply Sensor fault
Primary Return Temperature
Primary Return Sensor fault
Outside temp sensor
Outside temp sensor fault
Outside temp. filtered
Wind sensor value
Wind sensor, sensor fault
External summer alarm
Reset alarm
Primary flow M-Bus
Power M-Bus
Cumulate energy M-Bus
Cumulate volume M-Bus
I51
S51
I52
S52
I50
S50
I48
I71
S71
S31
C1
I60
I61
I62
I65
3
IQHeat ModBus
1.6
Operation Card
Picture 2
4
IQHeat ModBus
1.7
Handling ModBus settings in the Operator Control Panel
With the operator control panel the following settings can be done.
 Baud rate
 Parity
 Stop bits
 Address
 With connection being used
Changing these settings, require login at level Service level, level 4, or higher.
Fault codes can be read on the status line. A fault is presented as a Status code; all information cannot be
presented on the Operator control panel display due to the space.
If a communication fault occurs, please contact Alfa Laval for support.
5
IQHeat
Adjustment protocol
Rev:24/04/2012
IQHeat
Adjustment protocol
Contents
1
General .................................................................................................................................... 3
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
Plant information .......................................................................................................................................3
Main overview............................................................................................................................................3
Heating circuit 1 .........................................................................................................................................4
Time schedule heating .........................................................................................................................4
Heating curve .......................................................................................................................................5
Other settings heating circuit 1.............................................................................................................5
Heating circuit 2 .........................................................................................................................................6
Time schedule heating .........................................................................................................................6
Heating curve .......................................................................................................................................7
Other settings heating circuit 2.............................................................................................................7
Common settings for heating circuit ..........................................................................................................8
Hot water circuit .........................................................................................................................................8
Freeze protection ......................................................................................................................................8
Pump and valve exercising .......................................................................................................................8
Exceptions calendar ..................................................................................................................................8
2
IQHeat
Adjustment protocol
1 General
Adjustments in this protocol require log-on at service level, password 2000.
See Installation and service instructions for the servicing of IQHeat.
Note the changed settings.
After adjustment the settings can be saved as Start-up settings under:
Systemobjects-> Save/Load -> Sett.service save
NOTE: Depending on configuration and the number of circuits, some menu bars may be hidden.
1.1
Plant information
Object/project:
Address:
Postcode and place:
Contact person:
Telephone number:
E-mail:
Order number:
Client:
Contractor:
Adjusted by:
Plant information must be entered in the processor unit.
Path: Main index -> Systemobjects -> Plant information.
1.2
Main overview
Make sure the time and date are correct in IQHeat.
Check that the actual values are reasonable and that the regulated temperatures are stable.
Path: Main Index -> Main overview
Parameter
Outside temperature
--- Heating Circuit 1 --Actual flow temperature setpoint
Flow temperature
Return temperature
Return temperature primary
--- Heating Circuit 2 --Actual flow temperature setpoint
Flow temperature
Return temperature
Return temperature primary
--- Domestic Hot Water --Actual flow temperature setpoint
Flow temperature
Circulation temperature
Primary flow temperature
Primary return temperature
3
IQHeat
Adjustment protocol
--- Heat 1--Circ. Pump
ECO mode
--- Heat 2--Circ. Pump
ECO mode
--- Domestic Hot Water --Circ. Pump
ECO mode
--- District Heating
Pressure
Supply
Return
1.3
Heating circuit 1
Path: Main index -> Heating circuit 1
Parameter
Operating mode
Manual off.
Op.mode from common.
Factory settings
Auto
No
Auto
Shift room.t.comf
Shift room.t.eco.
Roomtemp.comfort
Roomtemp.economy
Heating limit (ECO)
0K
0K
21°C
21°C
5°C
Changed
1.3.1 Time schedule heating
Path: Main index -> Heating circuit 1 -> Time Schedule -> Monday...Sunday
Parameter
Value-1
Time 2
Value-2
Time 3
Value-3
Time 4
Value-4
Time 5
Value-5
Time 6
Value--6
Exception Time 1-Time 6
Factory settings
Economy
05:40
Comfort
22:00
Economy
**:**
Changed
**:**
**:**
*.*
4
IQHeat
Adjustment protocol
1.3.2 Heating curve
Path: Main index -> Heating circuit 1 -> Heating Curve
Parameter
Point1 OutT X1
Point1 Flow temp Y1
Point2 OutT X2
Point2 Flow temp Y2
Point3 OutT X3
Point3 Flow temp Y3
Point4 OutT X4
Point4 Flow temp Y4
Point5 OutT X5
Point5 Flow temp Y5
Point6 OutT X6
Point6 Flow temp Y6
Point7 OutT X7
Point7 Flow temp Y7
Factory settings
-40
80
-17
60
-5
50
0
45
5
40
15
20
30
18
Changed
1.3.3 Other settings heating circuit 1
Path: Main index -> Heating circuit 1 -> Active limitation -> Settings
Parameter
MinFlowTemp
MaxFlowTemp
Factory settings
25
80
Changed
Path: Main index -> Overviews -> Controllers -> Settings-> Valve control HC1
Parameter
Gain (reinforcement)
Int.action time (I-time)
Dervative time (D-time)
Factory settings
0.25
12s
1s
Changed
5
IQHeat
Adjustment protocol
1.4
Heating circuit 2
Path: Main index -> Heating circuit 2
Parameter
Operating mode
Manual off.
Op.mode from common.
Factory settings
Auto
No
Auto
Shift room.t.comf
Shift room.t.eco.
Roomtemp.comfort
Roomtemp.economy
Heating limit (ECO)
0K
0K
21°C
21°C
5°C
Changed
1.4.1 Time schedule heating
Path: Main index -> Heating circuit 2 -> Time Schedule -> Monday...Sunday
Parameter
Value-1
Time 2
Value-2
Time 3
Value-3
Time 4
Value-4
Time 5
Value-5
Time 6
Value--6
Exception Time 1-Time 6
Factory settings
Economy
05:40
Comfort
22:00
Economy
**:**
Changed
**:**
**:**
*.*
6
IQHeat
Adjustment protocol
1.4.2 Heating curve
Path: Main index -> Heating circuit 2 -> Heating Curve
Parameter
Point1 OutT X1
Point1 Flow temp Y1
Point2 OutT X2
Point2 Flow temp Y2
Point3 OutT X3
Point3 Flow temp Y3
Point4 OutT X4
Point4 Flow temp Y4
Point5 OutT X5
Point5 Flow temp Y5
Point6 OutT X6
Point6 Flow temp Y6
Point7 OutT X7
Point7 Flow temp Y7
Factory settings
-40
80
-17
60
-5
50
0
45
5
40
15
20
30
18
Changed
1.4.3 Other settings heating circuit 2
Path: Main index -> Heating circuit 2 -> Active limitation -> Settings
Parameter
MinFlowTemp
MaxFlowTemp
Factory settings
25
80
Changed
Path: Main index -> Overviews -> Controllers -> Settings-> Valve control HC2
Parameter
Gain (reinforcement)
Int.action time (I-time)
Dervative time (D-time)
Factory settings
0.25
12s
1s
Changed
7
IQHeat
Adjustment protocol
1.5
Common settings for heating circuit
Path: Commissioning -> Plant settings. -> Common -> Calculation outside temp.
Parameter
Build.time constant
Su/Wi time constant
Factory settings
20
70
Changed
Path: Commissioning- > Plant config. -> Common
Parameter
Factory settings
Changed
Heat lim.function
Filtered+Act.
Heat season
Temp*
* Select mode None if the Heat lim.function (ECO function) is not to be active.
1.6
Hot water circuit
Path: Main index -> Domestic hot water
Parameter
Operating mode
Manually off.
Operation mode from
common
Setpoint temp. normal
Factory settings
Auto
No
Auto
Changed
55
Path: Commissioning-> Plant settings -> Domestic hot water
Parameter
Setpoint legionella
Factory settings
65
Changed
Other path
Path: Main index -> Overviews -> Controllers-> Settings -> Valve control DW
Parameter
Gain (reinforcement)
Int.action time (I-time)
Derivative action time
(D-time)
1.7
Factory settings
0,7
7s
2s
Changed
Freeze protection
Path: Commissioning -> Plant settings. -> Common
Parameter
Factory settings
Changed
Plant frost
Yes
Setp.plant frost
1.5°C
1.8
Pump and valve exercising
Path: Commissioning -> Plant settings. -> Common
Parameter
Factory settings
Pump and valve kick
Mon-Sun, 00:00-23:59
Duration
30 s
Standby time
168 t
1.9
Changed
Exceptions calendar
Path: Common -> Calendar
control Heating circuit -> Time program -> Exceptions
Parameter
Factory settings
Changed
Choice 1- Choice 10
Invalid
8
-AS1
(Option)
(Option)
(Option)
M-Bus
(Option)
BAC NET
IP
(Option)
Advanced
web
(Option)
-Duel 1
-Duel 1
GND
Placed on the back of the rail
(Option)
Cable antenna
RS-232
9-pol D-sub)
Module sans fil modem
Modem Wireless module
-F3
-S3
-F11
-F12
-F3
Audio
GND
-S3
-F11
GND
-F12
Carte SIM
Simcard
GND
-Com
module sans fil est
Alfalaval). Installed if
wireless module is
installed by Alfalaval
-XF1
-X2
-X2
-X3
-Duel expansion
-Duel expansion
-F10
-F10
(Option)
Prise (Fr)
Plug (Fr)
(Option)
Disjoncteur
de fuite
de terre
Disjoncteur
de fuite
Limiteur
de
de terre
tension
-F1
-S1
-F2
-S2
-JFB
Earth
leakage
breaker
-F1
X-OBO
-S1
-F2
-S2
-JFB
Earth
leakage
breaker
Voltage
Limiter
Vue de face sans plaque de protection
without coverplate mounted
Fusible/Fuse
F1
F2
F3
F10
F11
F12
Type
Chauffage/refroidissement de la pompe1
Pump 1 Heat/Cooling
Chauffage/refroidissement de la pompe2
Pump 2 Heat/Cooling
Pompe ECS (Pecs) / Pump Vvc (PVvc)
Alimentation, mesure..
Supply,Measure..
Prise / Plug
Transformateur / Transformer
6A
Interrupteur
principal
Mainswitch
Box view front
Plaque de protection
Coverplate
6A
2A
6A
GND (to heaters chassis)
10 A
6A
-Q1
Langue d'origine: A'nglais
Translated from English
IQHeat 60,100,110 Fr
(CC-1148)
Climatix
Layout Box -AS1
Noir Black
Bleu clair,Light blue
2,5mm
Marron,Brown
2,5mm
Rouge Red
GND
Jaune-Vert
Yellow-green
2,5mm
G0 (64)
A1 (bl 3)
G0 (63)
E7 (bl 5)
Marron,Brown
1,5mm
G0 (62)
GND GND GND GND
65
Jaune-Vert
Yellow-green
2,5mm
N (Prise)
G0 (61)
L (Prise)
L (P1)
C6 (bl 4)
D1 (bl 4)
D2 (bl 4)
N (P2)
L (P2)
D5 (bl 5)
D6 (bl 5)
E7 (bl 3)
C5 (bl 4)
L (Pecs)
C5 (bl 4)
26
27
1,5mm
~
G (60)
A1 (bl 3)
G (59)
E7 (bl 5)
G (58)
-JFB
G (57)
Red + a silver lable
D7 (bl 3)
T
E
S
T
Black + a silver lable
2
GND
N
Jaune-Vert,Yellow-green
2,5mm
3x2,5 mm
1500 mm
Marron,Brown
2,5mm
Door-to-box
GND
Bleu clair,Light blue
2,5mm
-Q1
L
PE
2
4
6
16A 1
3
5
N
GND N
L
N
E1 (bl 5)
L (Mesure..)
Heaters chassis to terminal
N
E5 (bl 3)
N (Pecs)
N (P1)
C6 (bl 4)
GND
1
E1 (bl 5)
PE
MAX 16A@230 V ~
IQHeat 60,100,110 Fr
(CC-1148)
Alimentation
Supply (230/24 V ~)
Climatix
E5 (bl 3)
B8 (bl 2)
G
A8 (bl 2)
G
G0
G0
X1
A8 (bl 5)
A8 (bl 5)
64
60
Violet
1,0mm
Rouge/Red
1,0mm
-Duel1
0V
24V
_
~
T1
T2
X1
M
T4
T3
X2
X3
M
X4
X5
M
X6
X7
M
+V24
X8
+V24
Y1
M
D1
Y2
M
D2
D3
M
D4
D5
M
Blanc,White
1x1,0mm
24 VDC (x2)
(Max 40mA)
6
7
8
9
10
X25
X6
1
11
5
13
12
7
6
14
8
9
2
15
16
Y1/X1..
B001
Capteur
Outdoor
sensor
Dashed areas are
used when needed
capteur
chaleur 1/
Refroidissement
Sensor
Heat/
Cold
Supply
B
M
B103
Retour
capteur
chaleur 1/
Refroidissement
Sensor
Heat/
Cold
Return
M
B
B007
Retour
principal
capteur
chaleur 1/
Refroidissement
Sensor
Heat/
Cold
Primary
Return
B
M
B
M
B003
B032
IQheat100
IQheat110
IQheat100
IQheat110
B
M
x
x
B
M
x
x
B004 RP401 B108 RP402
capteur
ECS
Sensor
DHW
Supply
Retour
capteur
ECS
Sensor
DHW
Return
M
M
Separate
scheme
G
Pression1 Retour Pression2
principal
principale principale Primary
Primary
return
Pressure2
avant
incoming filtrage
Primary
incoming
Pressure1
after filtering
Primary
incoming
before
filtering
Utiliser B108 ou RP402
Use B108 or RP402
Separate
scheme
G0
G
Capteur
Bleu,Blue/4
5x1,5mm
G0
M Volume
57
Pompe 1
d'alarme
chaleur/
Refroidissement
Alarm pump 1
Heat/Cold
61
L
Utiliser B004 ou RP401
Use B004 or RP401
N
25
2x1,5mm
Pompe 2
d'alarme
chaleur/
Refroidissement
Alarm pump 2
Heat/Cold
Termostat (option)
G
G0
Actionneur de chaleur 1/
chaleur 1/ Refroidissement
Refroidissement
Actuator Heat/Cold 1 sequence
Actuator Heat/Cold 1
IQHeat 60,100,110 Fr
(CC-1148)
24
IQHeat60
IQHeat110
Thermotstat (option)
connect it through G
B8 (bl 2)
23
M
Meter100 (Option)
Marron,Brown/3
5x1,5mm
C8 (bl 2)
22
21
Alarme
externe
External
alarm
Y1/X1..
+24
B
C3 (bl 5)
B009
M
20
Y002
Y001
M
19
Noir,Black/1
5x1,5mm
2x1,0mm
B
18
17
Gris,Grey/2
5x1,5mm
D5 (bl 5)
5
D5 (bl 5)
4
B6 (bl 2)
3
C6 (bl 2)
2
D3 (bl 4)
1
D3 (bl 4)
X1
(Marron,Br)/1
(Bleu,Blue)/2
2x1,0mm
Connexions externes Duel 1
Outer connections Duc 1
Actionneurs ou mesure
Actuators or any
I/O voltage/currentmeasure in general
If G0 and M is connected
together, it is done
inside the box -AS1
Climatix
-Duel1
Q1
T8
T7
24...230 V~ 4A/3A
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
T9
PB
-X4
RS485
USB
TSV
Q33
Orange
1x1,0mm
Chauffage 1/
Refroidissement
pression de
retenue +
Heat/Cooling 1
hold pressure +
(I)
2
1
28
Blanc,White
1,0mm
CE-
56
29
B-
A+
ModBus
Alarm (somme)
Alarm (sum)
Stranded wire
L (Prise)
N (Prise)
L (Pecs)
Bleu clair
Light blue
1x1,5mm
Duel
expansion (X5)
Connect to Duc
expansion (-X5)
Marron/Brown
1x1,5mm
N (Pecs)
S3
2
4
"I"
"II"
Alimentation externe
External Supply
8
6
"II"
1
(Option)
ON/OFF
0-10V
32
-X3
L
"I"
5
Marron,Brown
1x1,0mm
33
N
Marron,brown
C4 (bl 5)
C4 (bl 5)
(I)
A 0 1
L
Bleu clair
Light blue
1x1,0mm
Jaune-Vert
(B4 -bl 2)
(II)
N
Bleu,blue
-X2
N (P1)
M
1~
Ref
Process
Bus
Marron,
Brown
1x1,0mm
55
CE+
Jaune-Vert
Marron,
Brown
1x1,0mm
Q64
T-HI
31
(Marron,Brown)/1
(Bleu,Blue)/2
2x1,0mm
L (P1)
Q63
Blanc,
White
1,0mm
D6 (bl 3)
(B4 -bl 2)
30
Q54
Circuit de
retenue:
Chauffage 1/
Refroidissement
Heat/Cooler 1
Hold circuit
D6 (bl 3)
S1
Chauffage 1/
Refroidissemen
pression de
retenue Heat/Cooling 1
hold pressure -
Q53
Marron,brown
4
"II" "I"
Q44
Bleu,blue
A 0 1
Q43
T-IP
BA+
B- B8 (bl 5)
A+ B8 (bl 5)
(II)
Q34
BSP BUS
(B3 -bl 2)
Q24
(B3 -bl 2)
Q23
(B5 -bl 2)
Q14
(B5 -bl 2)
Q13
_ 24V
~
Ethernet
T6
~
GND
66
Prise
Plug (Fr)
Alimentation externe
External Supply
GND
Option
Jaune-Vert
Yellow-green
Alarm
alarme
M
1~
M
3~
GND
GND
Chaleur/Refroidissement pompe 1 (P1)
Pump Heat/Cooler (P1)
Pompe
Pump >6A
M
1~
GND
GND
Pompe <2A
Pompe ECS (Pecs) / Pompe Vvc (PVvc)
IQHeat100,110
IQHeat 60,100,110 Fr
(CC-1148)
Duel 1 I/O (T6-T9)
Pompe 1 , Pompe ECS
Pump 1, Pump dhwc
Climatix
A3 (bl 3)
BA+
T2
T5
ADR/TERM
ON
M
X4
X5
M
X7
X6
M
38
40
39
41
42
44
43
45
Orange
1,0mm
Marquage
Lable
"4S2"
46
47
Mar,Br/1
Bleu,Blu
2x1,0mm
B012
M
B
B102
B
M
B072
M
B
C8 (bl 2)
Y1/X1.. M
x
Vase 2
d'expansion
de la
pression
d'alarme
Alarm
Pressure
Expansion
vessel
Heat/
Cooler 2
X1
G0
Dashed areas are used
when needed
1
G
RP501
Separate
scheme
G
IQHeat
60,100:
Pression 3
Retour
principal
Pressure 3
Primary
Return
G0
Y007
58
62
G0
l'actionneur ECS
Actuator DHW
sequence
IQHeat60,
IQHeat110:
Chauffage 2/
Refroidissement
pression de
retenue +
Heat 2/Cooling
hold pressure +
D3 (bl.4)
Y1
Q44
IQHeat60,
IQHeat110:
Chauffage 2/
Refroidissemen
pression de
retenue Heat 2/Cooling
hold pressure -
M
Y2
49
2
M
4
"I"
50
S2
Orange
1,0mm
Alimentation externe
External Supply
(Noir,Black)/1
5x1,5mm
M
IQHeat60,110
l'actionneur de
chaleur 2/
Refroidissement
Actuator
Heat/Cooler 2
sequence
W
ON/OFF
M
3~
Y1/X1..
Separate
scheme
L (P2)
(Jaune-Vert)/5
(Yellow-green)/5
5x1,5mm
Marron,Brown
1,5mm
N (P2)
53
G
G0
G
(Bleu,Blu)/4
5x1,5mm
-X1
Alimentation externe
External Supply
Alarm
alarme
L1
L2
M
1~
IQHeat 60,110:
Chaleur/Refroidissement pompe 2 (P2)
Pump 2 Heat/Cooler (P2)
Actuators or any
I/O voltage/currentmeasure in general
59
63
Thermotstat (option)
connect it through G
L2
M
1~
GND
GND
L1
G0
Actionneurs ou mesure
If G0 and M is connected
together, it is done
inside the box -AS1
(Marron,Brown)/3
5x1,5mm
(Bleu,Blu 5x1,5)/4
V
-Duel1 (-X4)
Connect to
Duc 1 (-X4)
Y006
M
Separate
scheme
54
(Marron,Br)/1
(Bleu,Blue)/2
2x1,0mm
U
51
(Gris,Grey)/2
5x1,5mm
Y1/X1..
1
Thermotstat
(option)
Stranded
wire 2x0,5
A 0 1
"II"
52
DIP
123456
Blanc,White
1,0mm
Y005
Vase 1 d'expansion de la
pression d'alarme Alarm
Pressure
Expansion vessel
Heat/Cooler 1
(Mar,Br 5x1,5)/3
IQHeat110
Q43
(II) (I)
B006
Separate
scheme
Thermostat (option)
connect it through G
G
B8 (bl 2)
Retour
principal
capteur
chaleur 2/
Refroidissement
Sensor
Heat/
Cooler 2
Primary
Return
B
B306
IQHeat60, IQHeat60, IQHeat60, IQHeat60,
IQHeat110 IQHeat110 IQHeat110 IQHeat110
Retour
capteur
capteur
chaleur 2/ chaleur 2/
RefroiRefroidissement dissement
Sensor
Sensor
Heat/
Heat/
Cooler 2
Cooler 2
Supply
Return
M Y1/X1..
D8 (bl 3)
M
Y008
+24
B
10
D5 (bl 3)
X25
48
Q34
IQHeat60,
IQHeat110:
Chauffage 2/Refroidissement
Circuit de retenue
Heat 2/Cooler Hold circuit
Marquage
Lable
"2S2"
D3 (bl.4)
Mar,Br/1
Bleu,Blu
2x1,0mm
Q33
C8 (bl 4)
37
Q24
C8 (bl 4)
36
Q23
B-
35
Q14
A+
34
Q13
chaleur 1/
Refroidissement
Pump
Heat /
Cooler 1
control
0-10 VDC
Blanc,White
1,0mm
X1
X8
(B4 -bl 2)
X3
(B4 -bl 2)
X2
D8 (bl 3)
M
0-10V
X1
A2 (bl 3)
24V
24 to 230 VAC @ 4A/3A Res/Ind (cos fi 0.6)
T1
G (60)
-X5
T4
T3
G0 (64)
-Duel expansion
Pompe
Pump >6A
C8 (bl 2)
B8 (bl 2)
GND
G
G0
IQHeat100,110:
Actionneur ECS
Actuator DHW
IQHeat110,60:
Actionneur de chaleur 2/
Refroidissement
Actuator Heat/Cooler 2
IQHeat100:
Actuator DHW sequence
IQHeat 60,100,110 Fr
(CC-1148)
Connexions externes
Expansion module
Outer connections Exp.m.
Climatix
Ant/Pcs
Typ/Type
Artikelnr / Art.No
Postbet./Name
Plac.
1
POL 638.70/DH1
Siemens
Siemens
S55626-C387-A411
-Duel 1
1
POL 955.00/STD
Siemens
Siemens
S55663-J550-A100
-Duel expansion bl. 5
Anm. / Info
bl. 3,4
1
Bornes (vers duel) / Terminals
POL063.85/STD
Siemens
Siemens
S55843-Z638-F100
-Duel 1
Order contact separately
(is not a part of controller)
1
Bornes (vers exp.m.)/ Terminals POL095.55/STD
Siemens
Siemens
S55843-Z955-F100
(Duel Expansion)
Order contact separately
(is not a part of controller)
S55390-C108-A100
M-Bus
bl. 1
S55390-C106-A100
BacNet IP
bl. 1
S55803-Y195-A100
Advanced web
bl. 1
l
na
Siemens
l
na
Siemens
al
0/1
Expansion
M-Bus
POL 907.00/STD
Siemens
0/1
Expansion
BacNet IP
POL 908.00/STD
Siemens
0/1
Expansion
Advanced web
POL 909.50 STD
Siemens
16A 3-pole (3-P+N+PE)
IP54 (M20x1,5)
Solar Plus..
Solar/Ahlsell..
31.663.10
-Q1
bl. 2
230 VAC / 30 mA
IP20
General Electric..
Annat (Ahlsell / Solar)..
606087
-JFB
bl. 2
2A (10KA) 2-pole
Schneider Electric..
Ahlsell / (Solar)..
21.122.46
-F3
bl. 2
6A (10KA) 2-pole
Schneider Electric..
Ahlsell / (Solar)..
21.122.52
-F1, -F2,
-F10, -F12
bl. 2
10A (10KA) 2-pole
Schneider Electric..
Ahlsell / (Solar)..
21.122.56
-F11
bl. 2
1
1
1
4
1
Interrupteur d'isolement de
Disjoncteur de fuite de terre
Earth leakage breaker
Resettable fuse
Resettable fuse
Resettable fuse
tio
Op
tio
Op
al
on
ti
Op
Op
n
tio
al
on
ti
Op
al
on
Siemens
ti
Op
A 10-pole contact is
A 10-pole contact is
A 10-pole contact is
up on the side of the box
Alternatives (S.: 2169722)
(Ahlsell.: 21.622.05)..
2
Interrupteur I-0-II (1-0-A)
Switch I-0-II (1-0-A)
20 A (3-positions)
1-pole
Schneider Electric
Solar/Ahlsell..
21.149.23
-S1, -S2
bl. 4,5
Pumpcontrol (Heat 1,2)
1
Interrupteur I-0-II (1-0-A)
Switch I-0-II (1-0-A)
20 A (3-positions)
2-pole
Schneider Electric
Solar/Ahlsell..
21.149.24
-S3
bl. 4
Pumpcontrol (Dhwc/Vvc)
1
Transformateur / Transformer
230
24 VAC (Toroid) IP20
150 VA (102x52mm)
Tufvassons
Tufvassons
7124-0147
-XF1
bl. 2
Attach to dinrail with
M5 nut+bolt
Prise / Plug
10A/250 VAC (GND/PE)
Eaton,Hager..
Ahlsell/Solar..
21.418.40 / (21.087.81)
-X2, (-X3)
bl. 4
If com1 installed in
factory, then also -X3
Schneider Electric
Solar/Ahlsell
99.259.99
-AS1
bl. 1
1-2
1
Box (NSYS3D6420T)
IQHeat 60,100,110 Fr
(CC-1148)
992.59.99
NSYTLD STRL 2B1
Climatix
Partlist
Company name:
Created by:
Phone:
Fax:
Date:
Position
-
Qty. Description
1
MAGNA3 40-80 F
Note! Product picture may differ from actual product
Product No.: 97924268
MAGNA3 – More than a pump
With its unrivalled efficiency, all-encompassing range and built-in communication capabilities plus
functionalities replacing system components, the MAGNA3 is ideal for engineers and specifiers
looking to create high-performance systems for buildings.
This pump in the Grundfos Master Class will fit both heating and cooling applications perfectly,
making it the obvious choice for almost any building project – old or new.
The MAGNA3 is of the canned-rotor type, i.e. pump and motor form an integral unit without shaft
seal and with only two gaskets for sealing. The bearings are lubricated by the pumped liquid.
The innovative clamp with only one screw enables easy repositioning of the pump head.
The MAGNA3 is a pump with no maintenance requirements and with extremely low Life Cycle Cost.
The pump is characterised by the following:
• controller integrated in the control box
• control panel with TFT display on the control box
• control box prepared for optional CIM modules
• built-in differential-pressure and temperature sensor
• cast-iron pump housing (depending on model)
• carbon-fibre-reinforced composite rotor can
• stainless-steel bearing plate and rotor cladding
• aluminium alloy stator housing
• air-cooled power electronics
The MAGNA3 is a single-phase pump.
Characteristic features
• AUTOADAPT.
• FLOWADAPT and FLOWLIMIT (more than a pump function as it reduces the need for pump
throttling valves).
• Proportional-pressure control.
• Constant-pressure control.
• Constant-temperature control.
• Constant-curve duty.
• Max. or min. curve duty.
• Automatic Night Setback.
• No external motor protection required.
• Insulating shells supplied with single-head pumps for heating systems.
• Large temperature range where the liquid temperature and the ambient temperature are
independent of each other.
Printed from Grundfos CAPS [2012.05.065]
1/3
Company name:
Created by:
Phone:
Fax:
Date:
Position
-
Qty. Description
Communication
The MAGNA3 enables communication via the following:
• wireless Grundfos GO Remote
• fieldbus communication via CIM modules
• digital inputs
• relay outputs
• analog input (more than a pump function as heat energy meter)
Motor and electronic controller
The MAGNA3 incorporates a 4-pole synchronous, permanent-magnet motor (PM motor). This motor
type is characterised by higher efficiency than a conventional asynchronous squirrel-cage motor.
The pump speed is controlled by an integrated frequency converter.
A differential-pressure and temperature sensor is incorporated in the pump.
Liquid:
Pumped liquid:
Liquid temperature range:
Liquid temp:
Density:
Kinematic viscosity:
Vatten
-10 .. 110 °C
20 °C
998.2 kg/m³
1 mm2/s
Technical:
TF class:
Approvals on nameplate:
110
CE,VDE,PCT
Materials:
Pump housing:
Pump housing:
Pump housing:
Impeller:
Cast iron
EN-GJL-250
ASTM A48-250B
PES 30%GF
Installation:
Range of ambient temperature:
Maximum operating pressure:
Flange standard:
Pipe connection:
Pressure stage:
Port-to-port length:
0 .. 40 °C
10 bar
DIN
DN 40
PN6/10
220 mm
Electrical data:
Power input - P1:
Maximum current consumption:
Mains frequency:
Rated voltage:
Enclosure class (IEC 34-5):
Insulation class (IEC 85):
17 .. 265 W
0.19 .. 1.2 A
50 Hz
1 x 230 V
X4D
F
Others:
Label:
Energy (EEI):
Net weight:
Gross weight:
Shipping volume:
Grundfos Blueflux
0.19
16.4 kg
18.1 kg
0.04 m3
Printed from Grundfos CAPS [2012.05.065]
2/3
Company name:
Created by:
Phone:
Fax:
Date:
Technical:
Head max:
TF class:
Approvals on nameplate:
Model:
Materials:
Pump housing:
Impeller:
Installation:
Range of ambient temperature:
Maximum operating pressure:
Flange standard:
Pipe connection:
Pressure stage:
Port-to-port length:
MAGNA3 40-80 F
97924268
5710626493432
H
[m]
MAGNA3 40-80 F, 50Hz
8
7
6
80 dm
110
CE,VDE,PCT
A
Cast iron
EN-GJL-250
ASTM A48-250B
PES 30%GF
5
100
4
80
3
60
2
40
1
20
0
0
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20 Q [m³/h]
P1
[W]
200
0 .. 40 °C
10 bar
DIN
DN 40
PN6/10
220 mm
100
0
164
65
369
304
150
84
40
73
17 .. 265 W
0.19 .. 1.2 A
50 Hz
1 x 230 V
X4D
F
Others:
Label:
Energy (EEI):
Net weight:
Gross weight:
Shipping volume:
Grundfos Blueflux
0.19
16.4 kg
18.1 kg
0.04 m3
Printed from Grundfos CAPS [2012.05.065]
100/110
100/110
128
L
L
106
Electrical data:
Power input - P1:
Maximum current consumption:
Mains frequency:
Rated voltage:
Enclosure class (IEC 34-5):
Insulation class (IEC 85):
83
N
N
Vatten
-10 .. 110 °C
20 °C
998.2 kg/m³
1 mm2/s
220
Liquid:
Pumped liquid:
Liquid temperature range:
Liquid temp:
Density:
Kinematic viscosity:
eta
[%]
Pumped liquid = Vatten
Liquid temperature = 20 °C
Density = 998.2 kg/m³
14/19
Product name:
Product No:
EAN number:
Value
84
Description
-
3/3
Company name:
Created by:
Phone:
Fax:
Date:
Position
Qty.
1
-
Description
Single Price
UPS 32-80 B 180
On request
Note! Product picture may differ from actual product
Product No.: 52062221
The pump is of the canned rotor type, i.e. pump
and motor form an integral unit without shaft
seal and with only two gaskets for sealing.
The bearings are lubricatd by the pumped liquid.
The pump is characterized by:
* Ceramic shaft and radial bearings.
* Carbon axial bearing.
* Stainless steel rotor can and bearing plate.
* Corrosion-resistant impeller, Composite, PES/PP.
* Bronze pump housing.
The motor is a 1-phase motor.
No additional motor protection is required.
Liquid:
Liquid temperature range:
-25 .. 110 °C
Technical:
TF class :
Approvals on nameplate:
110
CE
Materials:
Material, pump housing:
Material, impeller:
Bronze
2.1176.01 DIN W.-Nr.
Composite, PES/PP
Installation:
Amb. max at 80 dgr C liquid:
Maximum operating pressure:
Size, pipe connection:
Pressure stage, pipe connec.:
Port-to-port length:
80 °C
10 bar
G2
PN 10
180 mm
Electrical data:
Power input speed 1:
Power input speed 2:
Max. power input:
Mains frequency:
Rated voltage:
Current in speed 1:
Current in speed 2:
Max. current:
145 W
215 W
245 W
50 Hz
1 x 240 V
0.64 A
0.92 A
1.02 A
Printed from Grundfos CAPS
1/4
Company name:
Created by:
Phone:
Fax:
Date:
Position
Qty.
Description
Single Price
Capacitor size - run:
Enclosure class (IEC 34-5):
Insulation class (IEC 85):
5 µF
IP42
F
Others:
Net weight:
Gross weight:
Shipping volume:
Energy label:
4.8 kg
5.1 kg
0.01 m³
D
Printed from Grundfos CAPS
-
2/4
Company name:
Created by:
Phone:
Fax:
Date:
Description
Product name:
Product No:
EAN number:
Value
UPS 32-80 B 180
52062221
5700390848231
Technical:
Speed no:
Head max:
TF class:
Approvals on nameplate:
3
80 dm
110
CE
6
4
Material, impeller:
Bronze
2.1176.01 DIN W.-Nr.
Composite, PES/PP
Installation:
Amb. max at 80 dgr C liquid:
Maximum operating pressure:
Size, pipe connection:
Pressure stage, pipe connec.:
Port-to-port length:
80 °C
10 bar
G2
PN 10
180 mm
2
Liquid:
Liquid temperature range:
-25 .. 110 °C
Electrical data:
Power input speed 1:
Power input speed 2:
Max. power input:
Mains frequency:
Rated voltage:
Current in speed 1:
Current in speed 2:
Max. current:
Capacitor size - run:
Enclosure class (IEC 34-5):
Insulation class (IEC 85):
Motor protec:
Thermal protec:
145 W
215 W
245 W
50 Hz
1 x 240 V
0.64 A
0.92 A
1.02 A
5 µF
IP42
F
CONTACT
internal
Controls:
Pos term box:
9H
Others:
Net weight:
Gross weight:
Shipping volume:
Energy label:
4.8 kg
5.1 kg
0.01 m³
D
Materials:
Material, pump housing:
Printed from Grundfos CAPS
-
H
(m)
UPS 32-80 B 180
7
5
3
1
0
0
P1
(W)
250
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Q(m³/h)
200
150
100
50
0
3/4
Company name:
Created by:
Phone:
Fax:
Date:
-
39
130
52062221 UPS 32-80 B 180
82
G2
60
180
Note! All units are in [mm] unless others are stated.
Printed from Grundfos CAPS
4/4
GRUNDFOS INSTRUCTIONS
MAGNA3
Installation and operating instructions
Declaration of conformity
Declaration of conformity
GB: EC declaration of conformity
BG: EC ɞɟɤɥɚɪɚɰɢɹ ɡɚ ɫɴɨɬɜɟɬɫɬɜɢɟ
We, Grundfos, declare under our sole responsibility that the products
MAGNA3, to which this declaration relates, are in conformity with these
Council directives on the approximation of the laws of the EC member
states:
— Machinery Directive (2006/42/EC).
Standard used: EN 809:1998.
— Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC).
Standards used: EN 60335-2-51:2003 and
EN 60950-1:2006/A12:2011.
— EMC Directive (2004/108/EC).
Standards used: EN 55014-1:2006, EN 55014-2:1998,
EN 61000-3-2:2006 and EN 61800-3-3:2008.
— Ecodesign Directive (2009/125/EC).
Circulators:
Commission Regulation No 641/2009.
Applies only to circulators marked with the energy efficiency index
EEI. See the pump nameplate.
Standards used: EN 16297-1:2012 and EN 16297-2:2012.
— R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC).
Standards used: ETSI EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (2006-10),
ETSI EN 301 489-17 (2009-05) and EN 62209-2:2010.
This EC declaration of conformity is only valid when published as part of
the Grundfos installation and operating instructions (publication number
98091805 0812).
ɇɢɟ, ɮɢɪɦɚ Grundfos, ɡɚɹɜɹɜɚɦɟ ɫ ɩɴɥɧɚ ɨɬɝɨɜɨɪɧɨɫɬ, ɱɟ ɩɪɨɞɭɤɬɢɬɟ
MAGNA3, ɡɚ ɤɨɢɬɨ ɫɟ ɨɬɧɚɫɹ ɧɚɫɬɨɹɳɚɬɚ ɞɟɤɥɚɪɚɰɢɹ, ɨɬɝɨɜɚɪɹɬ ɧɚ
ɫɥɟɞɧɢɬɟ ɭɤɚɡɚɧɢɹ ɧɚ ɋɴɜɟɬɚ ɡɚ ɭɟɞɧɚɤɜɹɜɚɧɟ ɧɚ ɩɪɚɜɧɢɬɟ
ɪɚɡɩɨɪɟɞɛɢ ɧɚ ɞɴɪɠɚɜɢɬɟ ɱɥɟɧɤɢ ɧɚ ȿɋ:
— Ⱦɢɪɟɤɬɢɜɚ ɡɚ ɦɚɲɢɧɢɬɟ (2006/42/EC).
ɉɪɢɥɨɠɟɧ ɫɬɚɧɞɚɪɬ: EN 809:1998.
— Ⱦɢɪɟɤɬɢɜɚ ɡɚ ɧɢɫɤɨɜɨɥɬɨɜɢ ɫɢɫɬɟɦɢ (2006/95/EC).
ɉɪɢɥɨɠɟɧɢ ɫɬɚɧɞɚɪɬɢ: EN 60335-2-51:2003 ɢ
EN 60950-1:2006/A12:2011.
— Ⱦɢɪɟɤɬɢɜɚ ɡɚ ɟɥɟɤɬɪɨɦɚɝɧɢɬɧɚ ɫɴɜɦɟɫɬɢɦɨɫɬ (2004/108/EC).
ɉɪɢɥɨɠɟɧɢ ɫɬɚɧɞɚɪɬɢ: EN 55014-1:2006, EN 55014-2:1998,
EN 61000-3-2:2006 ɢ EN 61800-3-3:2008.
— Ⱦɢɪɟɤɬɢɜɚ ɡɚ ɟɤɨɞɢɡɚɣɧ (2009/125/EC).
ɐɢɪɤɭɥɚɬɨɪɢ:
ɇɚɪɟɞɛɚ No 641/2009 ɧɚ ȿɜɪɨɩɟɣɫɤɚɬɚ ɤɨɦɢɫɢɹ.
ɉɪɢɥɚɝɚ ɫɟ ɫɚɦɨ ɡɚ ɰɢɪɤɭɥɚɬɨɪɢ, ɦɚɪɤɢɪɚɧɢ ɫ ɢɧɞɟɤɫ ɡɚ
ɟɧɟɪɝɢɣɧɚ ɟɮɟɤɬɢɜɧɨɫɬ EEI. ȼɢɠɬɟ ɬɚɛɟɥɚɬɚ ɫ ɞɚɧɧɢ ɧɚ
ɩɨɦɩɚɬɚ.
ɉɪɢɥɨɠɟɧɢ ɫɬɚɧɞɚɪɬɢ: EN 16297-1:2012 ɢ EN 16297-2:2012.
— R&TTE Ⱦɢɪɟɤɬɢɜɚ (1999/5/EC).
ɉɪɢɥɨɠɟɧɢ ɫɬɚɧɞɚɪɬɢ: ETSI EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (2006-10),
ETSI EN 301 489-17 (2009-05) ɢ EN 62209-2:2010.
Ɍɚɡɢ ȿɋ ɞɟɤɥɚɪɚɰɢɹ ɡɚ ɫɴɨɬɜɟɬɫɬɜɢɟ ɟ ɜɚɥɢɞɧɚ ɫɚɦɨ ɤɨɝɚɬɨ ɟ
ɩɭɛɥɢɤɭɜɚɧɚ ɤɚɬɨ ɱɚɫɬ ɨɬ ɢɧɫɬɪɭɤɰɢɢɬɟ ɡɚ ɦɨɧɬɚɠ ɢ ɟɤɫɩɥɨɚɬɚɰɢɹ ɧɚ
Grundfos (ɧɨɦɟɪ ɧɚ ɩɭɛɥɢɤɚɰɢɹɬɚ 98091805 0812).
CZ: ES prohlášení o shodČ
DK: EF-overensstemmelseserklæring
My firma Grundfos prohlašujeme na svou plnou odpovČdnost, že výrobky
MAGNA3, na nČž se toto prohlášení vztahuje, jsou v souladu s
ustanoveními smČrnice Rady pro sblížení právních pĜedpisĤ þlenských
státĤ Evropského spoleþenství v oblastech:
— SmČrnice pro strojní zaĜízení (2006/42/ES).
Použitá norma: EN 809:1998.
— SmČrnice pro nízkonapČt’ové aplikace (2006/95/ES).
Použité normy: EN 60335-2-51:2003 a EN 60950-1:2006/A12:2011.
— SmČrnice pro elektromagnetickou kompatibilitu (EMC)
(2004/108/ES).
Použité normy: EN 55014-1:2006, EN 55014-2:1998,
EN 61000-3-2:2006 a EN 61800-3-3:2008.
— SmČrnice o požadavcích na ekodesign (2009/125/ES).
ObČhová þerpadla:
NaĜízení Komise þ. 641/2009.
Platí pouze pro obČhová þerpadla s vyznaþeným indexem
energetické úþinnosti EEI. Viz typový štítek þerpadla.
Použité normy: EN 16297-1:2012 a EN 16297-2:2012.
— R&TTE smČrnice (1999/5/ES).
Použité normy: ETSI EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (2006-10),
ETSI EN 301 489-17 (2009-05) a EN 62209-2:2010.
Toto ES prohlášení o shodČ je platné pouze tehdy, pokud je zveĜejnČno
jako souþást instalaþních a provozních návodĤ Grundfos (publikace þíslo
98091805 0812).
Vi, Grundfos, erklærer under ansvar at produkterne MAGNA3 som denne
erklæring omhandler, er i overensstemmelse med disse af Rådets
direktiver om indbyrdes tilnærmelse til EF-medlemsstaternes lovgivning:
— Maskindirektivet (2006/42/EF).
Anvendt standard: EN 809:1998.
— Lavspændingsdirektivet (2006/95/EF).
Anvendte standarder: EN 60335-2-51:2003 og
EN 60950-1:2006/A12:2011.
— EMC-direktivet (2004/108/EF).
Anvendte standarder: EN 55014-1:2006, EN 55014-2:1998,
EN 61000-3-2:2006 og EN 61800-3-3:2008.
— Ecodesigndirektivet (2009/125/EF).
Cirkulationspumper:
Kommissionens forordning nr. 641/2009.
Gælder kun cirkulationspumper der er mærket med
energieffektivitetsindeks EEI. Se pumpens typeskilt.
Anvendte standarder: EN 16297-1:2012 og EN 16297-2:2012.
— R&TTE-direktiv (1999/5/EF).
Anvendte standarder: ETSI EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (2006-10),
ETSI EN 301 489-17 (2009-05) og EN 62209-2:2010.
Denne EF-overensstemmelseserklæring er kun gyldig når den publiceres
som en del af Grundfos-monterings- og driftsinstruktionen (publikationsnummer 98091805 0812).
DE: EG-Konformitätserklärung
EE: EL vastavusdeklaratsioon
Wir, Grundfos, erklären in alleiniger Verantwortung, dass die Produkte
MAGNA3, auf die sich diese Erklärung bezieht, mit den folgenden
Richtlinien des Rates zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften der
EU-Mitgliedsstaaten übereinstimmen:
— Maschinenrichtlinie (2006/42/EG).
Norm, die verwendet wurde: EN 809:1998.
— Niederspannungsrichtlinie (2006/95/EG).
Normen, die verwendet wurden: EN 60335-2-51:2003 und
EN 60950-1:2006/A12:2011.
— EMV-Richtlinie (2004/108/EG).
Normen, die verwendet wurden: EN 55014-1:2006,
EN 55014-2:1998, EN 61000-3-2:2006 und EN 61800-3-3:2008.
— Ökodesign-Richtlinie (2009/125/EG).
Umwälzpumpen:
Verordnung der EU-Kommission Nr. 641/2009.
Gilt nur für Umwälzpumpen, bei denen das Kennzeichen EEI auf
dem Typenschild aufgeführt ist. EEI steht für Energieeffizienzindex.
Normen, die verwendet wurden: EN 16297-1:2012 und
EN 16297-2:2012.
— Richtlinie über Funkanlagen und Telekommunikationsendeinrichtungen (1999/5/EG).
Normen, die verwendet wurden: ETSI EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (2006-10),
ETSI EN 301 489-17 (2009-05) und EN 62209-2:2010.
Diese EG-Konformitätserklärung gilt nur, wenn sie in Verbindung mit der
Grundfos Montage- und Betriebsanleitung (Veröffentlichungsnummer
98091805 0812) veröffentlicht wird.
Meie, Grundfos, deklareerime enda ainuvastutusel, et tooted MAGNA3,
mille kohta käesolev juhend käib, on vastavuses EÜ Nõukogu
direktiividega EMÜ liikmesriikide seaduste ühitamise kohta, mis
käsitlevad:
— Masinate ohutus (2006/42/EC).
Kasutatud standard: EN 809:1998.
— Madalpinge direktiiv (2006/95/EC).
Kasutatud standardid: EN 60335-2-51:2003 ja
EN 60950-1:2006/A12:2011.
— Elektromagnetiline ühilduvus (EMC direktiiv) (2004/108/EC).
Kasutatud standardid: EN 55014-1:2006, EN 55014-2:1998,
EN 61000-3-2:2006 ja EN 61800-3-3:2008.
— Ökodisaini direktiiv (2009/125/EC).
Ringluspumbad:
Komisjoni määrus nr 641/2009.
Rakendub ainult ringluspumpadele, mis on tähistatud
energiatõhususe märgistusega EEI. Vt pumba andmeplaati.
Kasutatud standardid: EN 16297-1:2012 ja EN 16297-2:2012.
— R&TTE direktiiv (1999/5/EC).
Kasutatud standardid: ETSI EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (2006-10),
ETSI EN 301 489-17 (2009-05) ja EN 62209-2:2010.
Käesolev EL-i vastavusdeklaratsioon kehtib ainult siis, kui see
avaldatakse Grundfosi paigaldus- ja kasutusjuhendi (avaldamisnumber
98091805 0812) osana.
2
ES: Declaración CE de conformidad
Nosotros, Grundfos, declaramos bajo nuestra entera responsabilidad
que los productos MAGNA3, a los cuales se refiere esta declaración,
están conformes con las Directivas del Consejo en la aproximación de
las leyes de las Estados Miembros del EM:
— Directiva de Maquinaria (2006/42/CE).
Norma aplicada: EN 809:1998.
— Directiva de Baja Tensión (2006/95/CE).
Normas aplicadas: EN 60335-2-51:2003 y
EN 60950-1:2006/A12:2011.
— Directiva EMC (2004/108/CE).
Normas aplicadas: EN 55014-1:2006, EN 55014-2:1998,
EN 61000-3-2:2006 y EN 61800-3-3:2008.
— Directiva sobre diseño ecológico (2009/125/CE).
Bombas circuladoras:
Reglamento de la Comisión nº 641/2009.
Aplicable únicamente a las bombas circuladoras marcadas con
el índice de eficiencia energética IEE. Véase la placa de
características.
Normas aplicadas: EN 16297-1:2012 y EN 16297-2:2012.
— R&TTE Directiva (1999/5/CE).
Normas aplicadas: ETSI EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (2006-10),
ETSI EN 301 489-17 (2009-05) y EN 62209-2:2010.
Esta declaración CE de conformidad sólo es válida cuando se publique
como parte de las instrucciones de instalación y funcionamiento de
Grundfos (número de publicación 98091805 0812).
FR: Déclaration de conformité CE
HR: EZ izjava o usklaÿenosti
Nous, Grundfos, déclarons sous notre seule responsabilité, que
les produits MAGNA3, auxquels se réfère cette déclaration, sont
conformes aux Directives du Conseil concernant le rapprochement des
législations des Etats membres CE relatives aux normes énoncées
ci-dessous:
— Directive Machines (2006/42/CE).
Norme utilisée: EN 809:1998.
— Directive Basse Tension (2006/95/CE).
Normes utilisées: EN 60335-2-51:2003 et
EN 60950-1:2006/A12:2011.
— Directive Compatibilité Electromagnétique CEM (2004/108/CE).
Normes utilisées: EN 55014-1:2006, EN 55014-2:1998,
EN 61000-3-2:2006 et EN 61800-3-3:2008.
— Directive sur l'éco-conception (2009/125/CE).
Circulateurs:
Règlement de la Commission Nº 641/2009.
S'applique uniquement aux circulateurs marqués de l'indice de
performance énergétique EEI. Voir plaque signalétique du
circulateur.
Normes utilisées: EN 16297-1:2012 et EN 16297-2:2012.
— Directive sur les équipements radioémetteurs TTE (1999/5/CE).
Normes utilisées: ETSI EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (2006-10),
ETSI EN 301 489-17 (2009-05) et EN 62209-2:2010.
Cette déclaration de conformité CE est uniquement valide lors de sa
publication dans la notice d'installation et de fonctionnement Grundfos
(numéro de publication 98091805 0812).
Mi, Grundfos, izjavljujemo pod vlastitom odgovornošüu da je proizvod
MAGNA3, na koji se ova izjava odnosi, u skladu s direktivama ovog
Vijeüa o usklaÿivanju zakona država þlanica EU:
— Direktiva za strojeve (2006/42/EZ).
Korištena norma: EN 809:1998.
— Direktiva za niski napon (2006/95/EZ).
Korištene norme: EN 60335-2-51:2003
i EN 60950-1:2006/A12:2011.
— Direktiva za elektromagnetsku kompatibilnost (2004/108/EZ).
Korištene norme: EN 55014-1:2006, EN 55014-2:1998,
EN 61000-3-2:2006 i EN 61800-3-3:2008.
— Direktiva o ekološkoj izvedbi (2009/125/EZ).
Optoþne crpke:
Regulativa komisije br. 641/2009.
Odnosi se samo na optoþne crpke oznaþene indeksom energetske
uþinkovitosti EEI. Pogledajte natpisnu ploþicu crpke.
Korištene norme: EN 16297-1:2012 i EN 16297-2:2012.
— R&TTE Direktiva (1999/5/EZ).
Korištene norme: ETSI EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (2006-10),
ETSI EN 301 489-17 (2009-05) i EN 62209-2:2010.
Ova EZ izjava o suklaÿnosti važeüa je jedino kada je izdana kao dio
Grundfos montažnih i pogonskih uputa (broj izdanja 98091805 0812).
IT: Dichiarazione di conformità CE
LV: EK paziƼojums par atbilstƯbu prasƯbƗm
Grundfos dichiara sotto la sua esclusiva responsabilità che i prodotti
MAGNA3, ai quali si riferisce questa dichiarazione, sono conformi alle
seguenti direttive del Consiglio riguardanti il riavvicinamento delle
legislazioni degli Stati membri CE:
— Direttiva Macchine (2006/42/CE).
Norma applicata: EN 809:1998.
— Direttiva Bassa Tensione (2006/95/CE).
Norme applicate: EN 60335-2-51:2003 e
EN 60950-1:2006/A12:2011.
— Direttiva EMC (2004/108/CE).
Norme applicate: EN 55014-1:2006, EN 55014-2:1998,
EN 61000-3-2:2006 e EN 61800-3-3:2008.
— Direttiva Ecodesign (2009/125/CE).
Circolatori:
Regolamento della Commissione N. 641/2009.
Applicabile solo ai circolatori dotati di indice di efficienza EEI. Vedi la
targhetta identificativa del circolatore.
Norme applicate: EN 16297-1:2012 e EN 16297-2:2012.
— Direttiva R&TTE (1999/5/CE).
Norme applicate: ETSI EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (2006-10),
ETSI EN 301 489-17 (2009-05) e EN 62209-2:2010.
Questa dichiarazione di conformità CE è valida solo quando pubblicata
come parte delle istruzioni di installazione e funzionamento Grundfos
(pubblicazione numero 98091805 0812).
SabiedrƯba GRUNDFOS ar pilnu atbildƯbu dara zinƗmu, ka produkti
MAGNA3, uz kuriem attiecas šis paziƼojums, atbilst šƗdƗm Padomes
direktƯvƗm par tuvinƗšanos EK dalƯbvalstu likumdošanas normƗm:
— MašƯnbnjves direktƯva (2006/42/EK).
PiemƝrotais standarts: EN 809:1998.
— Zema sprieguma direktƯva (2006/95/EK).
PiemƝrotie standarti: EN 60335-2-51:2003 un
EN 60950-1:2006/A12:2011.
— ElektromagnƝtiskƗs saderƯbas direktƯva (2004/108/EK).
PiemƝrotie standarti: EN 55014-1:2006, EN 55014-2:1998,
EN 61000-3-2:2006 un EN 61800-3-3:2008.
— Ekodizaina direktƯva (2009/125/EK).
CirkulƗcijas snjkƼi:
Komisijas Regula Nr. 641/2009.
Attiecas tikai uz tƗdiem cirkulƗcijas snjkƼiem, kuriem ir
energoefektivitƗtes indeksa EEI marƷƝjums. Sk. snjkƼa pases datu
plƗksnƯtƝ.
PiemƝrotie standarti: EN 16297-1:2012 un EN 16297-2:2012.
— RTTI direktƯva (1999/5/EK).
PiemƝrotie standarti: ETSI EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (2006-10),
ETSI EN 301 489-17 (2009-05) un EN 62209-2:2010.
ŠƯ EK atbilstƯbas deklarƗcija ir derƯga vienƯgi tad, ja ir publicƝta kƗ daƺa
no GRUNDFOS uzstƗdƯšanas un ekspluatƗcijas instrukcijƗm
(publikƗcijas numurs 98091805 0812).
Declaration of conformity
GR: ǻȒȜȦıȘ ıȣȝȝȩȡijȦıȘȢ EC
ǼȝİȓȢ, Ș Grundfos, įȘȜȫȞȠȣȝİ ȝİ ĮʌȠțȜİȚıIJȚțȐ įȚțȒ ȝĮȢ İȣșȪȞȘ ȩIJȚ
IJĮ ʌȡȠȧȩȞIJĮ MAGNA3 ıIJĮ ȠʌȠȓĮ ĮȞĮijȑȡİIJĮȚ Ș ʌĮȡȠȪıĮ įȒȜȦıȘ,
ıȣȝȝȠȡijȫȞȠȞIJĮȚ ȝİ IJȚȢ İȟȒȢ ȅįȘȖȓİȢ IJȠȣ ȈȣȝȕȠȣȜȓȠȣ ʌİȡȓ ʌȡȠıȑȖȖȚıȘȢ
IJȦȞ ȞȠȝȠșİıȚȫȞ IJȦȞ țȡĮIJȫȞ ȝİȜȫȞ IJȘȢ ǼǼ:
— ȅįȘȖȓĮ ȖȚĮ ȝȘȤĮȞȒȝĮIJĮ (2006/42/EC).
ȆȡȩIJȣʌȠ ʌȠȣ ȤȡȘıȚȝȠʌȠȚȒșȘțİ: EN 809:1998.
— ȅįȘȖȓĮ ȤĮȝȘȜȒȢ IJȐıȘȢ (2006/95/EC).
ȆȡȩIJȣʌĮ ʌȠȣ ȤȡȘıȚȝȠʌȠȚȒșȘțĮȞ: EN 60335-2-51:2003 țĮȚ
EN 60950-1:2006/A12:2011.
— ȅįȘȖȓĮ ǾȜİțIJȡȠȝĮȖȞȘIJȚțȒȢ ȈȣȝȕĮIJȩIJȘIJĮȢ (EMC) (2004/108/EC).
ȆȡȩIJȣʌĮ ʌȠȣ ȤȡȘıȚȝȠʌȠȚȒșȘțĮȞ: EN 55014-1:2006,
EN 55014-2:1998, EN 61000-3-2:2006 țĮȚ EN 61800-3-3:2008.
— ȅįȘȖȓĮ ȅȚțȠȜȠȖȚțȠȪ ȈȤİįȚĮıȝȠȪ (2009/125/ǼC).
ȀȣțȜȠijȠȡȘIJȑȢ:
ȀĮȞȠȞȚıȝȩȢ ǹȡ. 641/2009 IJȘȢ ǼʌȚIJȡȠʌȒȢ.
ǿıȤȪİȚ ȝȩȞȠ ȖȚĮ țȣțȜȠijȠȡȘIJȑȢ ʌȠȣ ijȑȡȠȣȞ IJȠȞ įİȓțIJȘ İȞİȡȖİȚĮțȒȢ
ĮʌȩįȠıȘȢ EEI. ǺȜȑʌİ ʌȚȞĮțȓįĮ țȣțȜȠijȠȡȘIJȒ.
ȆȡȩIJȣʌĮ ʌȠȣ ȤȡȘıȚȝȠʌȠȚȒșȘțĮȞ: EN 16297-1:2012 țĮȚ
EN 16297-2:2012.
— R&ȅįȘȖȓĮ TTE (1999/5/EC).
ȆȡȩIJȣʌĮ ʌȠȣ ȤȡȘıȚȝȠʌȠȚȒșȘțĮȞ: ETSI EN 300 328 V1.7.1
(2006-10), ETSI EN 301 489-17 (2009-05) țĮȚ EN 62209-2:2010.
ǹȣIJȒ Ș įȒȜȦıȘ ıȣȝȝȩȡijȦıȘȢ EC ȚıȤȪİȚ ȝȩȞȠȞ ȩIJĮȞ ıȣȞȠįİȪİȚ IJȚȢ
ȠįȘȖȓİȢ İȖțĮIJȐıIJĮıȘȢ țĮȚ ȜİȚIJȠȣȡȖȓĮȢ IJȘȢ Grundfos (țȦįȚțȩȢ İȞIJȪʌȠȣ
98091805 0812).
3
Declaration of conformity
LT: EB atitikties deklaracija
HU: EK megfelelĘségi nyilatkozat
Mes, Grundfos, su visa atsakomybe pareiškiame, kad gaminiai MAGNA3,
kuriems skirta ši deklaracija, atitinka šias Tarybos Direktyvas dơl Europos
Ekonominơs Bendrijos šaliǐ nariǐ Ƴstatymǐ suderinimo:
— Mašinǐ direktyva (2006/42/EB).
Taikomas standartas: EN 809:1998.
— Žemǐ Ƴtampǐ direktyva (2006/95/EB).
Taikomi standartai: EN 60335-2-51:2003 ir
EN 60950-1:2006/A12:2011.
— EMS direktyva (2004/108/EB).
Taikomi standartai: EN 55014-1:2006, EN 55014-2:1998,
EN 61000-3-2:2006 ir EN 61800-3-3:2008.
— Ekologinio projektavimo direktyva (2009/125/EB).
Cirkuliaciniai siurbliai:
Komisijos reglamentas Nr. 641/2009.
Galioja tik cirkuliaciniams siurbliams, pažymơtiems energijos
efektyvumo indeksu EEI. Žr. siurblio vardinĊ plokštelĊ.
Taikomi standartai: EN 16297-1:2012 ir EN 16297-2:2012.
— R&TTE direktyva (1999/5/EB).
Taikomi standartai: ETSI EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (2006-10),
ETSI EN 301 489-17 (2009-05) ir EN 62209-2:2010.
Ši EB atitikties deklaracija galioja tik tuo atveju, kai yra pateikta kaip
"Grundfos" Ƴrengimo ir naudojimo instrukcijos (leidinio numeris 98091805
0812) dalis.
Mi, a Grundfos, egyedüli felelĘsséggel kijelentjük, hogy a MAGNA3
termékek, amelyekre jelen nyilatkozik vonatkozik, megfelelnek az
Európai Unió tagállamainak jogi irányelveit összehangoló tanács alábbi
elĘírásainak:
— Gépek (2006/42/EK).
Alkalmazott szabvány: EN 809:1998.
— KisfeszültségĦ Direktíva (2006/95/EK).
Alkalmazott szabványok: EN 60335-2-51:2003 és
EN 60950-1:2006/A12:2011.
— EMC Direktíva (2004/108/EK).
Alkalmazott szabványok: EN 55014-1:2006, EN 55014-2:1998,
EN 61000-3-2:2006 és EN 61800-3-3:2008.
— Környezetbarát tervezésre vonatkozó irányelv (2009/125/EK).
KeringetĘ szivattyúk:
Az Európai Bizottság 641/2009. számú rendelete.
Kizárólag azokra a keringetĘ szivattyúkra vonatkozik, amelyek
adattábláján szerepel az EEI. energiahatékonysági index.
Alkalmazott szabványok: EN 16297-1:2012 és
EN 16297-2:2012.
— R&TTE Direktíva (1999/5/EK).
Alkalmazott szabványok: ETSI EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (2006-10),
ETSI EN 301 489-17 (2009-05) és EN 62209-2:2010.
Ez az EK megfelelĘségi nyilatkozat kizárólag akkor érvényes, ha
Grundfos telepítési és üzemeltetési utasítás (kiadvány szám 98091805
0812) részeként kerül kiadásra.
NL: EC overeenkomstigheidsverklaring
UA: ɋɜɿɞɱɟɧɧɹ ɩɪɨ ɜɿɞɩɨɜɿɞɧɿɫɬɶ ɜɢɦɨɝɚɦ ȯɋ
Wij, Grundfos, verklaren geheel onder eigen verantwoordelijkheid dat de
producten MAGNA3 waarop deze verklaring betrekking heeft,
in overeenstemming zijn met de Richtlijnen van de Raad in zake de
onderlinge aanpassing van de wetgeving van de EG Lidstaten
betreffende:
— Machine Richtlijn (2006/42/EC).
Gebruikte norm: EN 809:1998.
— Laagspannings Richtlijn (2006/95/EC).
Gebruikte normen: EN 60335-2-51:2003 en
EN 60950-1:2006/A12:2011.
— EMC Richtlijn (2004/108/EC).
Gebruikte normen: EN 55014-1:2006, EN 55014-2:1998,
EN 61000-3-2:2006 en EN 61800-3-3:2008.
— Ecodesign Richtlijn (2009/125/EC).
Circulatiepompen:
Verordening van de Commissie nr. 641/2009.
Alleen van toepassing op circulatiepompen gemarkeerd met de
energie efficiëntie index EEI. Zie het typeplaatje van de pomp.
Gebruikte normen: EN 16297-1:2012 en EN 16297-2:2012.
— R&TTE Richtlijn (1999/5/EC).
Gebruikte normen: ETSI EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (2006-10),
ETSI EN 301 489-17 (2009-05) en EN 62209-2:2010.
Deze EC overeenkomstigheidsverklaring is alleen geldig wanneer deze
gepubliceerd is als onderdeel van de Grundfos installatie- en
bedieningsinstructies (publicatienummer 98091805 0812).
Ʉɨɦɩɚɧɿɹ Grundfos ɡɚɹɜɥɹɽ ɩɪɨ ɫɜɨɸ ɜɢɤɥɸɱɧɭ ɜɿɞɩɨɜɿɞɚɥɶɧɿɫɬɶ ɡɚ
ɬɟ, ɳɨ ɩɪɨɞɭɤɬɢ MAGNA3, ɧɚ ɹɤɿ ɩɨɲɢɪɸɽɬɶɫɹ ɞɚɧɚ ɞɟɤɥɚɪɚɰɿɹ,
ɜɿɞɩɨɜɿɞɚɸɬɶ ɬɚɤɢɦ ɪɟɤɨɦɟɧɞɚɰɿɹɦ Ɋɚɞɢ ɡ ɭɧɿɮɿɤɚɰɿʀ ɩɪɚɜɨɜɢɯ ɧɨɪɦ
ɤɪɚʀɧ - ɱɥɟɧɿɜ ȯɋ:
— Ɇɟɯɚɧɿɱɧɿ ɩɪɢɥɚɞɢ (2006/42/ȯɋ).
ɋɬɚɧɞɚɪɬɢ, ɳɨ ɡɚɫɬɨɫɨɜɭɜɚɥɢɫɹ: EN 809:1998.
— ɇɢɡɶɤɚ ɧɚɩɪɭɝɚ (2006/95/ȯɋ).
ɋɬɚɧɞɚɪɬɢ, ɳɨ ɡɚɫɬɨɫɨɜɭɜɚɥɢɫɹ: EN 60335-2-51:2003 ɬɚ
EN 60950-1:2006/A12:2011.
— ȿɥɟɤɬɪɨɦɚɝɧɿɬɧɚ ɫɭɦɿɫɧɿɫɬɶ (2004/108/ȯɋ).
ɋɬɚɧɞɚɪɬɢ, ɳɨ ɡɚɫɬɨɫɨɜɭɜɚɥɢɫɹ: EN 55014-1:2006,
EN 55014-2:1998, EN 61000-3-2:2006 ɬɚ EN 61800-3-3:2008.
— Ⱦɢɪɟɤɬɢɜɚ ɡ ɟɤɨɞɢɡɚɣɧɭ (2009/125/ȯɋ).
ɐɢɪɤɭɥɹɬɨɪɢ:
Ɋɟɝɥɚɦɟɧɬ Ʉɨɦɿɫɿʀ ʋ 641/2009.
Ɂɚɫɬɨɫɨɜɭɽɬɶɫɹ ɬɿɥɶɤɢ ɞɥɹ ɰɢɪɤɭɥɹɬɨɪɿɜ, ɩɨɡɧɚɱɟɧɢɯ ɿɧɞɟɤɫɨɦ
ɟɧɟɪɝɨɟɮɟɤɬɢɜɧɨɫɬɿ EEI. Ⱦɢɜ. ɡɚɜɨɞɫɶɤɭ ɬɚɛɥɢɱɤɭ ɧɚ ɧɚɫɨɫɿ.
ɋɬɚɧɞɚɪɬɢ, ɳɨ ɡɚɫɬɨɫɨɜɭɜɚɥɢɫɹ: EN 16297-1:2012 ɬɚ
EN 16297-2:2012.
— R&ɧɨɪɦɢ TTE (1999/5/ȯɋ).
ɋɬɚɧɞɚɪɬɢ, ɳɨ ɡɚɫɬɨɫɨɜɭɜɚɥɢɫɹ: ETSI EN 300 328 V1.7.1
(2006-10), ETSI EN 301 489-17 (2009-05) ɬɚ EN 62209-2:2010.
ɐɹ ɞɟɤɥɚɪɚɰɿɹ ɜɿɞɩɨɜɿɞɧɨɫɬɿ ȯɋ ɞɿɣɫɧɚ ɬɿɥɶɤɢ ɜ ɬɨɦɭ ɜɢɩɚɞɤɭ, ɹɤɳɨ
ɩɭɛɥɿɤɭɽɬɶɫɹ ɹɤ ɱɚɫɬɢɧɚ ɿɧɫɬɪɭɤɰɿɣ Grundfos ɡ ɦɨɧɬɚɠɭ ɬɚ
ɟɤɫɩɥɭɚɬɚɰɿʀ (ɧɨɦɟɪ ɩɭɛɥɿɤɚɰɿʀ 98091805 0812).
PL: Deklaracja zgodnoĞci WE
PT: Declaração de conformidade CE
My, Grundfos, oĞwiadczamy z peáną odpowiedzialnoĞcią, Īe nasze
wyroby MAGNA3, których deklaracja niniejsza dotyczy, są zgodne
z nastĊpującymi wytycznymi Rady d/s ujednolicenia przepisów prawnych
krajów czáonkowskich WE:
— Dyrektywa Maszynowa (2006/42/WE).
Zastosowana norma: EN 809:1998.
— Dyrektywa NiskonapiĊciowa (LVD) (2006/95/WE).
Zastosowane normy: EN 60335-2-51:2003 oraz
EN 60950-1:2006/A12:2011.
— Dyrektywa EMC (2004/108/WE).
Zastosowane normy: EN 55014-1:2006, EN 55014-2:1998,
EN 61000-3-2:2006 oraz EN 61800-3-3:2008.
— Dyrektywa Ekoprojektowa (2009/125/WE).
Pompy obiegowe:
Rozporządzenie Komisji (WE) Nr 641/2009.
Dotyczy tylko pomp obiegowych oznaczonych sprawnoĞcią
energetyczną EEI. Patrz tabliczka znamionowa na pompie.
Zastosowane normy: EN 16297-1:2012 oraz EN 16297-2:2012.
— R&Dyrektywa TTE (1999/5/WE).
Zastosowane normy: ETSI EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (2006-10),
ETSI EN 301 489-17 (2009-05) oraz EN 62209-2:2010.
Deklaracja zgodnoĞci WE jest waĪna tylko i wyáącznie wtedy kiedy jest
opublikowana przez firmĊ Grundfos i umieszczona w instrukcji montaĪu
i eksploatacji (numer publikacji 98091805 0812).
A Grundfos declara sob sua única responsabilidade que os produtos
MAGNA3, aos quais diz respeito esta declaração, estão em
conformidade com as seguintes Directivas do Conselho sobre
a aproximação das legislações dos Estados Membros da CE:
— Directiva Máquinas (2006/42/CE).
Norma utilizada: EN 809:1998.
— Directiva Baixa Tensão (2006/95/CE).
Normas utilizadas: EN 60335-2-51:2003 e
EN 60950-1:2006/A12:2011.
— Directiva EMC (compatibilidade electromagnética) (2004/108/CE).
Normas utilizadas: EN 55014-1:2006, EN 55014-2:1998,
EN 61000-3-2:2006 e EN 61800-3-3:2008.
— Directiva de Concepção Ecológica (2009/125/CE).
Circuladores:
Disposição Regulamentar da Comissão n.º 641/2009.
Aplica-se apenas a circuladores marcados com o Índice de
Eficiência Energética EEI. Ver chapa de características do
circulador.
Normas utilizadas: EN 16297-1:2012 e EN 16297-2:2012.
— Directiva R&TTE (1999/5/CE).
Normas utilizadas: ETSI EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (2006-10),
ETSI EN 301 489-17 (2009-05) e EN 62209-2:2010.
Esta declaração de conformidade CE é apenas válida quando publicada
como parte das instruções de instalação e funcionamento Grundfos
(número de publicação 98091805 0812).
4
Declaration of conformity
RU: Ⱦɟɤɥɚɪɚɰɢɹ ɨ ɫɨɨɬɜɟɬɫɬɜɢɢ ȿɋ
RO: DeclaraĠie de conformitate CE
Ɇɵ, ɤɨɦɩɚɧɢɹ Grundfos, ɫɨ ɜɫɟɣ ɨɬɜɟɬɫɬɜɟɧɧɨɫɬɶɸ ɡɚɹɜɥɹɟɦ, ɱɬɨ
ɢɡɞɟɥɢɹ MAGNA3, ɤ ɤɨɬɨɪɵɦ ɨɬɧɨɫɢɬɫɹ ɧɚɫɬɨɹɳɚɹ ɞɟɤɥɚɪɚɰɢɹ,
ɫɨɨɬɜɟɬɫɬɜɭɸɬ ɫɥɟɞɭɸɳɢɦ Ⱦɢɪɟɤɬɢɜɚɦ ɋɨɜɟɬɚ ȿɜɪɨɫɨɸɡɚ ɨɛ
ɭɧɢɮɢɤɚɰɢɢ ɡɚɤɨɧɨɞɚɬɟɥɶɧɵɯ ɩɪɟɞɩɢɫɚɧɢɣ ɫɬɪɚɧ-ɱɥɟɧɨɜ ȿɋ:
— Ɇɟɯɚɧɢɱɟɫɤɢɟ ɭɫɬɪɨɣɫɬɜɚ (2006/42/ȿɋ).
ɉɪɢɦɟɧɹɜɲɢɣɫɹ ɫɬɚɧɞɚɪɬ: EN 809:1998.
— ɇɢɡɤɨɜɨɥɶɬɧɨɟ ɨɛɨɪɭɞɨɜɚɧɢɟ (2006/95/EC).
ɉɪɢɦɟɧɹɜɲɢɟɫɹ ɫɬɚɧɞɚɪɬɵ: EN 60335-2-51:2003 ɢ
EN 60950-1:2006/A12:2011.
— ɗɥɟɤɬɪɨɦɚɝɧɢɬɧɚɹ ɫɨɜɦɟɫɬɢɦɨɫɬɶ (2004/108/EC).
ɉɪɢɦɟɧɹɜɲɢɟɫɹ ɫɬɚɧɞɚɪɬɵ: EN 55014-1:2006,
EN 55014-2:1998, EN 61000-3-2:2006 ɢ EN 61800-3-3:2008.
— Ⱦɢɪɟɤɬɢɜɚ ɩɨ ɷɤɨɥɨɝɢɱɟɫɤɨɦɭ ɩɪɨɟɤɬɢɪɨɜɚɧɢɸ
ɷɧɟɪɝɨɩɨɬɪɟɛɥɹɸɳɟɣ ɩɪɨɞɭɤɰɢɢ (2009/125/EC).
ɐɢɪɤɭɥɹɰɢɨɧɧɵɟ ɧɚɫɨɫɵ:
ɉɨɫɬɚɧɨɜɥɟɧɢɟ Ʉɨɦɢɫɫɢɢ ʋ 641/2009.
ɉɪɢɦɟɧɹɟɬɫɹ ɬɨɥɶɤɨ ɩɨ ɨɬɧɨɲɟɧɢɸ ɤ ɰɢɪɤɭɥɹɰɢɨɧɧɵɦ ɧɚɫɨɫɚɦ,
ɩɪɨɦɚɪɤɢɪɨɜɚɧɧɵɦ ɢ ɢɦɟɸɳɢɦ ɢɧɞɟɤɫ ɷɧɟɪɝɨɷɮɮɟɤɬɢɜɧɨɫɬɢ
EEI. ɋɦ. ɮɢɪɦɟɧɧɭɸ ɬɚɛɥɢɱɤɭ ɧɚɫɨɫɚ.
ɉɪɢɦɟɧɹɜɲɢɟɫɹ ɫɬɚɧɞɚɪɬɵ: EN 16297-1:2012 ɢ
EN 16297-2:2012.
— Ⱦɢɪɟɤɬɢɜɚ ɩɨ ɫɪɟɞɫɬɜɚɦ ɪɚɞɢɨɫɜɹɡɢ ɢ ɬɟɥɟɤɨɦɦɭɧɢɤɚɰɢɨɧɧɨɦɭ
ɨɤɨɧɟɱɧɨɦɭ ɨɛɨɪɭɞɨɜɚɧɢɸ (1999/5/EC).
ɉɪɢɦɟɧɹɜɲɢɟɫɹ ɫɬɚɧɞɚɪɬɵ: ETSI EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (2006-10),
ETSI EN 301 489-17 (2009-05) ɢ EN 62209-2:2010.
Ⱦɚɧɧɚɹ ɞɟɤɥɚɪɚɰɢɹ ɨ ɫɨɨɬɜɟɬɫɬɜɢɢ ȿɋ ɢɦɟɟɬ ɫɢɥɭ ɬɨɥɶɤɨ ɜ ɫɥɭɱɚɟ
ɩɭɛɥɢɤɚɰɢɢ ɜ ɫɨɫɬɚɜɟ ɢɧɫɬɪɭɤɰɢɢ ɩɨ ɦɨɧɬɚɠɭ ɢ ɷɤɫɩɥɭɚɬɚɰɢɢ ɧɚ
ɩɪɨɞɭɤɰɢɸ ɩɪɨɢɡɜɨɞɫɬɜɚ ɤɨɦɩɚɧɢɢ Grundfos (ɧɨɦɟɪ ɩɭɛɥɢɤɚɰɢɢ
98091805 0812).
Noi, Grundfos, declarăm pe propria răspundere că produsele MAGNA3,
la care se referă această declaraĠie, sunt în conformitate cu aceste
Directive de Consiliu asupra armonizării legilor Statelor Membre CE:
— Directiva Utilaje (2006/42/CE).
Standard utilizat: EN 809:1998.
— Directiva Tensiune Joasă (2006/95/CE).
Standarde utilizate: EN 60335-2-51:2003 úi
EN 60950-1:2006/A12:2011.
— Directiva EMC (2004/108/CE).
Standarde utilizate: EN 55014-1:2006, EN 55014-2:1998,
EN 61000-3-2:2006 úi EN 61800-3-3:2008.
— Directiva Ecodesign (2009/125/CE).
Circulatorii:
Regulamentul Comisiei nr. 641/2009.
Se aplică numai pompelor de circula‫܊‬ie marcate cu indexul de
eficien‫܊‬ă energetică EEI. Vezi plăcu‫܊‬a de identificare a pompei.
Standarde utilizate: EN 16297-1:2012 úi EN 16297-2:2012.
— R&Directiva TTE (1999/5/CE).
Standarde utilizate: ETSI EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (2006-10),
ETSI EN 301 489-17 (2009-05) úi EN 62209-2:2010.
Această declara‫܊‬ie de conformitate CE este valabilă numai când este
publicată ca parte a instruc‫܊‬iunilor Grundfos de instalare ‫܈‬i func‫܊‬ionare
(număr publica‫܊‬ie 98091805 0812).
SK: Prehlásenie o konformite ES
SI: ES izjava o skladnosti
My firma Grundfos prehlasujeme na svoju plnú zodpovednost’, že výrobky
MAGNA3, na ktoré sa toto prehlásenie vzt’ahuje, sú v súlade s
ustanovením smernice Rady pre zblíženie právnych predpisov þlenských
štátov Európskeho spoloþenstva v oblastiach:
— Smernica pre strojové zariadenie (2006/42/ES).
Použitá norma: EN 809:1998.
— Smernica pre nízkonapät’ové aplikácie (2006/95/ES).
Použité normy: EN 60335-2-51:2003 a EN 60950-1:2006/A12:2011.
— Smernica pre elektromagnetickú kompatibilitu (2004/108/ES).
Použité normy: EN 55014-1:2006, EN 55014-2:1998,
EN 61000-3-2:2006 a EN 61800-3-3:2008.
— Smernica o ekodizajne (2009/125/ES).
Obehové þerpadlá:
Nariadenie Komisie þ 641/2009.
Platí iba pre obehové þerpadlá s vyznaþeným indexom energetickej
úþinnosti EEI. Vić typový štítok þerpadla.
Použité normy: EN 16297-1:2012 a EN 16297-2:2012.
— R&TTE Smernica (1999/5/ES).
Použité normy: ETSI EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (2006-10),
ETSI EN 301 489-17 (2009-05) a EN 62209-2:2010.
Toto prehlásenie o konformite ES je platné iba vtedy, ak je zverejnené
ako súþasĢ montážnych a prevádzkových pokynov Grundfos (publikácia
þíslo 98091805 0812).
V Grundfosu s polno odgovornostjo izjavljamo, da so naši izdelki
MAGNA3, na katere se ta izjava nanaša, v skladu z naslednjimi
direktivami Sveta o približevanju zakonodaje za izenaþevanje pravnih
predpisov držav þlanic ES:
— Direktiva o strojih (2006/42/ES).
Uporabljena norma: EN 809:1998.
— Direktiva o nizki napetosti (2006/95/ES).
Uporabljeni normi: EN 60335-2-51:2003 in
EN 60950-1:2006/A12:2011.
— Direktiva o elektromagnetni združljivosti (EMC) (2004/108/ES).
Uporabljeni normi: EN 55014-1:2006, EN 55014-2:1998,
EN 61000-3-2:2006 in EN 61800-3-3:2008.
— Eco-design direktiva (2009/125/ES).
ýrpalke:
Uredba Komisije št. 641/2009.
Velja samo za obtoþne þrpalke oznaþene z indeksom energetske
uþinkovitosti EEI. Poglejte napisno plošþico þrpalke.
Uporabljeni normi: EN 16297-1:2012 in EN 16297-2:2012.
— R direktiva (1999/5/ES).
Uporabljeni normi: ETSI EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (2006-10),
ETSI EN 301 489-17 (2009-05) in EN 62209-2:2010.
ES izjava o skladnosti velja samo kadar je izdana kot del Grundfos
instalacije in navodil delovanja (publikacija številka 98091805 0812).
RS: EC deklaracija o usaglašenosti
FI: EY-vaatimustenmukaisuusvakuutus
Mi, Grundfos, izjavljujemo pod vlastitom odgovornošüu da je proizvod
MAGNA3, na koji se ova izjava odnosi, u skladu sa direktivama Saveta
za usklaÿivanje zakona država þlanica EU:
— Direktiva za mašine (2006/42/EC).
Korišüen standard: EN 809:1998.
— Direktiva niskog napona (2006/95/EC).
Korišüeni standardi: EN 60335-2-51:2003
i EN 60950-1:2006/A12:2011.
— EMC direktiva (2004/108/EC).
Korišüeni standardi: EN 55014-1:2006, EN 55014-2:1998,
EN 61000-3-2:2006 i EN 61800-3-3:2008.
— Direktiva o ekološkom projektovanju (2009/125/EC).
Cirkulacione pumpe:
Propis Komisije br. 641/2009.
Odnosi se samo na cirkulacione pumpe oznaþene indeksom
energetske efikasnosti EEI. Pogledajte natpisnu ploþicu pumpe.
Korišüeni standardi: EN 16297-1:2012 i EN 16297-2:2012.
— R&TTE Direktiva (1999/5/EC).
Korišüeni standardi: ETSI EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (2006-10),
ETSI EN 301 489-17 (2009-05) i EN 62209-2:2010.
Ova EC deklaracija o usaglašenosti važeüa je jedino kada je izdata kao
deo Grundfos uputstava za instalaciju i rad (broj izdanja 98091805
0812).
Me, Grundfos, vakuutamme omalla vastuullamme, että tuotteet
MAGNA3, joita tämä vakuutus koskee, ovat EY:n jäsenvaltioiden
lainsäädännön yhdenmukaistamiseen tähtäävien Euroopan neuvoston
direktiivien vaatimusten mukaisia seuraavasti:
— Konedirektiivi (2006/42/EY).
Sovellettu standardi: EN 809:1998.
— Pienjännitedirektiivi (2006/95/EY).
Sovellettavat standardit: EN 60335-2-51:2003 ja
EN 60950-1:2006/A12:2011.
— EMC-direktiivi (2004/108/EY).
Sovellettavat standardit: EN 55014-1:2006, EN 55014-2:1998,
EN 61000-3-2:2006 ja EN 61800-3-3:2008.
— Ekologista suunnittelua koskeva direktiivi (2009/125/EY).
Kiertovesipumput:
Komission asetus (EY) N:o 641/2009.
Koskee vain kiertovesipumppuja, jotka on merkitty
energiatehokkuusindeksillä EEI. Ks. pumpun tyyppikilpi.
Sovellettavat standardit: EN 16297-1:2012 ja EN 16297-2:2012.
— R&TTE-direktiivi (1999/5/EY).
Sovellettavat standardit: ETSI EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (2006-10),
ETSI EN 301 489-17 (2009-05) ja EN 62209-2:2010.
Tämä EY-vaatimustenmukaisuusvakuutus on voimassa vain, kun se
julkaistaan osana Grundfosin asennus- ja käyttöohjeita (julkaisun numero
98091805 0812).
5
Declaration of conformity
SE: EG-försäkran om överensstämmelse
TR: EC uygunluk bildirgesi
Vi, Grundfos, försäkrar under ansvar att produkterna MAGNA3, som
omfattas av denna försäkran, är i överensstämmelse med rådets direktiv
om inbördes närmande till EU-medlemsstaternas lagstiftning, avseende:
— Maskindirektivet (2006/42/EG).
Tillämpad standard: EN 809:1998.
— Lågspänningsdirektivet (2006/95/EG).
Tillämpade standarder: EN 60335-2-51:2003 och
EN 60950-1:2006/A12:2011.
— EMC-direktivet (2004/108/EG).
Tillämpade standarder: EN 55014-1:2006, EN 55014-2:1998,
EN 61000-3-2:2006 och EN 61800-3-3:2008.
— Ekodesigndirektivet (2009/125/EG).
Cirkulationspumpar:
Kommissionens förordning nr 641/2009.
Gäller endast cirkulationspumpar märkta med
energieffektivitetsindex EEI. Se pumpens typskylt.
Tillämpade standarder: EN 16297-1:2012 och EN 16297-2:2012.
— R&TTE Direktiv (1999/5/EG).
Tillämpade standarder: ETSI EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (2006-10),
ETSI EN 301 489-17 (2009-05) och EN 62209-2:2010.
Denna EG-försäkran om överensstämmelse är endast giltig när den
publiceras som en del av Grundfos monterings- och driftsinstruktion
(publikation nummer 98091805 0812).
Grundfos olarak bu beyannameye konu olan MAGNA3 ürünlerinin, AB
Üyesi Ülkelerin kanunlarÕnÕ birbirine yaklaútÕrma üzerine Konsey
Direktifleriyle uyumlu oldu÷unun yalnÕzca bizim sorumlulu÷umuz altÕnda
oldu÷unu beyan ederiz:
— Makineler Yönetmeli÷i (2006/42/EC).
KullanÕlan standart: EN 809:1998.
— Düúük Voltaj Yönetmeli÷i (2006/95/EC).
KullanÕlan standartlar: EN 60335-2-51:2003 ve
EN 60950-1:2006/A12:2011.
— EMC Diretifi (2004/108/EC).
KullanÕlan standartlar: EN 55014-1:2006, EN 55014-2:1998,
EN 61000-3-2:2006 ve EN 61800-3-3:2008.
— Çevreye duyarlÕ tasarÕm (Ecodesign) Yönetmeli÷i (2009/125/EC).
Sirkülasyon pompalarÕ:
641/2009 sayÕlÕ Komisyon Yönetmeli÷i.
YalnÕzca enerji verimlilik endeksi (EEI) ile iúaretlenen sirkülasyon
pompalarÕ için geçerlidir. Pompa üzerindeki bilgi etiketine bakÕn.
KullanÕlan standartlar: EN 16297-1:2012 ve EN 16297-2:2012.
— R&TTE Yönetmeli÷i (1999/5/EC).
KullanÕlan standartlar: ETSI EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (2006-10),
ETSI EN 301 489-17 (2009-05) ve EN 62209-2:2010.
øúbu EC uygunluk bildirgesi, yalnÕzca Grundfos kurulum ve çalÕútÕrma
talimatlarÕnÕn (basÕm numarasÕ 98091805 0812) bir parçasÕ olarak
basÕldÕ÷Õ takdirde geçerlilik kazanmaktadÕr.
• • ••• • •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
JP: EC • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ••• • • ••
• •••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •• • ••• • ••• •• •• ••• ••••• •• •• •• •• •• •• • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••
•
• • • • • • ••• • • • •• • •• • •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • •••••••••• • •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • ••• • •• • • •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • •• • •• • • •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
•
• • • • • ••• • • • •• • •• • •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
•
• • • • • •••••••••• • •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • ••• • •• • • • • •• •• • •• • • • •• •• • •• • • • • •• •• • • • •• • • •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •••••• ••
• ••• ••• ••• ••• •••• • • • • •• ••• ••• ••• •••••••• ••• ••• ••••
• •••••• •• • •••• ••• • • • • ••• • ••• • ••• • ••• •
•
• • • • • • • ••• • • • ••••••••••••••••
• • • •• • •• • • • • • • • •
•
• • • •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • ••• • •• • • • • •• •• • • • ••• • •• • • • • •• •• • • • ••• • •• • • • • •• •• •• • • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• • • • • •• • •• • • • • • • •• • • • ••• • •• • • • • • • •• • • • ••• • •• • • • • • • • • •• • • • •• • • • • • • • •
• •• • •• • • • • •• •• •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • •• • •• • • • • • • • • •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
•
• • • • • • • ••• • • • ••••••••••••••••
• • • •• • •• • • • • • • • •
•
• • • • • • • • • ••••••••••• • •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • •••••••
• • • • • • • • • •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • •• • •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • ••• • •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •• •• •• •• •• •• • • • •• • ••••••••••••••••
•• • • • • • • •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • ••• • •• • • • • •• •• • • • •• •• • •• • • • • •• •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •• •• •• •• •• •• • •• •• • •• •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
•
• • • • • •• • ••• • • • •• •• • •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • •• • •• • • • • • • •• • • • •• • • •• • •• • • • • • • •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • ••• • • ••• • •• • • •• • • •• • •• •• ••• • • • •• • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
•
• • • • • •• • •• • • • • • • • • •••••••••••••••••••••••
• • • ••• • •• • • •• • • •• • ••• • • • •• • ••• •• • •• • • • • •• •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •• •• •• •••• •• •••• •••• •• •••• •• • ••• •• ••••• •••
• •• • •• ••• ••••••• • •• •••
• •• ••• • •• •••• ••• ••• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ••
• ••••••••• •• • • • •• ••• •• • • • ••••••• ••• ••• •••••• •• • •• • •• • • • • • • •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •• • • • • • • • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
••••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
KO: EC • • • •• • • • • • • •
Bjerringbro, 1st February 2012
• •• • • •• • • • • •• • • •• • •• • • •• • •• •• • • •• • • •• • • • • • •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • •• • •• • • •• • • •• • • •• • •• • • •• • • •• • • • •• • • • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
•
• • • •• • •• • • • •• • •• • ••••••••••••••••••••••
• • • •• • ••• • •• • • •• • • • •••••••••••••••••••••
•
• • • •• • •• • • • •• • •• • ••••••••••••••••••••••
Jan Strandgaard
• • • •• • ••• • •• • • • • • • • • • •• • • • •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Technical Director
• • • • • • • • • •• • • • •• • • •• • • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••
Grundfos Holding A/S
•
• • • •• • •• • • • •• • • •• • •••••••••••••••••••••••
Poul Due Jensens Vej 7
• • • •• • ••• • •• • • • • • • •• • • • ••• • •• • • • • • • •• • • • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
8850 Bjerringbro, Denmark
• • • • • • • • • • • •• • • • •• •• • •• • • • • • • • • •• • • • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
•
• • • • • •• • •• • • • •• • • •• • •••••••••••••••••••••••••
Person authorised to compile technical file and
• • •• • •••••••
empowered to sign the EC declaration of conformity.
• • • •• • •• • •• • • •• • • • ••••••••••••••••••••
• • • • • • •• • • •• • • •• • •• • •• • •• • •• • •• •• • •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
••• • • • • • •• • •• • • •• • • • • •• • • • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• • • •• • ••• • •• • • • • • • •• • • • •• •• • •• • • • • • • •• • • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
•
• • • • • •• • ••• • • • •• •• • ••••••••••••••••••••••••
• •• • • • •• • •• • • • ••• • • ••• • •• • • •• • • •• • •• •• ••• • • • • • • •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• • • ••• • •• • • •• • • • • • ••• • • • • • • ••• •• • •• • • • • • • •• • • • ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
• •• • •• • • •• • • • • • •• • •• • • •• • •• • • •• •• • •• • • • •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • •• • • • • •• • • • •• • • • • •••• •• ••• • ••• • • •• ••• • • ••• • • •• ••••••••••••••••••••••••
• • • • • • •
6
Original installation and operating instructions.
Warning
Prior to installation, read these installation and
operating instructions. Installation and operation
must comply with local regulations and accepted
codes of good practice.
CONTENTS
Page
1.
Symbols used in this document
2.
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
General information
Applications
Pumped liquids
Operating conditions
Frost protection
Insulating shells
Non-return valve
Radio communication
Tools
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
10
10
3.
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Mechanical installation
Installing the pump
Positioning
Control box positions
Changing the control box position
11
11
11
11
12
4.
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
Electrical installation
Supply voltage
Connection to the power supply
Connection diagram
Connection to external controllers
Input/output communication
Priority of settings
13
13
13
14
14
14
17
5.
First start-up
18
6.
6.1
6HWWLQJV
Overview of settings
19
19
7.
Menu overview
20
8.
Control panel
21
Warning
9.
Menu structure
21
10.
"+RPH" menu
21
Risk of dropping objects which may cause
personal injury.
7
11.
"6WDWXV" menu
21
12.
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7
12.8
12.9
"6HWWLQJV" menu
6HWSRLQW
2SHUDWLQJPRGH
&RQWUROPRGH
FLOWLIMIT
$XWRPDWLF1LJKW6HWEDFN
5HOD\RXWSXWV
6HWSRLQWLQIOXHQFH
%XVFRPPXQLFDWLRQ
*HQHUDOVHWWLQJV
22
22
22
23
25
25
25
26
26
27
13.
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
13.6
13.7
13.8
"$VVLVW" menu
$VVLVWHGSXPSVHWXS
6HWWLQJRIGDWHDQGWLPH
0XOWLSXPSVHWXS
6HWXSDQDORJLQSXW
'HVFULSWLRQRIFRQWUROPRGH
$VVLVWHGIDXOWDGYLFH
Wireless GENIair
Multi-pump function
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
14.
Selection of control mode
30
15.
15.1
15.2
15.3
Fault finding
Grundfos Eye operating indications
Signalling communication with remote control
Fault finding
31
31
31
32
16. Sensor
16.1 Sensor specifications
17.
17.1
17.2
17.3
17.4
Warning
The use of this product requires experience with
and knowledge of the product.
Persons with reduced physical, sensory or
mental capabilities must not use this product,
unless they are under supervision or have been
instructed in the use of the product by a person
responsible for their safety.
Children must not use or play with this product.
1. Symbols used in this document
Warning
If these safety instructions are not observed,
it may result in personal injury.
Warning
If these instructions are not observed, it may lead
to electric shock with consequent risk of serious
personal injury or death.
Warning
The surface of the product may be so hot that it
may cause burns or personal injury.
Warning
Escaping vapour involves the risk of personal
injury.
&DXWLRQ
If these safety instructions are not observed,
it may result in malfunction or damage to the
equipment.
1RWH
Notes or instructions that make the job easier
and ensure safe operation.
33
33
Accessories
34
Grundfos GO Remote
34
Communication
34
Insulating kits for air-conditioning and cooling systems 35
Fitting the CIM module
36
18.
Technical data
37
19.
Disposal
37
7
English (GB)
English (GB) Installation and operating instructions
2.2.1 Glycol
The pump can be used for pumping water/ethylene glycol
mixtures up to 50 %.
Maximum viscosity: 50 cSt ~ 50 % water/50 % ethylene glycol
mixture at -10 °C.
The pump has a power-limiting function that protects against
overload.
The Grundfos MAGNA3 is a complete range of circulator pumps
with integrated controller enabling adjustment of pump
performance to the actual system requirements. In many
systems, this will reduce the power consumption considerably,
reduce noise from thermostatic radiator valves and similar fittings
and improve the control of the system.
The desired head can be set on the pump control panel.
heating systems
•
domestic hot-water systems
•
air-conditioning and cooling systems.
1RWH
The pump can also be used in the following systems:
•
ground source heat pump systems
•
solar-heating systems.
2.2 Pumped liquids
The pump is suitable for thin, clean, non-aggressive and
non-explosive liquids, not containing solid particles or fibres that
may attack the pump mechanically or chemically.
In heating systems, the water should meet the requirements of
accepted standards on water quality in heating systems, for
example the German standard VDI 2035.
In domestic hot-water systems, we recommend to use MAGNA3
pumps only for water with a degree of hardness lower than
approx. 14 °dH.
In domestic hot-water systems, we recommend to keep the liquid
temperature below +65 °C to eliminate the risk of lime
precipitation.
Warning
Do not use the pump for flammable liquids, such
as diesel oil and petrol.
Warning
Do not use the pump for aggressive liquids, such
as acids and sea water.
Fig. 1
8
Pumped liquids
To prevent the ethylene glycol mixture from degrading, avoid
temperatures exceeding the rated liquid temperature and
minimise the operating time at high temperatures.
To prevent corrosion or lime precipitation, check and maintain the
ethylene glycol mixture regularly. If further dilution of the supplied
ethylene glycol is required, follow the glycol supplier's
instructions.
The Grundfos MAGNA3 is designed for circulating liquids in the
following systems:
•
The pumping of glycol mixtures will affect the max. curve and
reduce the performance, depending on the water/ethylene glycol
mixture and the liquid temperature.
It is important to clean and flush the system before the ethylene
glycol mixture is added.
2.1 Applications
TM05 2857 0612
English (GB)
2. General information
Additives with a density and/or kinematic
viscosity higher than those/that of water will
reduce the hydraulic performance.
Insulating shells are available for single-head pumps only.
1RWH
1
The heat loss from the pump and pipework can be reduced by
insulating the pump housing and the pipework. See figs 3 and 4.
2
Fig. 2
TM05 2858 0612
3
4
Limit the heat loss from the pump housing and
pipework.
•
Insulating shells for pumps in heating systems are supplied
with the pump.
•
Insulating shells for pumps in air-conditioning and cooling
systems (down to -10 °C) are available as accessories and
must be ordered separately. See section 17.3 Insulating kits
for air-conditioning and cooling systems.
The fitting of insulating shells will increase the pump dimensions.
Operating conditions
2.3.1 Liquid temperature
TM05 2859 0612
See fig. 2, pos. 1.
Continuously: -10 °C to +110 °C.
Domestic hot-water systems:
•
Up to +65 °C.
2.3.2 System pressure
See fig. 2, pos. 2.
Fig. 3
Fitting insulating shells to the pump
Fig. 4
Insulation of pump housing and pipework
The maximum permissible system pressure is stated on the pump
nameplate.
2.3.3 Test pressure
The pumps can withstand test pressures as indicated in
EN 60335-2-51. See below.
•
PN 6: 7.2 bar
•
PN 10: 12 bar
•
PN 6/10: 12 bar
•
PN 16: 19.2 bar.
TM05 2889 0612
During normal operation, the pump should not be used at higher
pressures than those stated on the nameplate.
Pumps tested with water containing anti-corrosive additives are
taped on the flanges to prevent residual test water from leaking
into the packaging. Remove the tape before installing the pump.
The pressure test has been made with water containing
anti-corrosive additives at a temperature of +20 °C.
2.3.4 Ambient temperature
See fig. 2, pos. 3.
0 °C to +40 °C.
The control box is air-cooled. Therefore, it is important that the
maximum permissible ambient temperature is not exceeded
during operation.
During transport: -40 °C to +70 °C.
2.3.5 Sound pressure level
See fig. 2, pos. 4.
The sound pressure level of the pump is lower than 43 dB(A).
&DXWLRQ
Do not insulate the control box or cover the
control panel.
2.6 Non-return valve
If a non-return valve is fitted in the pipe system (fig. 5), it must be
ensured that the set minimum discharge pressure of the pump is
always higher than the closing pressure of the valve. This is
especially important in proportional-pressure control mode
(reduced head at low flow). The first non-return valve is included
in the pump setting as the minimum setpoint is 1.5 metres.
2.4 Frost protection
1RWH
If the pump is not used during periods of frost,
necessary steps must be taken to prevent frost
bursts.
Additives with a density and/or kinematic
viscosity higher than those/that of water will
reduce the hydraulic performance.
TM05 3055 0912
&DXWLRQ
Fig. 5
Non-return valve
9
English (GB)
2.5 Insulating shells
2.3 Operating conditions
2.7 Radio communication
Intended use
This product incorporates a radio for remote control.
The product can communicate with the Grundfos Go Remote and
with other MAGNA3 pumps of the same type via the built-in radio.
Only Grundfos-approved external antennae may be connected to
this product, and only by a Grundfos-approved installer.
2.8 Tools
1.2 x 8.0
1
0.6 x 3.5
2
5
Fig. 6
Pos.
10
TX20
5.0
4
3
6
7
Recommended tools
Tool
Size
1
Screwdriver, straight slot
1.2 x 8.0 mm
2
Screwdriver, straight slot
0.6 x 3.5 mm
3
Screwdriver, torx bit
TX20
4
Hexagon key
5.0 mm
5
Open-end spanner
Depending on PN size
6
Side cutter
7
Pipe wrench
Only used for pumps with
unions
TM05 2860 0612
English (GB)
The radio part of this product is a class 1 device and can be used
anywhere in the EU member states without restrictions.
3. Mechanical installation
Always install the pump with horizontal motor shaft.
3.1 Installing the pump
The MAGNA3 is designed for indoor installation.
•
Pump installed correctly in a vertical pipe. See fig. 7, pos. A.
•
Pump installed correctly in a horizontal pipe. See fig. 7, pos. B.
•
Do not install the pump with vertical motor shaft. See fig. 7,
pos. C and D.
A
B
C
D
The pump must be installed in such a way that it is not stressed
by the pipework.
The pump may be suspended direct in the pipes, provided that
the pipework can support the pump.
Twin-head pumps are prepared for installation on a mounting
bracket or base plate.
•
Position the pump in such a way that sufficient cooling is
ensured.
•
The temperature of the ambient air must not exceed +40 °C.
TM05 2866 0712
To ensure adequate cooling of motor and electronics, the
following must be observed:
Warning
Observe local regulations setting limits for
manual lifting or handling.
Fig. 7
Pump installed with horizontal motor shaft
3.3 Control box positions
Mount the pump with gaskets in
the pipework.
4
Fit bolts and nuts. Use the right
size of bolts according to system
pressure.
TM05 2915 0612
3
TM05 2862 0612
2
Close the isolating valves and
make sure that the system is not
pressurised during the
installation of the pump.
TM05 2863 0612
1
Arrows on the pump housing
indicate the liquid flow direction
through the pump. The liquid
flow direction can be horizontal
or vertical, depending on the
control box position.
To ensure adequate cooling, the control box must be in horizontal
position with the Grundfos logo in vertical position. See fig. 8.
Illustration
TM05 2864 0612
Action
TM05 2865 0612
Step
Fig. 8
Pump with control box in horizontal position
11
English (GB)
3.2 Positioning
4d
Twin-head pump.
Note: The gap of the clamp can
also be in position 6 o’clock for
the following pump sizes:
• DN 65
• DN 80
• DN 100.
6
Fit and tighten the screw
holding the clamp to minimum
8 Nm ± 1 Nm.
7
Fit the insulating shells.
Note: Insulating shells for
pumps in air-conditioning and
cooling systems must be
ordered separately.
Warning
When loosening the clamp, do not drop the pump
head.
Warning
Risk of escaping vapour.
12
TM05 2867 0612
Carefully rotate the pump head
to the desired position.
If the pump head is stuck,
loosen it with a light blow of a
rubber mallet.
TM05 2868 0612
3
Position the control box in
horizontal position so that the
Grundfos logo is in vertical
position. The motor shaft must
be horizontal.
4
Due to the drain hole in the
stator housing, position the gap
of the clamp as shown in step
4a, 4b, 4c or 4d.
4a
Single-head pump.
Position the clamp so that the
gap points towards the arrow.
It can be in position 3 or
9 o’clock.
4b
Single-head pump.
Note: The gap of the clamp can
also be in position 6 o’clock for
the following pump sizes:
• DN 65
• DN 80
• DN 100.
TM05 2869 0612
Loosen the screw in the clamp
holding the pump head and
pump housing together.
Warning: If the screw is
loosened too much, the pump
head will be completely
disconnected from the pump
housing.
TM05 2870 0612
2
Illustration
TM05 2918 0612 - TM05 2871 0612
1
Action
TM05 2899 1912
Step
TM05 2917 0612 - TM05 2873 0612
4c
Twin-head pump.
Position the clamps so that the
gaps point towards the arrows.
They can be in position
3 or 9 o’clock.
TM05 2897 1912
The warning symbol on the clamp holding the
pump head and pump housing together indicates
that there is a risk of personal injury. See specific
warnings below.
TM05 2872 0612
English (GB)
Warning
TM05 2874 0412
3.4 Changing the control box position
Connect the cable
gland to the
control box.
5
Pull the power
supply cable
through the cable
gland.
6
Strip the cable
conductors as
illustrated.
7
Connect the cable
conductors to the
power supply plug.
8
Insert the power
supply plug into
the male plug in
the pump control
box.
9
Tighten the cable
gland.
Refit the front
cover.
Carry out the electrical connection and protection according to
local regulations.
Check that the supply voltage and frequency correspond to the
values stated on the nameplate.
Warning
Earthing or neutralisation can be used for
protection against indirect contact.
If the pump is connected to an electric
installation where an earth leakage circuit
breaker (ELCB) is used as an additional
protection, this circuit breaker must trip when
earth fault currents with DC content
(pulsating DC) occur.
The earth leakage circuit breaker must be marked
with this symbol:
•
The pump must be connected to an external mains switch.
•
The pump requires no external motor protection.
•
The motor incorporates thermal protection against slow
overloading and blocking (IEC 34-11: TP 211).
•
When switched on via the power supply, the pump will start
pumping after approx. 5 seconds.
1RWH
The number of starts and stops via the power
supply must not exceed four times per hour.
4.1 Supply voltage
1 x 230 V ± 10 %, 50/60 Hz, PE.
TM05 2879 0612
The pump must be connected to an external
mains switch with a minimum contact gap of
3 mm in all poles.
TM05 2880 0612
Warning
TM05 2878 0612
Switch off the power supply before making
connections.
Remove the front
cover from the
control box.
2
Locate the power
supply plug and
cable gland in the
small paper bag
supplied with the
pump.
TM05 2875 0612
1
Illustration
TM05 2876 0612
Step Action
TM05 2882 0612
4.2 Connection to the power supply
TM05 2881 0612
The voltage tolerances are intended for mains voltage variations.
They should not be used for running pumps at other voltages than
those stated on the nameplate.
13
English (GB)
3
TM05 2877 0612
4. Electrical installation
4.3 Connection diagram
English (GB)
External switch
ELCB
Fig. 9
TM03 2397 0312
Fuse
(min. 10 A, time lag)
Example of typical connection, 1 x 230 V ± 10 %, 50/60 Hz
4.4 Connection to external controllers
3
Max.
250 V AC
2 A AC1
24V
IN
Vcc
Signal
0-10 V DC
Vcc
Signal
4-20 mA
Min.
5 V DC
20 mA
I
2
M
A
M
I S/S
NC NO C
1
Fig. 10 Connection diagram
Warning
Wires connected to supply terminals, outputs
NC, NO, C and start/stop input must be separated
from each other and from the supply by
reinforced insulation.
Concerning demands on signal wires and signal transmitters,
see section 18. Technical data.
Use screened cables for external on/off switch, digital input,
sensor and setpoint signals.
1RWH
All cables used must be heat-resistant up to
+85 °C.
All cables used must be installed in accordance
with EN 60204-1 and EN 50174-2:2000.
4.5 Input/output communication
•
Relay outputs
Alarm, ready and operating indication via signal relay.
•
Digital input
– Start/Stop (S/S)
– Min. curve (MI)
– Max. curve (MA).
•
14
Analog input
0-10 V or 4-20 mA control signal.
To be used for external control of the pump or as sensor input
for the control of the external setpoint.
The 24 V supply from pump to sensor is optional and is
normally used when an external supply is not available.
TM05 2901 1912 - TM05 3343 1212
Max.
24 V DC
22 mA
4.5.2 Digital inputs
See fig. 10, pos. 1.
See fig. 10, pos. 2.
The pump incorporates two signal relays with a potential-free
changeover contact for external fault indication.
The digital input can be used for external control of start/stop or
forced max. or min. curve.
The function of the signal relay can be set to "$ODUP", "5HDG\" or
"2SHUDWLRQ" on the pump control panel or with the Grundfos GO
Remote.
If no external on/off switch is connected, the jumper between
terminals Start/Stop (S/S) and frame ( ) should be maintain ed.
This connection is the factory setting.
The relays can be used for outputs up to 250 V and 2 A.
NC NO
C
M
A
Relay 2
NC NO
M
I S/S
C
TM05 3338 1212
Relay 1
2SHUDWLRQ
$ODUP
Leakage protection
Fig. 11 Relay output
Contact symbol
Function
NC
Normally closed
NO
Normally open
C
Common
TM05 3339 1212
Start/stop
Fig. 12 Digital input
The functions of the signal relays appear from the table below:
Signal relay
1
2
3
1NC NO
2 C3
NC NO C
1 2 3
NC NO C
Signal relay
1
2
3
1NC NO
2 C3
NC NO C
1 2 3
NC NO C
Signal relay
1 2
3
NC NO C
1 2 3
NC NO C
1 2 3
NC NO C
Alarm signal
Not activated:
• The power supply has been switched off.
• The pump has not registered a fault.
Activated:
• The pump has registered a fault.
Contact symbol
Function
M
A
Max. curve
100 % speed
M
I
Min. curve
25 % speed
S/S
Start/Stop
Frame connection
Ready signal
Not activated:
• The pump has registered a fault and is
unable to run.
Activated:
• The pump has been set to stop, but is ready
to run.
• The pump is running.
External start/stop
The pump can be started or stopped via the digital input.
Start/stop
S/S
H
Q
Operating signal
Not activated:
• The pump is not running.
S/S
Normal duty
Note: Factory setting with
jumper between S/S and .
H
Stop
Q
Activated:
• The pump is running.
15
English (GB)
4.5.1 Relay outputs
External forced max. or min. curve
24V
Max. curve
M
A
Vcc
H
IN
Signal
Normal duty
Q
M
A
H
Max. curve
TM05 2947 1212
Q
Min. curve
M
I
H
Normal duty
Fig. 15 Examples of external sensors
Q
M
I
H
Min. curve
BMS
Q
PLC
Select the function of the digital input on the pump control panel
or with the Grundfos GO Remote.
24V
4.5.3 Analog input
See fig. 10, pos. 3.
TM05 2888 0612
The analog input can be used for the connection of an external
sensor for measuring temperature, pressure, flow or other
parameter. See fig. 15.
It is possible to use sensor types with 0-10 V or 4-20 mA signal.
The analog input can also be used for an external signal for the
control from a BMS system or similar control system. See fig. 16.
•
When the input is used for the heat energy meter, a
temperature sensor must be installed in the return pipe.
•
If the pump is installed in the return pipe of the system, the
sensor must be installed in the flow pipe.
•
If the constant-temperature control mode has been enabled
and the pump is installed in the flow pipe of the system, the
sensor must be installed in the return pipe.
•
If the pump is installed in the return pipe of the system, the
built-in temperature sensor can be used.
The selection of sensor type (0-10 V or 4-20 mA) can be changed
on the pump control panel or with the Grundfos GO Remote.
Vcc
Vcc
signal
signal
sensor
sensor
TM05 3221 0612
ININ
24V
24V
Fig. 13 Analog input for external sensor, 0-10 V
IN
24V
I
Vcc
signal
sensor
Fig. 14 Analog input for external sensor, 4-20 mA
16
TM05 2948 0612
English (GB)
The pump can be forced to operate on the max. or min. curve via
the digital input.
Fig. 16 Examples of external signal for the control via
BMS/PLC
English (GB)
4.6 Priority of settings
The external forced-control signals will influence the settings
available on the pump control panel or with the Grundfos GO
Remote. However, the pump can always be set to max. curve
duty or to stop on the pump control panel or with the
Grundfos GO Remote.
If two or more functions are enabled at the same time, the pump
will operate according to the setting with the highest priority.
The priority of the settings is as shown in the table below.
Example: If the pump has been forced to stop via an external
signal, the pump control panel or the Grundfos GO Remote can
only set the pump to max. curve.
Possible settings
Priority
Pump control
panel or
Grundfos GO
Remote
1
Stop
2
Max. curve
3
External
signals
Bus signal
Stop
4
Stop
5
Max. curve
6
Min. curve
7
Start
8
9
Max. curve
Min. curve
10
11
Min. curve
Start
As illustrated in the table, the pump does not react to external
signals (max. curve and min. curve) when it is controlled via bus.
For further details, please contact Grundfos.
17
Do not start the pump until the system has been filled with liquid
and vented. Furthermore, the required minimum inlet pressure
must be available at the pump inlet. See section 18. Technical
data.
The system cannot be vented through the pump. The pump is
self-venting.
1
Switch on the power supply to the pump.
Note: When switched on, the pump will start in
AUTOADAPT after approx. 5 seconds.
2
Pump display at first start-up.
After a few seconds, the pump display will change to the
start-up guide.
Illustration
TM05 2884 0612
Action
TM05 2885 0612
Step
3
4
18
If the buttons on the pump control panel are not touched
for 15 minutes, the display will go into sleep mode. When
a button is touched, the "+RPH" display will appear.
When the general settings have been made, select the
desired control mode or let the pump run in AUTOADAPT.
For additional settings, see section 6. 6HWWLQJV.
TM05 2886 0612
The start-up guide will guide you through the general
settings of the pump, such as language, date and time.
TM05 2887 0612
English (GB)
5. First start-up
English (GB)
6. 6HWWLQJV
6.1 Overview of settings
All settings can be made on the pump control panel or with the Grundfos GO Remote.
Menu
Submenu
Further information
6HWSRLQW
See section 12.1 6HWSRLQW.
2SHUDWLQJPRGH
See section 12.2 2SHUDWLQJPRGH.
• 1RUPDO
• 6WRS
• 0LQ
• 0D[
See section 12.3 &RQWUROPRGH.
&RQWUROPRGH
• AUTOADAPT
See section 12.3.1 AUTOADAPT.
• FLOWADAPT
See section 12.3.2 FLOWADAPT.
• 3URSSUHVV
See section 12.3.3 Proportional pressure.
• &RQVWSUHVV
See section 12.3.4 Constant pressure.
• &RQVWWHPS
See section 12.3.5 Constant temperature.
• &RQVWDQWFXUYH
See section 12.3.6 Constant curve.
See section 12.4 FLOWLIMIT.
FLOWLIMIT
• 6HW)/2:/,0,7
See section 12.5 $XWRPDWLF1LJKW6HWEDFN.
$XWRPDWLF1LJKW6HWEDFN
• 1RWDFWLYH
• $FWLYH
See section 12.6 5HOD\RXWSXWV.
5HOD\RXWSXWV
• 5HOD\RXWSXW
• 5HOD\RXWSXW
See section 12.7 6HWSRLQWLQIOXHQFH.
6HWSRLQWLQIOXHQFH
• ([WHUQDOVHWSRLQWIXQFWLRQ
See section 12.7.1 ([WHUQDOVHWSRLQWIXQFWLRQ .
• 7HPSHUDWXUHLQIOXHQFH
See section 12.7.2 7HPSHUDWXUHLQIOXHQFH.
See section 12.8 %XVFRPPXQLFDWLRQ.
%XVFRPPXQLFDWLRQ
• 3XPSQXPEHU
See section 12.8.1 3XPSQXPEHU.
See section 12.9 *HQHUDOVHWWLQJV.
*HQHUDOVHWWLQJV
• /DQJXDJH
See section 12.9.1 /DQJXDJH.
• 6HWGDWHDQGWLPH
See section 12.9.2 6HWGDWHDQGWLPH.
• 8QLWV
See section 12.9.3 8QLWV.
• (QDEOHGLVDEOHVHWWLQJV
See section 12.9.4 (QDEOHGLVDEOHVHWWLQJV.
• 'HOHWHKLVWRU\
See section 12.9.5 'HOHWHKLVWRU\.
• 'HILQH+RPHGLVSOD\
See section 12.9.6 'HILQH+RPHGLVSOD\.
• 'LVSOD\EULJKWQHVV
See section 12.9.7 'LVSOD\EULJKWQHVV .
• 5HWXUQWRIDFWRU\VHWWLQJV
See section 12.9.8 5HWXUQWRIDFWRU\VHWWLQJV.
• 5XQVWDUWXSJXLGH
See section 12.9.9 5XQVWDUWXSJXLGH.
19
English (GB)
7. Menu overview
6WDWXV
6HWWLQJV
$VVLVW
2SHUDWLQJVWDWXV
6HWSRLQW
$VVLVWHGSXPSVHWXS
2SHUDWLQJPRGHIURP
2SHUDWLQJPRGH
&RQWUROPRGH
&RQWUROPRGH
3XPSSHUIRUPDQFH
6HWWLQJRISXPS
6HWWLQJRIGDWHDQGWLPH
'DWHIRUPDWGDWHDQGWLPH
FLOWLIMIT
0D[FXUYHDQGGXW\SRLQW
(QDEOH)/2:/,0,7IXQFWLRQ
'DWHRQO\
5HVXOWLQJVHWSRLQW
6HW)/2:/,0,7
7LPHRQO\
/LTXLGWHPSHUDWXUH
$XWRPDWLF1LJKW6HWEDFN
6SHHG
5HOD\RXWSXWV
2SHUDWLQJKRXUV
3RZHUDQGHQHUJ\FRQVXPSWLRQ
6HWXSDQDORJLQSXW
5HOD\RXWSXW
5HOD\RXWSXW
'HVFULSWLRQRIFRQWUROPRGH
AUTOADAPT
3RZHUFRQVXPSWLRQ
1RWDFWLYH
FLOWADAPT
(QHUJ\FRQVXPSWLRQ
5HDG\
3URSSUHVV
$ODUP
&RQVWSUHVV
:DUQLQJDQGDODUP
$FWXDOZDUQLQJRUDODUP
:DUQLQJORJ
:DUQLQJORJ 1 to 5
$ODUPORJ
$ODUPORJ 1 to 5
+HDWHQHUJ\PHWHU
+HDWSRZHU
2SHUDWLRQ
6HWSRLQWLQIOXHQFH
&RQVWWHPS
&RQVWDQWFXUYH
([WHUQDOVHWSRLQWIXQFWLRQ
7HPSHUDWXUHLQIOXHQFH
%XVFRPPXQLFDWLRQ
3XPSQXPEHU
*HQHUDOVHWWLQJV
$VVLVWHGIDXOWDGYLFH
%ORFNHGSXPS
3XPSFRPPXQLFDWLRQIDXOW
,QWHUQDOIDXOW
,QWHUQDOVHQVRUIDXOW
+HDWHQHUJ\
/DQJXDJH
'U\UXQQLQJ
)ORZUDWH
6HWGDWHDQGWLPH
)RUFHGSXPSLQJ
9ROXPH
6HOHFWGDWHIRUPDW
8QGHUYROWDJH
+RXUVFRXQWHU
6HWGDWH
2YHUYROWDJH
7HPSHUDWXUH
6HOHFWWLPHIRUPDW
([WHUQDOVHQVRUIDXOW
7HPSHUDWXUH
6HWWLPH
'LIIHUHQWLDOWHPS
:RUNORJ
8QLWV
6,RU86XQLWV
2SHUDWLQJKRXUV
7UHQGGDWD
&XVWRPLVHGXQLWV
3UHVVXUH
'XW\SRLQWRYHUWLPH
'LIIHUHQWLDOSUHVVXUH
'VKRZLQJ 4+W
+HDG
'VKRZLQJ 47W
/HYHO
'VKRZLQJ 43W
)ORZUDWH
'VKRZLQJ 73W
9ROXPH
)LWWHGPRGXOHV
7HPSHUDWXUH
'DWHDQGWLPH
'LIIHUHQWLDOWHPS
'DWH
3RZHU
7LPH
(QHUJ\
3XPSLGHQWLILFDWLRQ
(QDEOHGLVDEOHVHWWLQJV
0XOWLSXPSV\VWHP
'HOHWHKLVWRU\
2SHUDWLQJVWDWXV
2SHUDWLQJPRGHIURP
&RQWUROPRGH
6\VWHPSHUIRUPDQFH
'XW\SRLQW
5HVXOWLQJVHWSRLQW
6\VWHPLGHQWLILFDWLRQ
3RZHUDQGHQHUJ\FRQVXPSWLRQ
'HOHWHZRUNORJ
'HOHWHKHDWHQHUJ\GDWD
'HOHWHHQHUJ\FRQVXPSWLRQ
'HILQH+RPHGLVSOD\
6HOHFW+RPHGLVSOD\W\SH
/LVWRIGDWD
*UDSKLFDOLOOXVWUDWLRQ
'HILQH+RPHGLVSOD\FRQWHQWV
3RZHUFRQVXPSWLRQ
/LVWRIGDWD
(QHUJ\FRQVXPSWLRQ
*UDSKLFDOLOOXVWUDWLRQ
2WKHUSXPSPXOWLSXPSV\V
'LVSOD\EULJKWQHVV
%ULJKWQHVV
5HWXUQWRIDFWRU\VHWWLQJV
5XQVWDUWXSJXLGH
20
0XOWLSXPSVHWXS
10. "+RPH" menu
English (GB)
8. Control panel
Warning
+RPH
At high liquid temperatures, the pump housing
may be so hot that only the control panel should
be touched to avoid burns.
Navigation
+RPH
Press
to go to the "+RPH" menu.
TM05 3820 1612
"+RPH" menu (factory setting)
•
Shortcut to control mode settings
•
Shortcut to setpoint settings
•
)ORZUDWH
•
+HDG.
Navigate in the display with
shortcuts with
or .
or
and change between the two
The "+RPH" display can be defined by the user.
See section 12.9.6 'HILQH+RPHGLVSOD\.
11. "6WDWXV" menu
Fig. 17 Control panel
Button
Function
Goes to the "+RPH" menu.
Returns to the previous action.
2.1.0.0.0.0 6WDWXV
Navigates between main menus, displays and
digits.
When the menu is changed, the display will always
show the top display of the new menu.
Navigates between submenus.
Saves changed values, resets alarms and expands
the value field.
Navigation
+RPH > 6WDWXV
9. Menu structure
Press
The pump incorporates a start-up guide which is started at the
first start-up. After the start-up guide, the four main menus will
appear in the display. See section 5. First start-up.
"6WDWXV" menu
•
2SHUDWLQJVWDWXV
1. +RPH
•
3XPSSHUIRUPDQFH
This menu shows up to four user-defined parameters with
shortcuts or a graphical illustration of a Q/H performance curve.
See section 10. "+RPH" menu.
•
3RZHUDQGHQHUJ\FRQVXPSWLRQ
•
:DUQLQJDQGDODUP
2. 6WDWXV
•
+HDWHQHUJ\PHWHU
•
:RUNORJ
•
)LWWHGPRGXOHV
•
'DWHDQGWLPH
•
3XPSLGHQWLILFDWLRQ
•
0XOWLSXPSV\VWHP.
This menu shows the status of the pump and system as well as
warnings and alarms. See section 11. "6WDWXV" menu.
1RWH
No settings can be made in this menu.
3. 6HWWLQJV
This menu gives access to all setting parameters. A detailed
setting of the pump can be made in this menu.
See section 12. "6HWWLQJV" menu.
and go to the "6WDWXV" menu with
.
This menu offers the following status information:
Navigate between submenus with
or
.
4. $VVLVW
This menu enables assisted pump setup, provides a short
description of the control modes and offers fault advice.
See section 13. "$VVLVW" menu.
21
3.1.0.0.0.0 6HWWLQJV
Navigation
Navigation
+RPH > 6HWWLQJV > 2SHUDWLQJPRGH
+RPH > 6HWWLQJV
and go to the "6HWWLQJV" menu with
2SHUDWLQJPRGH
.
"6HWWLQJV" menu
•
1RUPDO (control mode)
This menu offers the following setting options:
•
6WRS
•
6HWSRLQW
•
0LQ (min. curve)
•
2SHUDWLQJPRGH
•
0D[ (max. curve).
•
&RQWUROPRGH
Setting:
•
FLOWLIMIT
1. Select operating mode with
•
$XWRPDWLF1LJKW6HWEDFN
2. Press [OK] to save.
•
5HOD\RXWSXWV
•
6HWSRLQWLQIOXHQFH
The pump can be set to operate according to the max. or min.
curve, like an uncontrolled pump. See fig. 18.
•
%XVFRPPXQLFDWLRQ
•
*HQHUDOVHWWLQJV.
or
.
H
Navigate between submenus with
or
.
12.1 6HWSRLQW
0D[
0LQ
Navigation
Q
Fig. 18 Max. and min. curves
•
1RUPDO: The pump runs according to the selected control
mode.
•
6WRS: The pump stops.
•
0LQ: The min. curve mode can be used in periods in which a
minimum flow is required.
This operating mode is for instance suitable for manual night
setback if Automatic Night Setback is not desired.
•
0D[: The max. curve mode can be used in periods in which a
maximum flow is required.
This operating mode is for instance suitable for hot-water
priority.
+RPH > 6HWWLQJV > 6HWSRLQW
6HWSRLQW
Set the setpoint so that it matches the system.
Setting:
1. Press [OK] to start the setting.
2. Select digit with
and
and adjust with
or
.
3. Press [OK] to save.
A too high setting may result in noise in the system whereas a too
low setting may result in insufficient heating or cooling in the
system.
Control mode
Proportional pressure
Constant pressure
Constant temperature
Constant curve
22
Measuring unit
m, ft
m, ft
°C, °F, K
%
TM05 2446 5111
Press
3.1.1.0.0.0 6HWSRLQW
English (GB)
3.1.2.0.0.0 2SHUDWLQJPRGH
12.2 2SHUDWLQJPRGH
12. "6HWWLQJV" menu
3.1.3.0.0.0 &RQWUROPRGH
A 1:
Navigation
+RPH > 6HWWLQJV > &RQWUROPRGH
Lower registered head on the max. curve.
A 3:
New duty point after AUTOADAPT control.
Hset1:
Original setpoint setting.
Hset2:
New setpoint after AUTOADAPT control.
Hfac.:
MAGNA3
MAGNA3
MAGNA3
MAGNA3
MAGNA3
MAGNA3
MAGNA3
Hauto_min:
A fixed value of 1.5 m.
xx-40: 2.5 m
xx-60: 3.5 m
xx-80: 4.5 m
xx-100: 5.5 m
xx-120: 6.5 m
xx-150: 8.0 m
xx-180: 9.5 m.
The AUTOADAPT control mode is a form of proportional-pressure
control where the control curves have a fixed origin, Hauto_min.
&RQWUROPRGH
•
AUTOADAPT
•
FLOWADAPT
•
3URSSUHVV (proportional pressure)
•
&RQVWSUHVV (constant pressure)
•
&RQVWWHPS(constant temperature)
•
&RQVWDQWFXUYH.
The AUTOADAPT control mode has been developed specifically
for heating systems and is not recommended for air-conditioning
and cooling systems.
To reset AUTOADAPT, see section 12.9.8 5HWXUQWRIDFWRU\
VHWWLQJV.
12.3.2 FLOWADAPT
When FLOWADAPT is selected, the pump will run AUTOADAPT and
ensure that the flow never exceeds the entered FLOW LIMIT value.
The operating mode must be set to "1RUPDO"
before a control mode can be enabled.
The setting range for the FLOWLIMIT is 25 to 90 % of the Qmax of
the pump.
Setting:
1. Select control mode with
or
.
The factory setting of the FLOWLIMIT is the flow where the
AUTOADAPT factory setting meets the max. curve. See fig. 20.
2. Press [OK] to enable.
The setpoint for all control modes, except AUTOADAPT and
FLOWADAPT, can be changed in the "6HWSRLQW" submenu under
"6HWWLQJV" when the desired control mode has been selected.
H
All control modes, except "&RQVWDQWFXUYH", can be combined with
Automatic Night Setback. See section 12.5 $XWRPDWLF1LJKW
6HWEDFN.
The FLOWLIMIT function can also be combined with the last four
control modes mentioned above. See section 12.4 FLOWLIMIT.
25 %
90 % Q max
Setting range
H fac
H auto_min
12.3.1 AUTOADAPT
The AUTOADAPT control mode continuously adapts the pump
performance according to the actual system characteristic.
1RWH
Q fac
Manual setting of the setpoint is not possible.
Q
TM05 3334 1212
1RWH
Original duty point.
A 2:
English (GB)
12.3 &RQWUROPRGH
Fig. 20 FLOWADAPT
H
12.3.3 Proportional pressure
The pump head is reduced at decreasing water demand and
increased at rising water demand. See fig. 21.
H set1
The setpoint can be set within the range from 1 metre to approx.
1 metre below the maximum head, depending on pump type.
H auto_min
A3
A2
H set2
Q
TM05 2452 1312
A1
Fig. 19 AUTOADAPT
When the AUTOADAPT control mode has been enabled, the pump
will start with the factory setting, Hfac = Hset1, corresponding to
approx. 55 % of its maximum head, and then adjust its
performance to A1. See fig. 19.
When the pump registers a lower head on the max. curve, A2, the
AUTOADAPT function will automatically select a correspondingly
lower control curve, Hset2. If the valves in the system close, the
pump will adjust its performance to A3.
H
Hset
Hset
2
Q
TM05 2448 1212
H fac
Fig. 21 Proportional pressure
23
12.3.6 Constant curve
The pump maintains a constant pressure, irrespective of water
demand. See fig. 22.
The pump can be set to operate according to a constant curve,
like an uncontrolled pump. See fig. 24.
The desired speed can be set in % of maximum speed in the
range from 25 to 100 %.
H
Fig. 22 Constant pressure
Q
12.3.5 Constant temperature
Fig. 24 Constant curve
This control mode ensures a constant temperature. Constant
temperature is a comfort control mode that can be used in
domestic hot-water systems to control the flow to maintain a fixed
temperature in the system. See fig. 23. When this control mode is
used, no balancing valves must be installed in the system.
If the pump is installed in the flow pipe, an external temperature
sensor must be installed in the return pipe of the system. The
sensor must be installed as close as possible to the consumer
(radiator, heat exchanger, etc.).
1RWH
Depending on the system characteristic and the
duty point, the 100 % setting may be slightly
smaller than the pump’s actual max. curve even
though the display shows 100 %. This is due to
power and pressure limitations built into the
pump. The deviation varies according to pump
type and pressure loss in the pipes.
H [%]
We recommend to install the pump in the flow
pipe.
If the pump is installed in the return pipe of the system, the
internal temperature sensor can be used. In this case, the pump
must be installed as close as possible to the consumer (radiator,
heat exchanger, etc.).
The constant-temperature control mode also reduces the risk of
bacterial growth (for example Legionella) in the system.
100 %
Limited
max. curve
Max. curve
Actual duty point
It is possible to set the sensor range:
•
min. -10 °C
•
max. +130 °C.
1RWH
Q [m3/h]
To ensure that the pump is able to control, we
recommend to set the sensor range between
-5 and +125 °C.
Fig. 25 Power and pressure limitations influencing the max.
curve
H
Q
Fig. 23 Constant temperature
24
TM05 3041 1212
1RWH
TM05 2446 0312
Q
TM05 2449 0312
H
TM05 2451 5111
English (GB)
12.3.4 Constant pressure
3.1.5.0.0.0 FLOWLIMIT
Navigation
Navigation
+RPH > 6HWWLQJV > FLOWLIMIT
+RPH > 6HWWLQJV > $XWRPDWLF1LJKW6HWEDFN
FLOWLIMIT
$XWRPDWLF1LJKW6HWEDFN
•
(QDEOH)/2:/,0,7IXQFWLRQ
•
6HW)/2:/,0,7.
To enable the function, select "$FWLYH" with
[OK].
Setting:
1. To enable the function, select "$FWLYH" with
[OK].
or
and press
and
and adjust with
or
.
90 % Q max
25 %
Once Automatic Night Setback has been enabled, the pump
automatically changes between normal duty and night setback
(duty at low performance).
The pump automatically changes over to night setback when the
built-in sensor registers a flow-pipe temperature drop of more
than 10 to 15 °C within approx. two hours. The temperature drop
must be at least 0.1 °C/min.
4. Press [OK] to save.
H
Changeover to normal duty takes place without a time lag when
the temperature has increased by approx. 10 °C.
Setting range
Q max
Q
TM05 2445 1212
1RWH
Q set
and press
Changeover between normal duty and night setback depends on
the flow-pipe temperature.
2. To set the FLOWLIMIT, press [OK] to start the setting.
3. Select digit with
or
Automatic Night Setback cannot be enabled
when the pump is in constant-curve mode.
12.6 5HOD\RXWSXWV
3.1.12.0.0.0 5HOD\RXWSXWV
Fig. 26 FLOWLIMIT
The FLOWLIMIT function can be combined with the following
control modes:
•
3URSSUHVV
•
&RQVWSUHVV
•
&RQVWWHPS
•
&RQVWDQWFXUYH.
A flow-limiting function ensures that the flow never exceeds the
entered FLOWLIMIT value.
The setting range for FLOWLIMIT is 25 to 90 % of the Qmax of the
pump.
The factory setting of the FLOWLIMIT is the flow where the
AUTOADAPT factory setting meets the max. curve. See fig. 20.
Navigation
+RPH > 6HWWLQJV > 5HOD\RXWSXWV
5HOD\RXWSXWV
•
5HOD\RXWSXW
•
5HOD\RXWSXW.
The relay outputs can be set to the following:
•
1RWDFWLYH
•
5HDG\
•
$ODUP
•
2SHUDWLRQ.
The pump incorporates two signal relays, terminals 1, 2 and 3, for
a potential-free alarm signal, ready signal and operating signal.
For further information, see section 4.5.1 Relay outputs.
Set the function of the signal relays, alarm signal (factory setting),
ready signal and operating signal, on the pump control panel.
The output, terminals 1, 2 and 3, is electrically separated from the
rest of the controller.
The signal relay is operated as follows:
•
1RWDFWLYH
The signal relay is deactivated.
•
5HDG\
The signal relay is active when the pump is running or has
been set to stop, but is ready to run.
25
English (GB)
3.1.6.0.0.0 $XWRPDWLF1LJKW6HWEDFN
12.5 $XWRPDWLF1LJKW6HWEDFN
12.4 FLOWLIMIT
$ODUP
The signal relay is activated together with the red indicator
light on the pump.
•
2SHUDWLRQ
The signal relay is activated together with the green indicator
light on the pump.
H
H
100 %
3.1.15.0.0.0 6HWSRLQWLQIOXHQFH
30 %
Navigation
+RPH > 6HWWLQJV > 6HWSRLQWLQIOXHQFH
6HWSRLQWLQIOXHQFH
20
50
Tactual
80 T [°C]
Q
Fig. 28 7HPSHUDWXUHLQIOXHQFH
In the above example, Tmax. = 80 °C has been selected.
The actual liquid temperature Tactual causes the setpoint for head
to be reduced from 100 % to Hactual.
The temperature influence function requires the following:
•
Proportional-pressure, constant-pressure or constant-curve
control mode.
•
Pump installed in flow pipe.
•
([WHUQDOVHWSRLQWIXQFWLRQ
•
System with flow-pipe temperature control.
•
7HPSHUDWXUHLQIOXHQFH.
Temperature influence is suitable for the following systems:
12.7.1 ([WHUQDOVHWSRLQWIXQFWLRQ
•
Systems with variable flows (for example two-pipe heating
systems) in which the enabling of the temperature influence
function will ensure a further reduction of the pump
performance in periods with small heating demands and
consequently a reduced flow-pipe temperature.
•
Systems with almost constant flows (for example one-pipe
heating systems and underfloor heating systems), in which
variable heating demands cannot be registered as changes in
the head as is the case with two-pipe heating systems. In such
systems, the pump performance can only be adjusted by
enabling the temperature influence function.
Range
4-20 mA
[0-100 %]
0-10 V
[0-100 %]
Control
0-20 %
(e.g. 0-2 V)
Setpoint = Min.
20-100 %
(e.g. 2-10 V)
Setpoint = Min. ർ setpoint
The external setpoint function is an external 0-10 V or 4-20 mA
signal that will control the pump speed in a range from 0 to 100 %
in a linear function. See fig. 27.
See section 4.5.3 Analog input.
Selection of Tmax.
In systems with a dimensioned flow-pipe temperature of:
•
up to and including 55 °C, select Tmax. = 50 °C
•
above 55 °C, select Tmax. = 80 °C.
1RWH
The temperature influence function cannot be
used in air-conditioning and cooling systems.
rpm
12.8 %XVFRPPXQLFDWLRQ
Max.
12.8.1 3XPSQXPEHU
Min.
0
2
10
V
3.1.18.1.0.0 3XPSQXPEHU
1RWH
Before the "([WHUQDOVHWSRLQWIXQFWLRQ" can be
enabled, the analog input must be set to
"([WHUQDOVHWSRLQWLQIOXHQFH " via the "$VVLVW" menu.
Fig. 27 ([WHUQDOVHWSRLQWIXQFWLRQ, 0-10 V
12.7.2 7HPSHUDWXUHLQIOXHQFH
When this function is enabled in proportional- or
constant-pressure control mode, the setpoint for head will be
reduced according to the liquid temperature.
Navigation
Temperature influence can be set to function at liquid
temperatures below 80 °C or 50 °C. These temperature limits are
called Tmax.. The setpoint is reduced in relation to the head set
(= 100 %) according to the characteristics below.
A unique number can be allocated to the pump. This makes it
possible to distinguish between pumps in connection with bus
communication.
26
TM05 3022 1212
Hactual
12.7 6HWSRLQWLQIOXHQFH
TM05 3219 1212
English (GB)
•
+RPH > 6HWWLQJV > %XVFRPPXQLFDWLRQ > 3XPSQXPEHU
3XPSQXPEHU
12.9 *HQHUDOVHWWLQJV
English (GB)
12.9.3 8QLWV
3.1.19.3.0.0 8QLWV
3.1.19.1.0.0 /DQJXDJH
12.9.1 /DQJXDJH
Navigation
Navigation
+RPH > 6HWWLQJV > *HQHUDOVHWWLQJV > 8QLWV
+RPH > 6HWWLQJV > *HQHUDOVHWWLQJV > /DQJXDJH
8QLWV
/DQJXDJH
•
6,RU86XQLWV
•
&XVWRPLVHGXQLWV.
The display can be shown in any of the following languages:
GB, BG, CZ, DK, DE, EE, GR, ES, FR, HR, IT, LV, LT, HU, NL,
UA, PL, PT, RU, RO, SK, SI, RS, FI, SE, TR, CN, JP or KO.
Select whether the display should shows SI or US units or select
the desired units for the parameters below.
Measuring units are automatically changed according to selected
language.
•
3UHVVXUH
•
'LIIHUHQWLDOSUHVVXUH
Setting:
•
+HDG
1. Select language with
•
/HYHO
2. Press [OK] to enable.
•
)ORZUDWH
12.9.2 6HWGDWHDQGWLPH
•
9ROXPH
•
7HPSHUDWXUH
•
'LIIHUHQWLDOWHPS
•
3RZHU
•
(QHUJ\.
.
3.1.19.2.0.0 6HWGDWHDQGWLPH
and
Setting:
1. Select parameter and press [OK].
2. Select unit with
or
.
3. Press [OK] to enable.
If "6,RU86XQLWV" is selected, the customised units will be reset.
12.9.4 (QDEOHGLVDEOHVHWWLQJV
Navigation
3.1.19.4.0.0 (QDEOHGLVDEOHVHWWLQJV
+RPH > 6HWWLQJV > *HQHUDOVHWWLQJV > 6HWGDWHDQGWLPH
6HWGDWHDQGWLPH
•
6HOHFWGDWHIRUPDW
•
6HWGDWH
•
6HOHFWWLPHIRUPDW
•
6HWWLPH.
Set the real-time clock in this menu.
6HOHFWGDWHIRUPDW
•
<<<<00''
•
''00<<<<
•
00''<<<<.
Navigation
+RPH > 6HWWLQJV > *HQHUDOVHWWLQJV > (QDEOHGLVDEOHVHWWLQJV
(QDEOHGLVDEOHVHWWLQJV
Setting:
In this display, the possibility of making settings can be disabled
for protective reasons.
1. Select "6HWGDWH".
2. Press [OK] to start the setting.
3. Select digit with
and
and adjust with
or
.
4. Press [OK] to save.
6HOHFWWLPHIRUPDW
Select "'LVDEOH" with
or
and press [OK].
The pump will now be locked for settings. Only the "+RPH"
display will be available.
To unlock the pump and allow settings, press
simultaneously for at least 5 seconds.
•
++00KRXUFORFN
•
++00DPSPKRXUFORFN.
and
Setting:
1. Select "6HWWLPH".
2. Press [OK] to start the setting.
3. Select digit with
and
and adjust with
or
.
4. Press [OK] to save.
27
12.9.5 'HOHWHKLVWRU\
'HILQH+RPHGLVSOD\FRQWHQWV
3.1.19.5.0.0 'HOHWHKLVWRU\
English (GB)
The selected parameters will be shown as illustrated below.
The arrow icon indicates that the parameter links to the "6HWWLQJV"
menu and works as a shortcut for quick settings.
Navigation
+RPH > 6HWWLQJV > *HQHUDOVHWWLQJV > 'HOHWHKLVWRU\
1. To set "*UDSKLFDOLOOXVWUDWLRQ", press [OK] to start the setting.
'HOHWHKLVWRU\
2. Select the desired curve and press [OK] to save.
•
'HOHWHZRUNORJ
•
'HOHWHKHDWHQHUJ\GDWD
•
'HOHWHHQHUJ\FRQVXPSWLRQ.
12.9.7 'LVSOD\EULJKWQHVV
It is possible to delete data from the pump, for example if the
pump is moved to another system or if new data are required due
to changes to the system.
3.1.19.7.1.0 %ULJKWQHVV
Setting:
1. Select the relevant submenu and press [OK].
2. Select "<HV" with
cancel.
or
and press [OK] or press
to
12.9.6 'HILQH+RPHGLVSOD\
+RPH > 6HWWLQJV > *HQHUDOVHWWLQJV > 'LVSOD\EULJKWQHVV
%ULJKWQHVV
1. Press [OK] to start the setting.
2. Set brightness with
+RPH > 6HWWLQJV > *HQHUDOVHWWLQJV > 'HILQH+RPHGLVSOD\
'HILQH+RPHGLVSOD\
6HOHFW+RPHGLVSOD\W\SH
•
'HILQH+RPHGLVSOD\FRQWHQWV.
The "+RPH" display can be set to show up to four user-defined
parameters or a graphical illustration of a performance curve.
6HOHFW+RPHGLVSOD\W\SH
1. Select "/LVWRIGDWD" or "*UDSKLFDOLOOXVWUDWLRQ" with
or
.
12.9.8 5HWXUQWRIDFWRU\VHWWLQJV
Navigation
•
and
3. Press [OK] to save.
3.1.19.10.1.0 5HWXUQWRIDFWRU\VHWWLQJV
3.1.19.6.0.0 'HILQH+RPHGLVSOD\
Navigation
.
2. Press [OK] to save.
Navigation
To specify the contents, go to "'HILQH+RPHGLVSOD\FRQWHQWV".
+RPH > 6HWWLQJV > *HQHUDOVHWWLQJV > 5HWXUQWRIDFWRU\VHWWLQJV
'HILQH+RPHGLVSOD\FRQWHQWV
5HWXUQWRIDFWRU\VHWWLQJV
1. To set "/LVWRIGDWD", press [OK] to start the setting.
A list of parameters will appear in the display.
It is possible to recall the factory settings and overwrite the
current settings. All user settings in the "6HWWLQJV" and "$VVLVW"
menus will be set back to the factory settings. This also includes
language, units, possible setup of analog input, multi-pump
function, etc.
2. Select or deselect with [OK].
Up to four parameters can be selected.
To overwrite the current settings with the factory settings, select
"<HV" with
or
and press [OK].
28
3.1.19.11.0.0 5XQVWDUWXSJXLGH
This submenu provides information about faults and corrective
actions.
Navigation
13.7 Wireless GENIair
The pump is designed for multi-pump connection via the wireless
GENIair connection or wired via a bus system
(Building Management System).
The built-in wireless GENIair module enables communication
between pumps and with the Grundfos Go Remote without the
use of add-on modules:
•
Multi-pump function.
See section 13.8 Multi-pump function.
•
Grundfos GO Remote.
See section 17.1 Grundfos GO Remote.
+RPH > 6HWWLQJV > *HQHUDOVHWWLQJV > 5XQVWDUWXSJXLGH
5XQVWDUWXSJXLGH
13.8 Multi-pump function
It is possible to run the start-up guide again. The start-up guide
will guide the user through the general settings of the pump, such
as language, date and time.
To run the start-up guide, select "<HV" with
[OK].
or
and press
The multi-pump function enables the control of single-head
pumps connected in parallel and twin-head pumps without the
use of external controllers. The pumps in a multi-pump system
communicate with each other via the wireless GENIair
connection.
A multi-pump system is set up via a selected pump, i.e. the
master pump (first selected pump). All Grundfos pumps with a
wireless GENIair connection can be connected to the multi-pump
system.
13. "$VVLVW" menu
The multi-pump functions are described in the following sections.
13.8.1 Alternating operation
Only one pump is operating at a time. The change from one pump
to the other depends on time or energy. If a pump fails, the other
pump will take over automatically.
$VVLVW
Pump system:
•
Twin-head pump.
•
Two single-head pumps connected in parallel. The pumps
must be of same type and size. Each pump requires a
non-return valve in series with the pump.
Navigation
+RPH > $VVLVW
Press
and go to the "$VVLVW" menu with
13.8.2 Back-up operation
.
"$VVLVW" menu
This menu offers the following:
•
$VVLVWHGSXPSVHWXS
•
6HWWLQJRIGDWHDQGWLPH
•
0XOWLSXPSVHWXS
•
6HWXSDQDORJLQSXW
•
'HVFULSWLRQRIFRQWUROPRGH
•
$VVLVWHGIDXOWDGYLFH.
One pump is operating continuously. The back-up pump is
operated at intervals to prevent seizing up. If the duty pump stops
due to a fault, the back-up pump will start automatically.
Pump system:
•
Twin-head pump.
•
Two single-head pumps connected in parallel. The pumps
must be of same type and size. Each pump requires a
non-return valve in series with the pump.
13.8.3 Cascade operation
The "$VVLVW" menu guides the user through the setting of the
pump. In each submenu, the user is presented with a guide that
helps throughout the setting.
Cascade operation ensures that the pump performance is
automatically adapted to the consumption by switching pumps on
or off. The system thus runs as energy-efficiently as possible with
a constant pressure and a limited number of pumps.
13.1 $VVLVWHGSXPSVHWXS
All pumps in operation will run at equal speed. Pump changeover
is automatic and depends on energy, operating hours and fault.
This submenu is a step-by-step guide to complete pump setup,
starting with a presentation of the control modes and ending with
the setpoint setting.
13.2 6HWWLQJRIGDWHDQGWLPH
Pump system:
•
Twin-head pump.
•
Two single-head pumps connected in parallel. The pumps
must be of same type and size. Each pump requires a
non-return valve in series with the pump.
•
The control mode must be set to "&RQVWSUHVV" or "&RQVWDQW
FXUYH".
See section 12.9.2 6HWGDWHDQGWLPH.
13.3 0XOWLSXPSVHWXS
This submenu assists the user in setting up a multi-pump system.
See section 13.8 Multi-pump function.
13.4 6HWXSDQDORJLQSXW
This submenu assists the user in setting up the analog input.
13.5 'HVFULSWLRQRIFRQWUROPRGH
This submenu gives a short description of each control mode.
29
English (GB)
13.6 $VVLVWHGIDXOWDGYLFH
12.9.9 5XQVWDUWXSJXLGH
English (GB)
14. Selection of control mode
System application
Select this control
mode
Recommended for most heating systems, especially in systems with relatively large pressure losses in the
distribution pipes. See description under proportional pressure.
In replacement situations where the proportional-pressure duty point is unknown.
AUTOADAPT
H
The duty point has to be within the AUTOADAPT operating range. During operation, the pump automatically
makes the necessary adjustment to the actual system characteristic.
This setting ensures minimum energy consumption and noise level from valves, which reduces operating costs
and increases comfort.
Q
The FLOWADAPT control mode is a combination of AUTOADAPT and FLOWLIMIT.
This control mode is suitable for systems where a maximum flow limit, FLOWLIMIT, is desired. The pump
continuously monitors and adjusts the flow, thus ensuring that the selected FLOWLIMIT is not exceeded.
Main pumps in boiler applications where a steady flow through the boiler is required. No extra energy is used for
pumping too much liquid into the system.
In systems with mixing loops, the control mode can be used to control the flow in each loop.
FLOWADAPT
H
Benefits:
•
Enough water for all loops at peak load conditions if each loop has been set to the right maximum flow.
•
The dimensioned flow for each zone (required heat energy) is determined by the flow from the pump.
This value can be set precisely in the FLOWADAPT control mode without the use of pump throttling valves.
•
When the flow is set lower than the balancing valve setting, the pump will ramp down instead of losing energy
by pumping against a balancing valve.
•
Cooling surfaces in air-conditioning systems can operate at high pressure and low flow.
Q
In systems with relatively large pressure losses in the distribution pipes and in air-conditioning and cooling systems.
•
Two-pipe heating systems with thermostatic valves and
– a dimensioned pump head higher than 4 metres
– very long distribution pipes
Proportional
pressure
– strongly throttled pipe balancing valves
– differential-pressure regulators
– large pressure losses in those parts of the system through which the total quantity of water flows
(for example boiler, heat exchanger and distribution pipe up to the first branching).
•
Primary circuit pumps in systems with large pressure losses in the primary circuit.
•
Air-conditioning systems with
H
Hset
Hset
2
Q
– heat exchangers (fan coils)
– cooling ceilings
– cooling surfaces.
In systems with relatively small pressure losses in the distribution pipes.
•
Two-pipe heating systems with thermostatic valves and
– a dimensioned pump head lower than 2 metres
– dimensioned for natural circulation
Constant pressure
H
– small pressure losses in those parts of the system through which the total quantity of water flows
(for example boiler, heat exchanger and distribution pipe up to the first branching) or
– modified to a high differential temperature between flow pipe and return pipe (for example district heating).
•
Underfloor heating systems with thermostatic valves.
•
One-pipe heating systems with thermostatic valves or pipe balancing valves.
•
Primary circuit pumps in systems with small pressure losses in the primary circuit.
Q
Constant
temperature
In heating systems with a fixed system characteristic, for example domestic hot-water systems, the control of the
pump according to a constant return-pipe temperature may be relevant.
FLOWLIMIT can be used with advantage to control the maximum circulation flow.
H
Q
If an external controller is installed, the pump is able to change from one constant curve to another, depending
on the value of the external signal.
Constant curve
The pump can also be set to operate according to the max. or min. curve, like an uncontrolled pump:
H
•
The max. curve mode can be used in periods in which a maximum flow is required. This operating mode is for
instance suitable for hot-water priority.
•
The min. curve mode can be used in periods in which a minimum flow is required. This operating mode is for
instance suitable for manual night setback if Automatic Night Setback is not desired.
Q
In systems with pumps operating in parallel.
The multi-pump function enables the control of single-head pumps connected in parallel (two pumps) and
twin-head pumps without the use of external controllers. The pumps in a multi-pump system communicate with
each other via the wireless GENIair connection.
30
"$VVLVW" menu
"0XOWLSXPSVHWXS"
Warning
Before dismantling the pump, drain the system or close the isolating valve on either side of the pump. The pumped
liquid may be scalding hot and under high pressure.
15.1 Grundfos Eye operating indications
Grundfos Eye
Indication
Cause
No lights on.
Power off.
Pump not running.
Two opposite green indicator lights running in the Power on.
direction of rotation of the pump.
Pump running.
Two opposite green indicator lights permanently Power on.
on.
Pump not running.
One yellow indicator light running in the direction Warning.
of rotation of the pump.
Pump running.
One yellow indicator light permanently on.
Warning.
Pump stopped.
Two opposite red indicator lights flashing
simultaneously.
Alarm.
Pump stopped.
One green indicator light in the middle
permanently on (in addition to another
indication).
Remote-controlled.
The pump is currently being accessed by the
Grundfos GO Remote.
15.2 Signalling communication with remote control
The centre indicator light in the Grundfos Eye will indicate communication with the Grundfos GO Remote.
The table below describes the desired function of the centre indicator light.
Case
Description
Signalling by the centre indicator light
Wink
The pump in question is highlighted in the Grundfos GO Remote display.
To inform the user of the location of the highlighted pump, the centre
indicator light will flash four or five times once to signal "I am here".
Push me
The pump in question is selected/opened in the Grundfos GO Remote
Flashing continuously with 50 % duty
menu. The pump will signal "Push me" to ask the user to select the
cycle.
pump/allow the pump to exchange data with the Grundfos GO Remote.
The indicator light will flash continuously until a pop-up window asks the
user to press [OK] to allow communication with the Grundfos GO Remote.
I am connected
The indicator light is signalling that the pump is connected to
Grundfos GO Remote. The indicator light is permanently on as long as the
pump is selected in the Grundfos GO Remote.
Four or five quick flashes once to signal
"I am here".
Indicator light permanently on.
31
English (GB)
15. Fault finding
15.3 Fault finding
English (GB)
A fault indication can be reset in one of the following ways:
•
When the fault cause has been eliminated, the pump will
revert to normal duty.
•
If the fault disappears by itself, the fault indication will
automatically be reset.
•
The fault cause will be stored in the pump alarm log.
Warning and alarm codes
Fault
3XPSFRPPXQLFDWLRQIDXOW (10)
Alarm
Communication fault between
different parts of the
electronics.
)RUFHGSXPSLQJ (29)
Alarm
Automatic reset
and restart?
Corrective actions
<HV
Replace the pump, or call GRUNDFOS
SERVICE for assistance.
Other pumps or sources force
flow through the pump even if
the pump is stopped.
<HV
Check the system for defective non-return valves
and replace, if necessary.
Check the system for correct position of
non-return valves, etc.
8QGHUYROWDJH (40, 75)
Alarm
Supply voltage to the pump
too low.
<HV
Check that the power supply is within the
specified range.
%ORFNHGSXPS (51)
Alarm
The pump is blocked.
1R
Dismantle the pump, and remove any foreign
matter or impurities preventing the pump from
rotating.
'U\UXQQLQJ (57)
Alarm
No water at the pump inlet or
the water contains too much
air.
1R
Prime and vent the pump before a new start-up.
Check that the pump is operating correctly. If not,
replace the pump, or call GRUNDFOS SERVICE
for assistance.
,QWHUQDOIDXOW (72, 84, 155, 157)
Warning/alarm
Internal fault in the pump
electronics.
<HV
Replace the pump, or call GRUNDFOS
SERVICE for assistance.
2YHUYROWDJH (74)
Alarm
Supply voltage to the pump
too high.
<HV
Check that the power supply is within the
specified range.
,QWHUQDOVHQVRUIDXOW (88)
Warning
The pump is receiving a signal
from the internal sensor which
is outside the normal range.
<HV
Check that the plug and cable are connected
correctly in the sensor. The sensor is located on
the back of the pump housing.
Replace the sensor, or call GRUNDFOS
SERVICE for assistance.
<HV
Does the electrical signal set (0-10 V or 4-20 mA)
match the sensor output signal?
If not, change the setting of the analog input, or
replace the sensor with one that matches the
setup.
Check the sensor cable for damage.
Check the cable connection at the pump and at
the sensor. Correct the connection, if required.
The sensor has been removed, but the analog
input has not been disabled.
Replace the sensor, or call GRUNDFOS
SERVICE for assistance.
([WHUQDOVHQVRUIDXOW (93)
Warning
&DXWLRQ
32
The pump is receiving a signal
from the external sensor which
is outside the normal range.
If the power supply cable is damaged, it must be replaced by the manufacturer, the manufacturer’s service partner or
a similarly qualified person.
English (GB)
16. Sensor
5 Nm
TM05 3036 0812
Nose downwards
Fig. 29 Correct position of sensor
During maintenance and replacement of the sensor, it is
important that the sealing cap is fitted correctly on the sensor
housing.
Tighten the screw holding the clamp to 5 Nm.
Warning
Before replacing the sensor, make sure that the
pump is stopped and that the system is not
pressurised.
16.1 Sensor specifications
16.1.1 Pressure
Maximum differential pressure
during operation
2 bar / 0.2 MPa
Accuracy
(0 to +85 °C)
2%*
Accuracy
(-10 to 0 °C and +85 to +130 °C)
3%*
* Full scale.
16.1.2 Temperature
Temperature range during operation
Accuracy
-10 to +130 °C
± 2 °C
33
17.2 Communication
The pump can communicate via the wireless GENIair connection
or a CIM module.
This enables the pump to communicate with other pumps and
with different types of network solutions.
17.1 Grundfos GO Remote
The Grundfos CIM modules (CIM = Communication Interface
Module) enable the pump to connect to standard fieldbus
networks.
The MAGNA3 is designed for wireless communication with the
Grundfos GO Remote app. The Grundfos GO Remote app
communicates with the pump via radio communication
(wireless GENIair).
The radio communication between the pump and
the Grundfos GO Remote is encrypted to protect
against misuse.
TM05 2710 0612
1RWH
The Grundfos GO Remote app is available from Apple AppStore
and Android market.
The Grundfos GO Remote concept replaces the Grundfos R100
remote control. This means that all products supported by the
R100 are supported by the Grundfos GO Remote.
The Grundfos GO Remote can be used for the following:
Fig. 30 Building management system (BMS) with four pumps
connected in parallel
•
Reading of operating data.
•
Reading of warning and alarm indications.
•
Setting of control mode.
A CIM module is an add-on communication interface module.
The CIM module enables data transmission between the pump
and an external system, for example a BMS or SCADA system.
•
Setting of setpoint.
The CIM module communicates via fieldbus protocols.
•
Selection of external setpoint signal.
•
Allocation of pump number making it possible to distinguish
between pumps that are connected via Grundfos GENIbus.
•
Selection of function for digital input.
•
Generation of reports (PDF).
•
Assist function.
•
Multi-pump setup.
•
Display of relevant documentation.
For function and connection to the pump, see separate
installation and operating instructions for the desired type of
Grundfos GO Remote setup.
1RWH
A gateway is a device that facilitates the transfer
of data between two different networks based on
different communication protocols.
The following CIM modules are available:
Module
Fieldbus protocol
Product number
CIM 050
GENIbus
CIM 100
LONworks
96236335
96753735
CIM 150
Profibus DP
96753081
CIM 200
Modbus RTU
96753082
CIM 300
BACnet MS/TP
96893769
17.2.1 Reuse of CIM modules
A CIM module in a CIU unit used together with
GRUNDFOS MAGNA can be reused in MAGNA3.
The CIM module has to be re-configured before it is used in a
MAGNA3 pump. Contact your nearest Grundfos company.
TM05 2911 1312
English (GB)
17. Accessories
Fig. 31 Reuse of CIM module
34
English (GB)
17.3 Insulating kits for air-conditioning and cooling
systems
Single-head pumps for air-conditioning and cooling systems can
be fitted with insulating shells. A kit consists of two shells made of
polyurethane (PUR) and a self-adhesive seal to ensure tight
assembly.
1RWH
The dimensions of the insulating shells for
pumps in air-conditioning and cooling systems
differ from those of the insulating shells for
pumps in heating systems.
Pump type
Product number
MAGNA3, DN 32
98063287
MAGNA3, DN 40 220
98063288
MAGNA3, DN 40 250
98145675
MAGNA3, DN 50 240
98063289
MAGNA3, DN 50 280
98145676
MAGNA3, DN 65
96913589
MAGNA3, DN 80
96913593
MAGNA3, DN 100
98134265
35
17.4 Fitting the CIM module
English (GB)
Warning
Before fitting the module, switch off the power supply. Make sure that the power supply cannot be accidentally
switched on.
Step
Action
Remove the front cover from the control box.
2
Fit the CIM module as illustrated and click it on.
3
Fit and tighten the screw holding the CIM module and
secure the earth connection.
4
For connection to fieldbus networks, see separate
installation and operating instructions for the desired
CIM module.
TM05 2913 1112
TM05 2912 1112
TM05 2914 1112
TM05 2875 0912
1
Illustration
36
Input/output communication
Supply voltage
1 x 230 V ± 10 %, 50/60 Hz, PE.
Two digital inputs
External potential-free contact.
Contact load: 5 V, 10 mA.
Screened cable.
Loop resistance: Maximum 130 ˖.
Analog input
4-20 mA (load: 150 ˖).
0-10 VDC (load: 78 k˖).
Two relay outputs
Internal potential-free changeover contact.
Maximum load: 250 V, 2 A, AC1.
Minimum load: 5 VDC, 20 mA.
Screened cable, depending on signal level.
Motor protection
The pump requires no external motor protection.
Enclosure class
IPX4D (EN 60529).
Insulation class
F.
English (GB)
18. Technical data
Relative air humidity
Maximum 95 %.
cos ij
Ambient temperature
The MAGNA3 has a built-in active PFC (Power Factor Control)
which gives a cos ˳ from 0.98 to 0.99, i.e. very close to 1.
0 °C to +40 °C.
During transport: -40 °C to +70 °C.
Temperature class
19. Disposal
Liquid temperature
This product has been designed with focus on the disposal and
recycling of materials. The following disposal values apply to all
variants of Grundfos MAGNA3 pumps:
Continuously: -10 °C to +110 °C.
•
minimum 85 % recycling
Stainless-steel pumps in domestic hot-water systems:
•
maximum 10 % incineration
In domestic hot-water systems, we recommend to keep the liquid
temperature below +65 °C to eliminate the risk of lime
precipitation.
•
maximum 5 % depositing.
TF110 (EN 60335-2-51).
System pressure
The maximum permissible system pressure is stated on the pump
nameplate:
PN 6: 6 bar / 0.6 MPa
Values in percent of total weight.
This product or parts of it must be disposed of in an
environmentally sound way according to local regulations.
Subject to alterations.
PN 10: 10 bar / 1.0 MPa
PN 16: 16 bar / 1.6 MPa.
Inlet pressure
Recommended inlet pressures:
Single-head pumps:
•
Min. 0.10 bar / 0.01 MPa at +75 °C
•
Min. 0.35 bar / 0.035 MPa at +95 °C
•
Min. 0.65 bar / 0.065 MPa at +110 °C.
Twin-head pumps:
•
Min. 0.90 bar / 0.09 MPa at +75 °C
•
Min. 1.20 bar / 0.12 MPa at +95 °C
•
Min. 1.50 bar / 0.15 MPa at +110 °C.
EMC (electromagnetic compatibility)
EN 55014-1:2006, EN 55014-2:1998, EN 61800-3-3:2008 and
EN 61000-3-2:2006.
Sound pressure level
The sound pressure level of the pump is lower than 43 dB(A).
Leakage current
The pump mains filter will cause a discharge current to earth
during operation. Ileakage < 3.5 mA.
Consumption when the pump is stopped
1 to 10 W, depending on activity, i.e. reading the display, use of
Grundfos GO Remote, interaction with modules, etc.
37
1
Dimensions
TM05 2204 4611
Appendix
Appendix
Fig. 32 Dimensions, single-head pumps
Dimensions [mm]
Pump type
MAGNA3 50-40 F N
MAGNA3 65-40 F N
MAGNA3 80-40 F N
MAGNA3 100-40 F N
MAGNA3 50-60 F N
MAGNA3 65-60 F N
MAGNA3 80-60 F N
MAGNA3 100-60 F N
MAGNA3 40-80 F N
MAGNA3 50-80 F N
MAGNA3 65-80 F N
MAGNA3 80-80 F N
MAGNA3 100-80 N
MAGNA3 40-100 F N
MAGNA3 50-100 F N
MAGNA3 65-100 F N
MAGNA3 80-100 F N
MAGNA3 100-100 F N
MAGNA3 32-120 F N
MAGNA3 40-120 F N
MAGNA3 50-120 F N
MAGNA3 65-120 F N
MAGNA3 80-120 F N
MAGNA3 100-120 F N
MAGNA3 40-150 F N
MAGNA3 50-150 F N
MAGNA3 65-150 F N
MAGNA3 40-180 F N
MAGNA3 50-180 F N
38
L1
G
B1
B2
B4
B6
B7
H1
H2
H3
H4
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
240
340
360
450
240
340
360
450
220
240
340
360
450
220
280
340
360
450
220
250
280
340
360
450
250
280
340
250
280
203.9
203.9
203.9
203.9
203.9
203.9
203.9
203.9
203.9
203.9
203.9
203.9
203.9
203.9
203.9
203.9
203.9
203.9
203.9
203.9
203.9
203.9
203.9
203.9
203.9
203.9
203.9
203.9
203.9
83.6
83.6
83.6
83.6
83.6
83.6
83.6
83.6
83.6
83.6
83.6
83.6
83.6
83.6
83.6
83.6
83.6
83.6
83.6
83.6
83.6
83.6
83.6
83.6
83.6
83.6
83.6
83.6
83.6
164
164
164
164
164
164
164
164
164
164
164
164
164
164
164
164
164
164
164
164
164
164
164
164
164
164
164
164
164
72.3
72.3
72.3
72.3
72.3
72.3
72.3
72.3
72.3
72.3
72.3
72.3
72.3
72.3
72.3
72.3
72.3
72.3
72.3
72.3
72.3
72.3
72.3
72.3
72.3
72.3
72.3
72.3
72.3
127
133
163
178
127
133
163
178
105
127
133
163
178
105
127
133
163
178
107
105
127
133
163
178
105
127
133
105
127
127
133
163
178
127
133
178
178
105
127
133
163
178
105
127
133
163
178
107
105
127
133
163
178
105
127
133
105
127
70.5
74
95.4
103.4
70.5
74
95.4
103.4
65
70.5
74
95.4
103.4
65
72
74
95.4
103.4
51.5
65
72
74
95.4
103.4
65
72
74
65
72
303.6
311.5
317.5
329.7
303.6
311.5
317.5
329.7
304
303.6
311.5
317.5
329.7
304
303.6
311.5
317.5
329.7
288
304
303.6
311.5
317.5
329.7
304
303.6
311.5
304
303.6
374.1
385.5
412.9
433.1
374.1
385.5
412.9
433.1
369
374.1
385.5
412.9
433.1
369
375.6
385.5
412.9
433.1
339.5
369
375.6
385.5
412.9
433.1
369
375.6
385.5
369
375.6
87
93.4
114.4
120
87
93.4
114.4
120
83.1
87
93.4
114.4
120
83.1
87
93.4
114.4
120
83.1
83.1
87
93.4
114.4
120
83.1
87
93.4
83.1
87
53
68.8
80.8
105.3
53
68.8
80.8
105.3
41.8
53
68.8
80.8
105.3
41.8
53
68.8
80.8
105.3
36
41.8
53
68.8
80.8
105.3
41.8
53
68.8
41.8
53
102
119
128
160
102
119
128
160
84
102
119
128
160
84
102
119
128
160
76
84
102
119
128
160
84
102
119
84
102
110/125
130/145
150/160
170
110/125
130/145
150/160
170
100/110
110/125
130/145
150/160
170
100/110
110/125
130/145
150/160
170
90/100
100/110
110/125
130/145
150/160
170
100/110
110/125
130/145
100/110
110/125
165
185
200
220
165
185
200
220
150
165
185
200
220
150
165
185
200
220
140
150
165
185
200
220
150
165
185
150
165
14/19
14/19
18
18
14/19
14/19
18
18
14/19
14/19
14/19
18
18
14/19
14/19
14/19
18
18
14/19
14/19
14/19
14/19
18
18
14/19
14/19
14/19
14/19
14/19
Appendix
L3
L4
L2
B5
L1
B4
B6
B6
TM05 2205 0412
B7
Fig. 33 Dimensions, twin-head pumps
Dimensions [mm]
Pump type
MAGNA3
MAGNA3
MAGNA3
MAGNA3
MAGNA3
MAGNA3
MAGNA3
MAGNA3
MAGNA3
MAGNA3
MAGNA3
MAGNA3
MAGNA3
MAGNA3
MAGNA3
MAGNA3
MAGNA3
MAGNA3
MAGNA3
MAGNA3
MAGNA3
MAGNA3
MAGNA3
MAGNA3
MAGNA3
MAGNA3
MAGNA3
MAGNA3
MAGNA3
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
50-40 F N
65-40 F N
80-40 F N
100-40 F N
50-60 F N
65-60 F N
80-60 F N
100-60 F N
40-80 F N
50-80 F N
65-80 F N
80-80 F N
100-80 F N
40-100 F N
50-100 F N
65-100 F N
80-100 F N
100-100 F N
32-120 F
40-120 F N
50-120 F N
65-120 F N
80-120 F N
100-120 F N
40-150 F N
50-150 F N
65-150 F N
40-180 F N
50-180 F N
L1
L2
L3
L4
G
B1
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
H1
H2
H3
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
240
340
360
450
240
340
360
450
220
240
340
360
450
220
280
340
360
450
220
250
280
340
360
450
250
280
340
250
280
48
218
218
243
48
218
218
243
53
48
218
218
243
53
175
218
218
243
97
58
175
218
218
243
58
175
218
58
175
160
92
102
147
160
92
102
147
143
160
92
102
147
143
75
92
102
147
93
158
75
92
102
147
158
75
92
158
75
45
92
102
147
45
92
102
147
63
45
92
102
147
63
75
92
102
147
53
78
75
92
102
147
78
75
92
78
75
204
204
204
204
204
204
204
204
204
204
204
204
204
204
204
204
204
204
204
204
204
204
204
204
204
204
204
204
204
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
515
522
538
551
515
522
538
551
505
515
522
538
551
505
517
522
538
551
504
505
517
522
538
551
505
517
522
505
517
294
294
294
299
294
294
294
299
294
294
294
294
299
294
294
294
294
299
294
294
294
294
294
299
294
294
294
294
294
221
228
244
252
221
228
244
252
211
221
228
244
252
211
223
228
244
252
210
211
223
228
244
252
211
223
228
211
223
130
130
130
135
130
130
130
135
130
130
130
130
135
130
130
130
130
135
130
130
130
130
130
135
130
130
130
130
130
260
260
260
270
260
260
260
270
260
260
260
260
270
260
260
260
260
270
260
260
260
260
260
270
260
260
260
260
260
75
77
96
103
75
77
96
103
76
75
77
96
103
76
78
77
96
103
52
76
78
77
96
103
76
78
77
76
78
304
312
318
318
304
312
318
330
303
304
312
318
330
303
304
312
318
330
288
303
304
312
318
330
303
304
312
303
304
378
389
414
433
378
389
414
433
379
378
389
414
433
379
382
389
414
433
379
379
382
389
414
433
379
382
389
379
382
53
69
81
105
53
69
81
105
40
53
69
81
105
40
53
69
81
105
32
40
53
69
81
105
40
53
69
40
53
102
119
128
160
102
119
128
160
84
102
119
128
160
84
102
119
128
160
76
84
102
119
128
160
84
102
119
84
102
110/125
130/145
150/160
170
110/125
130/145
150/160
170
100/110
110/125
130/145
150/160
170
100/110
110/125
130/145
150/160
170
90/100
100/110
110/125
130/145
150/160
170
100/110
110/125
130/145
100/110
110/125
165
185
200
220
165
185
200
220
150
165
185
200
220
150
165
185
200
220
140
150
165
185
200
220
150
165
185
150
165
14/19
14/19
18
18
14/19
14/19
18
18
14/19
14/19
14/19
18
18
14/19
14/19
14/19
18
18
14/19
14/19
14/19
14/19
18
18
14/19
14/19
14/19
14/19
14/19
39
40
Finland
Lithuania
Spain
Bombas GRUNDFOS de Argentina S.A.
Ruta Panamericana, ramal Campana Centro Industrial Garín - Esq. Haendel y
Mozart
AR-1619 Garín Pcia. de Buenos Aires
Pcia. de Buenos Aires
Phone: +54-3327 414 444
Telefax: +54-3327 45 3190
OY GRUNDFOS Pumput AB
Mestarintie 11
FIN-01730 Vantaa
Phone: +358-3066 5650
Telefax: +358-3066 56550
GRUNDFOS Pumps UAB
Smolensko g. 6
LT-03201 Vilnius
Tel: + 370 52 395 430
Fax: + 370 52 395 431
Bombas GRUNDFOS España S.A.
Camino de la Fuentecilla, s/n
E-28110 Algete (Madrid)
Tel.: +34-91-848 8800
Telefax: +34-91-628 0465
France
Malaysia
Sweden
Pompes GRUNDFOS Distribution S.A.
Parc d’Activités de Chesnes
57, rue de Malacombe
F-38290 St. Quentin Fallavier (Lyon)
Tél.: +33-4 74 82 15 15
Télécopie: +33-4 74 94 10 51
GRUNDFOS Pumps Sdn. Bhd.
7 Jalan Peguam U1/25
Glenmarie Industrial Park
40150 Shah Alam
Selangor
Phone: +60-3-5569 2922
Telefax: +60-3-5569 2866
GRUNDFOS AB
Box 333 (Lunnagårdsgatan 6)
431 24 Mölndal
Tel.: +46 31 332 23 000
Telefax: +46 31 331 94 60
Australia
GRUNDFOS Pumps Pty. Ltd.
P.O. Box 2040
Regency Park
South Australia 5942
Phone: +61-8-8461-4611
Telefax: +61-8-8340 0155
Austria
GRUNDFOS Pumpen Vertrieb Ges.m.b.H.
Grundfosstraße 2
A-5082 Grödig/Salzburg
Tel.: +43-6246-883-0
Telefax: +43-6246-883-30
Belgium
N.V. GRUNDFOS Bellux S.A.
Boomsesteenweg 81-83
B-2630 Aartselaar
Tél.: +32-3-870 7300
Télécopie: +32-3-870 7301
Belarus
Germany
GRUNDFOS GMBH
Schlüterstr. 33
40699 Erkrath
Tel.: +49-(0) 211 929 69-0
Telefax: +49-(0) 211 929 69-3799
e-mail: [email protected]
Service in Deutschland:
e-mail: [email protected]
Mexico
HILGE GmbH & Co. KG
Hilgestrasse 37-47
55292 Bodenheim/Rhein
Germany
Tel.: +49 6135 75-0
Telefax: +49 6135 1737
e-mail: [email protected]
Netherlands
ɉɪɟɞɫɬɚɜɢɬɟɥɶɫɬɜɨ ȽɊɍɇȾɎɈɋ ɜ
Ɇɢɧɫɤɟ
220123, Ɇɢɧɫɤ,
ɭɥ. ȼ. ɏɨɪɭɠɟɣ, 22, ɨɮ. 1105
Ɍɟɥ.: +(37517) 233 97 65,
Ɏɚɤɫ: +(37517) 233 97 69
E-mail: [email protected]
Greece
Bosnia/Herzegovina
Hong Kong
GRUNDFOS Sarajevo
Trg Heroja 16,
BiH-71000 Sarajevo
Phone: +387 33 713 290
Telefax: +387 33 659 079
e-mail: [email protected]
Brazil
BOMBAS GRUNDFOS DO BRASIL
Av. Humberto de Alencar Castelo Branco,
630
CEP 09850 - 300
São Bernardo do Campo - SP
Phone: +55-11 4393 5533
Telefax: +55-11 4343 5015
Bulgaria
Grundfos Bulgaria EOOD
Slatina District
Iztochna Tangenta street no. 100
BG - 1592 Sofia
Tel. +359 2 49 22 200
Fax. +359 2 49 22 201
email: [email protected]
Canada
GRUNDFOS Canada Inc.
2941 Brighton Road
Oakville, Ontario
L6H 6C9
Phone: +1-905 829 9533
Telefax: +1-905 829 9512
China
GRUNDFOS Pumps (Shanghai) Co. Ltd.
50/F Maxdo Center No. 8 XingYi Rd.
Hongqiao development Zone
Shanghai 200336
PRC
Phone: +86 21 612 252 22
Telefax: +86 21 612 253 33
Croatia
GRUNDFOS CROATIA d.o.o.
Cebini 37, Buzin
HR-10010 Zagreb
Phone: +385 1 6595 400
Telefax: +385 1 6595 499
www.grundfos.hr
Czech Republic
GRUNDFOS s.r.o.
ýajkovského 21
779 00 Olomouc
Phone: +420-585-716 111
Telefax: +420-585-716 299
Denmark
GRUNDFOS DK A/S
Martin Bachs Vej 3
DK-8850 Bjerringbro
Tlf.: +45-87 50 50 50
Telefax: +45-87 50 51 51
E-mail: [email protected]
www.grundfos.com/DK
Estonia
GRUNDFOS Pumps Eesti OÜ
Peterburi tee 92G
11415 Tallinn
Tel: + 372 606 1690
Fax: + 372 606 1691
GRUNDFOS Hellas A.E.B.E.
20th km. Athinon-Markopoulou Av.
P.O. Box 71
GR-19002 Peania
Phone: +0030-210-66 83 400
Telefax: +0030-210-66 46 273
GRUNDFOS Pumps (Hong Kong) Ltd.
Unit 1, Ground floor
Siu Wai Industrial Centre
29-33 Wing Hong Street &
68 King Lam Street, Cheung Sha Wan
Kowloon
Phone: +852-27861706 / 27861741
Telefax: +852-27858664
Hungary
GRUNDFOS Hungária Kft.
Park u. 8
H-2045 Törökbálint,
Phone: +36-23 511 110
Telefax: +36-23 511 111
India
GRUNDFOS Pumps India Private Limited
118 Old Mahabalipuram Road
Thoraipakkam
Chennai 600 096
Phone: +91-44 2496 6800
Indonesia
PT GRUNDFOS Pompa
Jl. Rawa Sumur III, Blok III / CC-1
Kawasan Industri, Pulogadung
Jakarta 13930
Phone: +62-21-460 6909
Telefax: +62-21-460 6910 / 460 6901
Ireland
GRUNDFOS (Ireland) Ltd.
Unit A, Merrywell Business Park
Ballymount Road Lower
Dublin 12
Phone: +353-1-4089 800
Telefax: +353-1-4089 830
Italy
GRUNDFOS Pompe Italia S.r.l.
Via Gran Sasso 4
I-20060 Truccazzano (Milano)
Tel.: +39-02-95838112
Telefax: +39-02-95309290 / 95838461
Japan
GRUNDFOS Pumps K.K.
Gotanda Metalion Bldg., 5F,
5-21-15, Higashi-gotanda
Shiagawa-ku, Tokyo
141-0022 Japan
Phone: +81 35 448 1391
Telefax: +81 35 448 9619
Korea
GRUNDFOS Pumps Korea Ltd.
6th Floor, Aju Building 679-5
Yeoksam-dong, Kangnam-ku, 135-916
Seoul, Korea
Phone: +82-2-5317 600
Telefax: +82-2-5633 725
Latvia
SIA GRUNDFOS Pumps Latvia
Deglava biznesa centrs
Augusta Deglava ielƗ 60, LV-1035, RƯga,
TƗlr.: + 371 714 9640, 7 149 641
Fakss: + 371 914 9646
Bombas GRUNDFOS de México S.A. de
C.V.
Boulevard TLC No. 15
Parque Industrial Stiva Aeropuerto
Apodaca, N.L. 66600
Phone: +52-81-8144 4000
Telefax: +52-81-8144 4010
GRUNDFOS Netherlands
Veluwezoom 35
1326 AE Almere
Postbus 22015
1302 CA ALMERE
Tel.: +31-88-478 6336
Telefax: +31-88-478 6332
E-mail: [email protected]
New Zealand
GRUNDFOS Pumps NZ Ltd.
17 Beatrice Tinsley Crescent
North Harbour Industrial Estate
Albany, Auckland
Phone: +64-9-415 3240
Telefax: +64-9-415 3250
Norway
GRUNDFOS Pumper A/S
Strømsveien 344
Postboks 235, Leirdal
N-1011 Oslo
Tlf.: +47-22 90 47 00
Telefax: +47-22 32 21 50
Poland
GRUNDFOS Pompy Sp. z o.o.
ul. Klonowa 23
Baranowo k. Poznania
PL-62-081 PrzeĨmierowo
Tel: (+48-61) 650 13 00
Fax: (+48-61) 650 13 50
Portugal
Switzerland
GRUNDFOS Pumpen AG
Bruggacherstrasse 10
CH-8117 Fällanden/ZH
Tel.: +41-1-806 8111
Telefax: +41-1-806 8115
Taiwan
GRUNDFOS Pumps (Taiwan) Ltd.
7 Floor, 219 Min-Chuan Road
Taichung, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Phone: +886-4-2305 0868
Telefax: +886-4-2305 0878
Thailand
GRUNDFOS (Thailand) Ltd.
92 Chaloem Phrakiat Rama 9 Road,
Dokmai, Pravej, Bangkok 10250
Phone: +66-2-725 8999
Telefax: +66-2-725 8998
Turkey
GRUNDFOS POMPA San. ve Tic. Ltd. Sti.
Gebze Organize Sanayi Bölgesi
Ihsan dede Caddesi,
2. yol 200. Sokak No. 204
41490 Gebze/ Kocaeli
Phone: +90 - 262-679 7979
Telefax: +90 - 262-679 7905
E-mail: [email protected]
Ukraine
ɌɈȼ ȽɊɍɇȾɎɈɋ ɍɄɊȺȲɇȺ
01010 Ʉɢʀɜ, ȼɭɥ. Ɇɨɫɤɨɜɫɶɤɚ 8ɛ,
Ɍɟɥ.:(+38 044) 390 40 50
Ɏɚɯ.: (+38 044) 390 40 59
E-mail: [email protected]
United Arab Emirates
GRUNDFOS Gulf Distribution
P.O. Box 16768
Jebel Ali Free Zone
Dubai
Phone: +971 4 8815 166
Telefax: +971 4 8815 136
Bombas GRUNDFOS Portugal, S.A.
Rua Calvet de Magalhães, 241
Apartado 1079
P-2770-153 Paço de Arcos
Tel.: +351-21-440 76 00
Telefax: +351-21-440 76 90
United Kingdom
Romania
U.S.A.
GRUNDFOS Pumps Ltd.
Grovebury Road
Leighton Buzzard/Beds. LU7 8TL
Phone: +44-1525-850000
Telefax: +44-1525-850011
GRUNDFOS Pompe România SRL
Bd. Biruintei, nr 103
Pantelimon county Ilfov
Phone: +40 21 200 4100
Telefax: +40 21 200 4101
E-mail: [email protected]
GRUNDFOS Pumps Corporation
17100 West 118th Terrace
Olathe, Kansas 66061
Phone: +1-913-227-3400
Telefax: +1-913-227-3500
Russia
ɉɪɟɞɫɬɚɜɢɬɟɥɶɫɬɜɨ ȽɊɍɇȾɎɈɋ ɜ
Ɍɚɲɤɟɧɬɟ
700000 Ɍɚɲɤɟɧɬ ɭɥ.ɍɫɦɚɧɚ ɇɨɫɢɪɚ 1-ɣ
ɬɭɩɢɤ 5
Ɍɟɥɟɮɨɧ: (3712) 55-68-15
Ɏɚɤɫ: (3712) 53-36-35
ɈɈɈ Ƚɪɭɧɞɮɨɫ
Ɋɨɫɫɢɹ, 109544 Ɇɨɫɤɜɚ, ɭɥ. ɒɤɨɥɶɧɚɹ
39
Ɍɟɥ. (+7) 495 737 30 00, 564 88 00
Ɏɚɤɫ (+7) 495 737 75 36, 564 88 11
E-mail [email protected]
Serbia
GRUNDFOS Predstavništvo Beograd
Dr. Milutina Ivkoviüa 2a/29
YU-11000 Beograd
Phone: +381 11 26 47 877 / 11 26 47 496
Telefax: +381 11 26 48 340
Singapore
GRUNDFOS (Singapore) Pte. Ltd.
25 Jalan Tukang
Singapore 619264
Phone: +65-6681 9688
Telefax: +65-6681 9689
Slovenia
GRUNDFOS d.o.o.
Šlandrova 8b, SI-1231 Ljubljana-ýrnuþe
Phone: +386 1 568 0610
Telefax: +386 1 568 0619
E-mail: [email protected]
South Africa
GRUNDFOS (PTY) LTD
Corner Mountjoy and George Allen Roads
Wilbart Ext. 2
Bedfordview 2008
Phone: (+27) 11 579 4800
Fax: (+27) 11 455 6066
E-mail: [email protected]
Uzbekistan
Revised 27.04.2012
Grundfos companies
Argentina
Being responsible is our foundation
Thinking ahead makes it possible
Innovation is the essence
98091805 0812
ECM: -
www.grundfos.com
7KHQDPH*UXQGIRVWKH*UXQGIRVORJRDQGWKHSD\RIIE
EHWKLQNLQQRYDWHDUHUHJLVWHUHGWUDGHPDUNV
RZQHGE\*UXQGIRV+ROGLQJ$6RU*UXQGIRV$6'HQPDUN$OOULJKWVUHVHUYHGZRUOGZLGH
s
4
501
ACVATIX™
Electromotoric actuators for
valves
SAX..
with a 20 mm stroke
• SAX31..
• SAX61..
•
•
•
•
•
Operating voltage AC 230 V,
3-position control signal
Operating voltage AC/DC 24 V, control signal DC 0…10 V,
4…20 mA
SAX81.. Operating voltage AC/DC 24 V, 3-position control signal
SAX61.. Position feedback, override control,
choice of flow characteristic
For direct mounting on valves; no adjustments required
Manual adjuster, position indicator and status indication per LED
Optional functions with auxiliary switches, potentiometer,
function module, stem heating element
Use
For the operation of Siemens 2-port and 3-port valves, types V..F21.., V..F31..,
V..F40.., V..F41.., V..G41.. and VVF52.. with 20 mm stroke as control and safety
shut-off valves in heating, ventilation and air conditioning systems.
CE1N4501en
16.07.2010
Building Technologies
Type summary
Product
no.
SAX31.00
SAX31.03
Stock no.
Pos.
force
Stroke
S55150-A105
AC 230 V
S55150-A106
SAX61.03
SAX61.03U
S55150-A100
SAX81.00
SAX81.00U
SAX81.03
SAX81.03U
S55150-A102
S55150-A100-A100
Operating
voltage
20 mm
Spr.
ret.
time
Positioning
signal
120 s
3-Punkt
DC 0…10 V
DC 4…20 mA
0…1000 Ω
800 N
Pos.
time
30 s
-
LED
Manual
adjuster
Extra
functions
-
-

Position
feedback,
forced
control,
change of
characteristic
AC/DC 24 V
Push
and fix
120 s
S55150-A102-A100
3-Punkt
S55150-A103
-
-
30 s
S55150-A103-A100
Electrical accessories
Auxiliary
Potentiometer
switch
Product no.
ASZ7.5/..
ASC10.51
Artikelnummer
S55845-Z103
1)
S55845-Z104 (ASZ7.5/135)
S55845-Z105 (ASZ7.5/200)
S55845-Z106 (ASZ7.5/1000)
Function
Stem heating
module
element
AZX61.1
ASZ6.6
S55845-Z107
S55845-Z108
Max. 2
SAX31..
SAX61..
SAX81..
1)
Mechanical Acessories
Max. 2
Max. 1
-
Max. 2
Max. 1
Max. 1
Max. 1 AZX61.1
-
Max. 1
Available with 135 Ω, 200 Ω or 1000 Ω
Weather shield ASK39.1
Ordering
Example
Product no.
SAX81.03
ASZ7.5/1000
Stock no.
S55150-A103
S55845-Z106
Delivery
Actuators, valves and accessories are supplied in individual packs.
Housing cover
Spare parts
Product number /
Stock number
Description
Actuator
Potentiometer
Quantity
1
1
Screw (valve stem coupling)
U-bracket
8000060843
2/8
Siemens
Building Technologies
Electromotoric actuators for valves
CE1N4501en
16.07.2010
Combinations
Type reference
DN
PN class
2-port valves VV.. (control or safety shutoff valves)
VVF21..
flange
25...80
6
VVF31..
flange
15...80
10
VVF40..
flange
15…80
16
VVF41..
flange
50
VVG41..
thread
15…50
VVF52..
flange
15…40
25
kvs
3
[m /h]
Data sheet
1.9…100
2.5…100
1.9…100
19 / 31
0.63…40
0.16…25
N4310
N4320
N4330
N4340
N4363
N4373
3-port valves VX.. (control valves for "mixing" and "diverting" functions)
VXF21..
flange
25…80
6
1.9…100
VXF31..
flange
15…80
10
2.5…100
VXF40..
flange
15…80
1.9…100
16
VXF41..
flange
1.9…31
15…50
1.6…40
VXG41..
thread
N4410
N4420
N4430
N4440
N4463
Product documentation
Detailed Informations about the New Generation actuators can be found in the Basic
documentation "Electromotoric actuators SAX.." (CE1P4040_01en).
Notes
Engineering
SAX31.. and SAX81..
3-position actuators must have their own specific controller, refer to "Connection
Diagrams" (page 7).
SAX61..
Up to 10 actuators can drive in parallel on a controller output with a rating of 1 mA.
Modulating actuators have an input impedance of 100 kΩ.
Mounting
Indoor use
Outdoor use
1)
Maintenance
1)
Only in connection with weather shield ASK39.1
The actuators are maintenance-free.
Warranty
The engineering data specified in chapter "Combinations" (page 3) are only
guaranteed in connection with the Siemens valves listed.
Note
When using the actuators in connection with valves of other manufacture,
correct functioning must be ensured by the user, and Siemens will assume
no responsibility.
3/8
Siemens
Building Technologies
Electromotoric actuators for valves
CE1N4501en
16.07.2010
Techncal Data
SAX..
Power supply
Function data
Signal inputs
Parallel operation
Forced control
Operating voltage
SAX31..
SAX61..
SAX81..
Frequency
Fusing of supply lines
Power consumption at 50 Hz
SAX31.00
Stem retracts / extends
SAX31.03
Stem retracts / extends
SAX61.03..
Stem retracts / extends
SAX81.00..
Stem retracts / extends
SAX81.03..
Stem retracts / extends
Positioning times (with the specified nominal stroke)
The positioning time can vary, depending on the type
of valve -> refer chapter "Type summary" (page 2)
SAX31.00, SAX81.00..
SAX31.03, SAX61.03.., SAX81.03..
Positioning force
Nominal stroke
Permissible medium temperature (valve fitted)
Positioning signal ”Y”
SAX31.., SAX81..
SAX31..
Voltage
SAX81..
Voltage
SAX61.. (DC 0...10 V) Current draw
Input impedance
SAX61.. (DC 4...20 mA) Current draw
Input impedance
SAX61..
Positioning signal ”Z”
SAX61..
R = 0…1000 Ω
Z connected to G
Z connected to G0
Voltage
Position feedback
Position feedback U
Connecting cable
Wire cross-sectional areas
Cable entries
Current draw
SAX61..
Load impedance
Load
SAX..
SAX..U
Degree of protection
Environmental conditions
Standards
Housing from vertical to horizontal
Insulation class
Actuators SAX31..
AC 230 V
Actuators SAX61..
AC / DC 24 V
Actuators SAX81..
AC / DC 24 V
Operation
Climatic conditions
Mounting location
Temperature General
with spindle heating element ASZ6.6
Humidity (noncondensing)
Transport
Climatic conditions
Temperature
Humidity
Storage
Temperature
Humidity
Max. media temperatur when mounted on valve
CE conformity
As per EMC directive
Immunity
Emmissions
Electrical safety
Low-voltage directive
AC 230 V
C-tick
UL conformity
AC 230 V
AC/DC 24 V
AC 230 V ±15%
AC 24 V ± 20% / DC 24 V + 20% / -15%
AC 24 V ±20% / DC 24 V + 20 % / -15%
45…65Hz
Max. 10 A slow
3.5 VA / 2 W
8 VA / 3.5 W
8 VA / 3.75 W
3.5 VA / 2.25 W
8 VA / 3.75 W
120 s
30 s
800 N
20 mm
-25…150 °C
3-position
AC 230 V ±15%
AC 24 V ± 20 % / DC 24 V + 20 % / -15%
≤ 0.1 mA
≥100 kΩ
DC 4...20 mA ± 1%
≤500 Ω
≤ 10 (depending on controler output)
R = 0…1000 Ω, G, G0
Stroke proportional to R
1)
Max. stroke 100%
1)
Min. stroke 0%
Max. AC 24 V ± 20%
Max. DC 24 V + 20% / -15%
≤ 0.1 mA
DC 0...10 V ± 1%
>10 kΩ res.
Max. 1 mA
2
2)
0.13…1.5 mm , AWG 24…16
EU:
2 entries ∅ 20.5 mm (for M20)
1 entry ∅ 25.5 mm (for M25)
US:
3 entries ∅ 21.5 mm for ½“ tube
connection
3)
IP54 as per EN 60529
As per EN 60730
II
III
III
IEC 60721-3-3
Class 3K5
Indoors (weather-protected)
-5…55 °C
-15…55 °C
5…95% r.h.
IEC 60721-3-2
Class 2K3
-25…70 °C
<95% r.h.
IEC 60721-3-1
-15…55 °C
5…95% r.h.
150 °C
2004/108/EC
4)
EN 61000-6-2:[2005] Industrial
EN 61000-6-3:[2007] Residential
EN 60730-1
2006/95/EC
N 474
UL 873
4/8
Siemens
Building Technologies
Electromotoric actuators for valves
CE1N4501en
16.07.2010
SAX..
ISO 14001 (environment)
ISO 9001 (quality)
SN 36350 (environment-compatible products)
RL 2002/95/EG (RoHS)
Environmental compatibility
Dimensions
Accessories
Potentiometer ASZ7.5/135
Voltage
Current rating
Potentiometer ASZ7.5/200
Voltage
Current rating
Potentiometer ASZ7.5/1000
Auxiliary switch ASC10.51
Stem heating element ASZ6.6
Voltage
Current rating
Switching capacity
See "Dimensions" (page 8)
0…135 Ω ± 5%
DC 10 V
<4 mA
0…200 Ω ± 5%
DC 10 V
<4 mA
0…1000 Ω ± 5%
DC 10 V
<4 mA
AC 24…230 V, 6 A res., 3 A ind.
AC 24 V, 30 W
1)
Observe acting direction of DIL switches
AWG = American wire gauge
3)
Also with weather shield ASK39.1
4)
Transformer 160 VA (e.g. Siemens 4AM 3842-4TN00-0EA0) for actuators operating on AC 24 V
2)
Connection Diagrams
Internal Diagrams
SAX31..
A
Accessories
and / or
B
1x ASC10.51
1x ASC10.51
or 1 x ASZ7.5/..
SAX61..
A
Accessories
and / or
1x ASC10.51
B
1x ASC10.51
5/8
Siemens
Building Technologies
Electromotoric actuators for valves
CE1N4501en
16.07.2010
SAX81..
A
Accessories
and / or
B
1x ASC10.51
1x ASC10.51
or 1 x ASZ7.5/..
Connection terminals
SAX31..
AC 230 V, 3-position
Sytem neutral (SN)
Positioning signal (actuator’s stem extends)
Positioning signal (actuator’s stem retracts)
SAX61..
AC/DC 24 V, DC 0…10 V / 4…20 mA / 0…1000 Ω
Sytem neutral (SN)
Sytem potential (SP)
Positioning signal for DC 0…10 V / 4…20 mA
Measuring neutral
Position feedback DC 0...10 V
Positioning signal forced control
SAX81..
AC/DC 24 V, 3-position
Sytem potential (SP)
Positioning signal (actuator’s stem extends)
Positioning signal (actuator’s stem retracts)
6/8
Siemens
Building Technologies
Electromotoric actuators for valves
CE1N4501en
16.07.2010
Connection Diagrams
SAX31..
A
L
N
N1
Y1, Y2
Actuator
Phase
Neutral
Controller
Positioning signals
SAX61..
A
F2
F3
F4
M
N1
SN
SP
U
Y
Z
Actuator
Frost protection thermostat; terminals:
1 – 2 frost hazard / sensor is interrupted (thermostat closes with frost)
1 – 3 normal operation
Temperature detector
Frost protection monitor with 0…1000 Ω signal output, does NOT support QAF21.. or QAF61..
Measuring neutral
Controler
System neutral
System potential AC/DC 24 V
Position feedback
Position signal
Positioning signal forced control
SAX81..
A
N1
SN
SP
Y1, Y2
Actuator
controller
System neutral
System potential AC/DC 24 V
Positioning signals
7/8
Siemens
Building Technologies
Electromotoric actuators for valves
CE1N4501en
16.07.2010
Dimensions
Product no.
A
B
C
SAX..(U )
242
124
150
68
82
80
With ASK39.1
+25
154
300
200
100
-
1)
1)
C1
C2
D
E
►
►►
100
100
200
-
-
-
Dimensions in mm
SAX..U: For 1/2" tube connections (21.5 mm dia.)
Revision numbers
Product no.
SAX31.00
SAX31.03
SAX61.03..
SAX81.00..
SAX81.03..
8/8
 2010 Siemens Switzerland Ltd
Siemens
Building Technologies
Electromotoric actuators for valves
Valid from rev. no.
..A
..A
..A
..A
..A
Subject to change
CE1N4501en
16.07.2010
1
1790P01
790
Immersion Temperature
Sensors
QAE26.9...
Use
Acquisition of flow or return temperature in heating, ventilating, and air conditioning
plants.
Type summary
Type
Measuring range
Cable
length
Time
constant
Mounting
length
Nominal
pressure
QAE26.9
− 40...+ 180 °C
1,2 m
<3 s
260 mm
PN 40
QAE26.90
− 50...+ 180 °C
2,0 m
< 2,5 s
65 mm
PN 16
QAE26.91
− 50...+ 180 °C
2,0 m
< 2,5 s
125 mm
PN 16
QAE26.93
− 50...+ 180 °C
2,0 m
< 2.5 s
240 mm
PN 16
QAE26.95
− 50...+ 180 °C
2,0 m
< 2.5 s
465 mm
PN 16
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Ordering
When ordering, please indicate give name and type reference, for example:
Immersion temperature sensor QAE26.9.
Equipment combinations
All systems or devices capable of acquiring and handling the sensor’s passive
LG-Ni 1000 output signal.
CM1N1790en
27.04.2004
Siemens Building Technologies
HVAC Products
.
.
.
Function
The sensor acquires the medium temperature via its sensing element whose resistance
value changes as a function of the temperature.
The signal is delivered for further handling by a suitable controller.
Sensing element
Characteristic:
R [Ω]
2000
1790D01
1800
1600
1400
1200
1000
800
ϑ
600
−50 −40 −30 −20 −10
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 [°C]
0
10
Accuracy:
∆ϑ [K]
1790D02
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
−0.5
−1.0
−1.5
−2.0
−50 −40 −30 −20 −10
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180
ϑ
[°C]
Mechanical design
The immersion temperature sensor consists of a stainless steel immersion stem, a
threaded bushing, and ready-wired connection cables. The sensing element is mounted
and soldered to the end of the immersion stem by means of a heat transfer compound.
The threaded bushing with screwed nipple R ¼ (sealing capacity within thread) is used
to mount the sensor on the pipe. The interface between the connection cable and the
immersion step is capped by a ca. 30 mm long shrink sleeve.
2/4
Siemens Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Immersion temperature sensors QAE26.9...
CM1N1790en
27.04.2004
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Technical data
Functional data
Degree of protection
Electrical connection
Mechanical connection
Ambient conditions
Materials
Weight
Measuring range
.
.
.
.
.
.
refer to "Type summary"
Sensing element
LG-Ni 1000
Time constant
see "Type summary"
Measuring accuracy
refer to "Function"
Mounting length
refer to "Type summary"
Effective sensor length
QAE26.9
QAE26.90, QAE26.91, QAE26.93, QAE26.95
25 mm
15 mm
IP code
IP 64 as per IEC 529
Protection class
III as per EN 60 730
Connection cables
two-wire
Core cross section
QAE26.9
QAE26.90, QAE26.91, QAE26.93, QAE26.95
0.35 mm2
0.14 mm2
Cable length
refer to "Type summary"
Screwed nipple
R ¼ (sealing capacity inside thread)
.
.
.
.
.
Permissible cable temperature
− 50...+ 180 °C
Permissible humidity
< 95 % r.h.
Immersion stem
stainless steel 1.4571 (V4A)
Threaded bushing
Ms nickel-plated
Connection cables
silicone
incl. packing
QAE26.9
QAE26.90
QAE26.91
QAE26.93
QAE26.95
.
.
.
.
.
0.104 kg
0.074 kg
0.074 kg
0.079 kg
0.093 kg
Engineering notes
The permissible electrical line lengths depend on the controller. Refer to the respective
controller's data sheet for more information.
Mounting and installation notes
To mount the immersion temperature sensor, weld a T-junction or a threaded fitting
with a cylindrical pipe thread for a sealing connection inside the thread (Rp ¼) so that
the immersion stem faces the direction of the flow.
In order to ensure temperature acquisition along the entire immersion stem, the
immersion length for the QAE26.9 must be at least 25 mm and 15 mm for QAE26.90,
QAE26.91, QAE26.93 and QAE26.95.
If the connection cable needs to be extended, use a branching box.
.
.
.
3/4
Siemens Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Immersion temperature sensors QAE26.9...
CM1N1790en
27.04.2004
1790G01
Internal diagram
The internal diagram applies to all types.
The connections are interchangeable.
SW 14
1790M01
R¼
ø6
QAE26.9
ø4
Dimensions (in mm)
SW 14
12
40
min. 25, max. 260
1200
SW 14
SW 12
1790M02
ø4
QAE26.90, QAE26.91
QAE26.93, QAE26.95
R¼
ca. 310
12
40
L1
2000
L2
Type
QAE26.90
QAE26.91
QAE26.93
QAE26.95
min.
15
15
15
15
L1
max.
65
125
240
465
L2
ca. 100
ca. 160
ca. 275
ca. 500
4/4
 2000 Siemens Building Technologies AG
Subject to change
Siemens Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Immersion temperature sensors QAE26.9...
CM1N1790en
27.04.2004
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1811P01
1
811
QAC...
FW-T1G
Outside Sensors
• Passive sensors for acquiring the outside temperature and – to a lesser
degree – solar radiation, the wind effect and the temperature of the wall.
• Range of use -40/50…+70 °C / 5…95 % r. F.
Use
The QAC… outside sensors are for use in heating, ventilation and air conditioning
plants as:
• Reference sensors for weather-compensated control
• Measuring sensors, e.g. for optimization, measured value indication, or for connection to a building automation and control system
Type summary
Type reference Sensing element Range of use
Time constant
QAC22
LG-Ni 1000
− 50...+ 70 °C
ca. 14 min
QAC32
NTC 575
(linearized)
− 50...+ 70 °C
ca. 12 min
QAC2010
Pt 100
− 50...+ 70 °C
ca. 14 min
QAC2012
Pt 1000
− 50...+ 70 °C
ca. 14 min
QAC2030
NTC10k
− 40...+ 70 °C
ca. 14 min
FW-T1G
T1 (PTC)
− 50...+ 70 °C
ca. 14 min
Ordering and delivery
When ordering, please give name and type reference, e.g.:
Outside sensor QAC22.
CE1N1811E
20.11.2006
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
…
…
.
Equipment combinations
The outside sensors are suited for use with all types of controllers capable of acquiring
and handling the sensor’s measured value.
Function
The outside sensor acquires the outside temperature and − to a lesser degree − solar
radiation, the wind effect and the temperature of the wall. The sensing element
changes its resistance value as a function of the temperature.
Characteristic:
Accuracy:
R [Ω]
LG-Ni 1000
∆ϑ [K]
1400
2.0
1200
1.0
1000
0.0
800
−1.0
600
−50 −40 −30 −20 −10
0
10
ϑ
[°C]
20 30 40 50 60 70 80
1811D02
1811D01
−2.0
−50 −40 −30 −20 −10
R [Ω]
NTC 575
ϑ
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 [°C]
∆ϑ [K]
1811D03
700
3.0
1811D04
Sensing elements
2.0
650
1.0
600
0.0
550
−1.0
500
−2.0
450
−50 −40 −30 −20 −10
0
10
20 30 40 50 60 70 80
ϑ
[°C]
−3.0
−50 −40 −30 −20 −10
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
ϑ
[°C]
140
120
∆ϑ [K]
1811D06
1811D05
R [Ω]
Pt 100 (class B)
0.8
0.4
0.0
100
−0.4
80
−0.8
60
−50 −40 −30 −20 −10
0
10
20 30 40 50 60 70
ϑ
80 [°C]
−50 −40 −30 −20 −10
ϑ
[°C]
1400
1200
∆ϑ [K]
1811D06
1811D07
R [Ω]
Pt 1000 (class B)
0.8
0.4
0.0
1000
−0.4
800
−0.8
600
−50 −40 −30 −20 −10
0
10
20 30 40 50 60 70
ϑ
80 [°C]
−50 −40 −30 −20 −10
ϑ
[°C]
2/4
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Outside sensors QAC...
CE1N1811E
20.11.2006
R [Ω]
∆ϑ [K]
1811D09
1000000
100000
10000
1000
-40 -30 -20 -10
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
ϑ
[°C]
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
ϑ
[°C]
R [Ω]
1819D01
3200
3000
∆ϑ [K]
5.0
4.0
2800
3.0
2600
2.0
2400
1.0
2200
0.0
2000
−1.0
−2.0
1800
−3.0
−4.0
1600
1400
−40 −30 −20 −10
R
ϑ
∆ϑ
1819D02
T1 (PTC)
Legend
1.20
1.00
0.80
0.60
0.40
0.20
0.00
-0.20
-0.40
-0.60
-0.80
-1.00
-1.20
-40 -30 -20 -10
1811D08
NTC 10k
0
10
20 30 40 50 60 70
ϑ
80 [°C]
−5.0
−40 −30 −20 −10
ϑ
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 [°C]
Resistance in Ohm
Temperature in degrees Celsius
Temperature differential in Kelvin
Mechanical design
The sensor has a plastic housing with a removable cover.
The connection terminals can be accessed after removal of the cover.
Cable entry is either from the rear (concealed wiring) or from below (surface-run wires).
A cable entry gland can be screwed into the bottom of the housing.
Engineering notes
The permissible cable lengths depend on the type of controller with which the sensor is
used. They are specified in the Data Sheet of the relevant controller.
Mounting notes
Depending on use, the outside sensor must be located as follows:
Mounting location
• For control:
On the wall of the house or building that has the windows of the occupied rooms, but
the sensor must not be exposed to the morning sun. In case of doubt, it should be
mounted on the wall facing north or north-west
• For optimization:
Always on the coldest wall of the house or building (normally the wall facing north).
The sensor must never be exposed to the morning sun
Mounting height
Preferably in the middle of the house or building or heating zone, but at least 2.5 m
above the ground.
The sensor must not be fitted at the following locations:
• Above windows, doors, air extracts or other heat sources
• Below balconies or the eave of the roof
To prevent measuring errors due to air circulation, the cable conduit at the sensor
should be sealed.
The sensor may not be painted over.
Mounting Instructions are printed on the packaging.
3/4
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Outside sensors QAC...
CE1N1811E
20.11.2006
Technical data
Functional data
Protective data
Electrical connections
Environmental conditions
Materials and colors
Weight
Range of use
refer to "Type summary"
Sensing element
refer to "Type summary"
Time constant
refer to "Type summary"
Accuracy
refer to "Function"
Type of measurement and output
passive
Degree of protection of housing
IP 54 to IEC 529
Safety class
III to EN 60 730
Screw terminals for
2 x 1.5 mm or 1 x 2.5 mm
2
2
Cable entry for
cable gland (e.g. M 16 x 1.5)
Perm. cable length
refer to "Engineering notes"
Operation
Climatic conditions
Temperature
Humidity
− 40...+ 70 °C
0 . . . 1 0 0 % r. h.
Storage / transport to
Climatic conditions
Temperature
Humidity
Mechanical conditions
IEC 721-3-2
class 2K3
− 25...+ 65 °C
< 95 % r. h.
class 2M2
Base
plastic (ASA)
.
.
Cover
plastic (ASA), RAL9003
Packaging
cardboard
Incl. packaging
approx. 0.093 kg
B
M
1811G01
Internal diagram
The internal diagram is identical for all types of outside sensors covered by this Data
Sheet.
The connecting wires are interchangeable.
Dimensions
6
4
20,7
92
5,5
3
5,5
.
.
Ø 16
50
25
24,5
49,5
1811M03
80
Drilling plan
Dimension in mm
4/4
©2004 - 2006Siemens Switzerland Ltd
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Outside sensors QAC...
Subject to alteration
CE1N1811E
20.11.2006
1801P01
1
801
QAD2…
FA-T1G
Strap-on
temperature sensor
• Strap-on sensor for acquiring the temperature of pipework.
• Range of use -30… 125/130 °C / 5…95 % r. F. non-condensing
(not suitably for chillers)
Use
Acquisition of temperature of pipework for
• controlling or limiting the flow temperature
• limiting the return temperature
• controlling the d.h.w. temperature
Type summary
Type reference
QAD22
QAD2010
QAD2012
QAD2030
FA-T1G
Sensing element
Range of use
Time constant
LG-Ni 1000
Pt 100
Pt 1000
NTC 10k
T1 (PTC)
-30…+130 °C
-30…+130 °C
-30…+130 °C
-30…+125 °C
-30…+130 °C
3s
3s
3s
6s
3s
Ordering
When ordering, please give type reference,z.B:
Strap-on temperature sensor QAD2…
CE1N1801E
23.11.2006
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Equipment combinations
The QAD2… is suited for use with all types of controllers that can handle analog
passive sensor signals.
Function
The sensor's nickel sensing element acquires the temperature of pipework.
The resistance of the sensing element changes as a function of the medium
temperature. The resistance value is used for handling by a suitable controller.
Sensing element
LG-Ni1000
Characteristic
Accuracy
∆ϑ [K]
R [Ω]
1.5
1600
1.0
1400
0.5
1200
0.0
1000
−0.5
800
−1.0
600
−40 −30 −20 −10
0
10
Pt 100 (Kl. B)
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
ϑ
[°C]
1801D02
1801D01
1800
−1.5
−40 −30 −20 −10
0
Characteristic
10
ϑ
[°C]
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
Accuracy
R [Ω]
1847D02
∆ϑ [K]
1847D01
160
0.8
140
0.4
120
0.0
100
80
−40 −30 −20 −10
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
Pt 1000 (Kl. B)
ϑ
[°C]
Characteristic
−40 −30 −20 −10
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
ϑ
[°C]
Accuracy
2/6
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Clamp-on temperature sensor QAD2…
CE1N1801E
23.11.2006
R [Ω]
1847D06
∆ϑ [K]
1847D05
1600
0.8
1400
0.4
0.0
1200
−0.4
1000
−0.8
800
−40 −30 −20 −10
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
NTC 10k
ϑ
[°C]
−40 −30 −20 −10
Characteristic
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
ϑ
[°C]
Accuracy
∆ϑ [K]
R [Ω]
100000
10000
1000
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
T1 (PTC)
ϑ
[°C]
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.0
-0.2
-0.4
-0.6
-0.8
-1.0
-1.2
-1.4
-1.6
-1.8
1847D08
1847D09
1000000
100
-30 -20 -10
0
-30 -20 -10
0
Characteristic
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
ϑ
[°C]
Accuracy
3600
3400
∆ϑ [K]
5.0
4.0
3200
3.0
3000
2.0
2800
1.0
2600
0.0
−1.0
2400
−2.0
2200
−3.0
2000
1800
−30 −20 −10
1781D06
1781D05
R [Ω]
−4.0
0
10
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
Legend
R
ϑ
∆ϑ
ϑ
[°C]
−5.0
−30 −20 −10
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
ϑ
[°C]
Resistance in Ohm
Temperature in degrees Celsius
Temperature differential in Kelvin
Mechanical design
The strap-on temperature sensor consists of the following components:
• Two-sectional plastic housing comprised of base with connection terminals, grommet
and removable cover (snap-on design)
• The coupling sheet with sensing element is flexible and adapts to the pipe's surface
• Mounting clamp (adjustable strap-on band) for pipe diameters from 15...140 mm
The connection terminals can be accessed after removing the housing cover. Cable
entry is made via a grommet (tension relief into housing). If required, the grommet can
be replaced by a Pg 11 cable entry gland.
3/6
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Clamp-on temperature sensor QAD2…
CE1N1801E
23.11.2006
Technical data
General sensor data
Range of use
refer to "Type summary"
Sensing element
refer to "Type summary"
Time constant t63
refer to “Typ summary”
(referred to the pipe's surface)
Measurement accuracy
refer to “Function”
Measured medium
water, other liquid media
Type of measurement and output
passive
Degree of protection
and safety class
Degree of protection
IP 42 as per IEC 529
Safety class
III as per EN 60 730
Electrical connections
Screw terminals for
max. 1 x 2.5 mm2
Cable entry
Pg 11 cable entry gland
Permitted cable lengths
grommet for cable of 5.5...7.2 mm dia.
can be fitted
refer to Data Sheet of controller
Operation
Climatic conditions
Temperature (housing)
Humidity (housing)
as per IEC 721-3-3
class 3K5
– 5...+ 50 °C
5...95 % r.h.
Transport
Climatic conditions
Temperature
Humidity
Mechanical conditions
as per IEC 721-3-2
class 2K3
– 25...+ 70 °C
< 95 % r.h.
class 2M2
Base
PA-GF35
Housing cover
Adjustable strap-on band
ASA Luran S
stainless steel
Packaging
cardboard
Colors
Base
Housing cover
silver-grey, RAL 7001
light-grey, RAL 7035
Weight
without packaging
incl. packaging
0.072 kg
0.083 kg
Environmental conditions
Materials
4/6
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Clamp-on temperature sensor QAD2…
CE1N1801E
23.11.2006
Engineering notes
The permissible cable lengths are dependent on the controller with which the sensor is
used. They are specified in the Data Sheet of the relevant controller.
Mounting and installation notes
Depending on the application, the sensor is to be located as follows:
• For flow temperature control:
In the heating flow:
− Directly after the pump if the pump is located in the flow
− 1.5 to 2 m after the mixing valve if the pump is located in the return
• For limiting the return temperature:
In the return at a location where the temperature can be correctly acquired
The water must be well mixed where the temperature is acquired.
The pipe may not be laagged in the vicinity of the sensor.
The sensor should be mounted such that the cable does not enter from the top.
Not permitted mounting
position
Fixing
1801Z08
~100 mm
Permitted mounting positions
Mounting Instructions are printed on the packaging.
– Remove any paint on the pipe before
fitting the strap-on temperature
sensor.
– Ensure that the sensor is fixed firmly
with the adjustable band supplied.
70106
5/6
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Clamp-on temperature sensor QAD2…
CE1N1801E
23.11.2006
B
M
1801G01
Internal diagram
The connecting wires are interchangeable.
22,2
42,2
60
∅ 15...140
6/6
© 2000 - 2006 Siemens Switzerland Ltd.
Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Clamp-on temperature sensor QAD2…
67
∅ 5,5...9
1801M01
20
60
∅ 4,5
11
Dimensions (in mm)
Subject to alteration
CE1N1801E
23.11.2006
4
361
Modulating control valves
MVF461H...
PN16 with magnetic
actuators
with position control and position feedback signal
for hot water, hight temperature hot water and steam
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Short positioning time (<2 s), high resolution (1 : 1000)
Selectable valve characteristic: Equal-percentage or linear
High rangeability
Selectable standard interface DC 0/2...10 V or DC 0/4... 20 mA
Phase-cut signal input for Staefa controllers
Position control and position feedback signal
Wear-free inductive stroke measurement
Spring return facility: A → AB closed when deenergized
Low friction, robust and maintenance-free
Use
The MVF461H...valve types are through-port control valves with fitted magnetic
actuator. The actuator is equipped with connecting electronics for positioning control
and position feedback. When deenergized, the valve is closed.
The short positioning time, high resolution and high rangeability make these valves
ideal for proportional control of district heating stations and heating plant using HTHW
and steam.
CE1N4361en
11.11.2003
Siemens Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Type summary
Type reference
DN
kVS
∆pmax
∆pS
SNA
Pmed
IN
[m3/h]
[kPa]
[kPa]
[VA]
[W]
Fuse
[A]
Wire cross-section [mm2]
4- wire connection
1.5
2.5
4.0
Max. cable length L [m]
MVF461H15-0.6
15
0.6
1000
1000
33
15
3.15
60
100
160
MVF461H15-1.5
15
1.5
1000
1000
33
15
3.15
60
100
160
MVF461H15-3
15
3
1000
1000
33
15
3.15
60
100
160
MVF461H20-5
20
5
1000
1000
33
15
3.15
60
100
160
MVF461H25-8
25
8
1000
1000
33
15
3.15
60
100
160
MVF461H32-12
32
12
1000
1000
43
20
4
40
70
120
MVF461H40-20
40
20
1000
1000
65
20
6.3
30
50
80
MVF461H50-30
50
30
1000
1000
65
26
6.3
30
50
80
∆pmax = max. permissible differential pressure across the valve’s control path, valid for the entire
actuating range of the motorised valve (maximum recommended operating differential
pressure)
= max. permissible differential pressure at which the motorised valve will close securely against
∆pS
the pressure (close off pressure)
SNA
= nominal apparent power for selecting the transformer
Pmed = average true power
= slow fuse (mandatory)
IN
kVS
= nominal flow rate of cold water (5 to 30 °C) through the fully openend valve (H100) at a
differential pressure of 100 kPa (1 bar)
L
= max. cable length; with 4-wire connections, the max. permissible length of the separate 1.5
2
mm copper positioning signal cable is 200 m
Ordering
When ordering, please give quantity, product name and type reference.
Valve body and magnetic actuator form one assembly and cannot be separated.
Example:
1 valve MVF461H15-0.6
Technical and mechanical design
For a detailed description of operation, refer to Data Sheet CA1N4028E.
Automatic control
The electronics module converts the positioning signal to a phase-cut power signal
which generates a magnetic field in the coil. This causes the armature to change its
position in accordance with the interacting forces (magnetic field, counterspring,
hydraulics, etc.). The armature responds rapidly to any change in signal, transferring
the corresponding movement directly to the valve plug, enabling fast changes in load to
be corrected quickly and accurately.
The valve’s position is measured continuously. Any disturbance in the system is rapidly
corrected by the internal positioning controller, which ensures that the positioning signal
and the valve stroke are exactly proportional, and also delivers the position feedback
signal.
Control
The magnetic actuator can be driven by a Siemens controller or a controller of other
manufacture that deliver a DC 0/2 ...10 V or DC 0/4 ... 20 mA output signal.
To achieve optimum control performance, it is recommended to use a 4-wire
connection for the valve. In case of DC power supply, a 4-wire connection is
mandatory!
The controller’s signal ground terminal M must be connected to the valve’s terminal M.
Terminals M and GO have the same potential and are internally interconnected in the
valve’s electronics.
2/10
Siemens Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modulating control valves PN16 with magnetic actuators
CE1N4361en
11.11.2003
Basic diagram
Power
Supply
G0
Power
Control
G
0/4 ... 20 mA
Stroke
Control
M
0/2 ... 10 V
U
0/4 ... 20 mA
DIP-Switch
1
Phs
Phs
SPh
0 ... 20 V/DC
Green / Red
X3 AMP
Bus-Subprint
2
Handcontrol
3
ON ON ON
Calib.
B-Mode
If the positioning signal is interrupted, or in the event of a power failure, the valve’s
return spring will automatically close control path A → AB.
LED
Indication
Remarks, troubleshooting
Lit
Operating state,
function
Control mode
Green
Flashing
Calibration
Lit
In manual control
Calibration error
Internal error
Wait until calibration is finished
(green or red LED will be lit)
Hand wheel in Man or Off position
Recalibrate (bridge contacts behind the calibration slot)
Replace electronics module
Red
Flashing
Both
Manual control
Stroke
Sensor
Micro
Controller
Z
Indication of
operating state
M
0/2 ... 10 V
Y
Spring return facility
1M
Dark
Mains fault
DC Supply - / +
No power supply
Electronics faulty
Normal operation; everything o.k.
Check mains network (outside the frequency or voltage
range); DC supply + / - connection rectify
Check mains network, check wiring
Replace electronics module
By pressing (a) and turning (b) the hand wheel
• in clockwise (CW) direction, control path A → AB can be
mechanically opened to between 80 and 90 %
• in counterclockwise (CCW) direction, the actuator will be
switched off and the valve closed
a
Man
b
Off
b
Auto
As soon as the hand wheel is pressed and turned, neither the
forced control signal Z nor the input signal Y or the phase-cut
signal acts on the actuator. The green LED will flash.
For automatic control, the hand wheel must be set to the
Auto position. The green LED will be lit.
Calibration
If the electronics module is replaced or the actuator turned through 180 °, the valve’s
electronics must be recalibrated. For that, the hand wheel must be set to Auto.
The printed circuit board has a slot. Calibration is made by bridging the
contacts located behind the slot using a screwdriver. The valve will then
travel across the full stroke to store the end positions.
01124
While calibration is in progress, the green LED will flash for about 10 seconds (also refer
to «Indication of operating state»).
3/10
Siemens Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modulating control valves PN16 with magnetic actuators
CE1N4361en
11.11.2003
Configuration
DIP switches
DIP
OFF (default)
ON
Remarks
Voltage or current
input
[V]
[ mA ]
Assignment of terminal Y:
Voltage or current
Correcting span
Terminals Y and U
0 ... 10 V,
0 ... 20 mA
2 ... 10 V,
4 ... 20 mA
Offset settings of input or
output
Characteristic
Vlin (Equalpercentage)
Vlin (linear)
1
ON
2 ... 10 V
4 ... 20 mA
Vlin
mA
V
Function
OFF
2
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Vlog
3
0 ... 10 V
0 ... 20 mA
ON
OFF
Assignment positioning signal Y:
Voltage or current
Y
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
0 ... 10 V
2 ... 10 V
0 ... 20 mA
4 ... 20 mA
Assignment of correcting span Y and U:
0 ... 10 V / 0 ... 20 mA oder
2 ... 10 V / 4 ... 20 mA
U
Selection of valve characteristic:
Equal-percentage or linear
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
.
V
Ri > 500 Ω
0 ... 10 V
2 ... 10 V
Ri < 500 Ω
0 ... 20 mA
4 ... 20 mA
.
V
Y
Y
Output signal U (position feedback signal) is dependent on
the load resistance. Above 500 Ω, it is automatically a
voltage signal, below 500 Ω a current signal.
Forced control input
If terminal Z for the forced control input
− is not connected, the valve will follow the Y-signal or the phase-cut signal
− is connected to G, the valve will fully open via control path A → AB
− is connected to G0, the valve will close via control path A → AB
Z-mode
Connections
no function
fully open
closed
G0
G0
G0
G
G
G
Y
Y
Y
M
M
M
U
U
U
Z
Z
Z
V A
V A
AB
100 %
V A
AB
AB
100 %
Transfer
100 %
0%
0%
Y
100 %
0%
0%
Y
100 %
0%
0%
Y
100 %
4/10
Siemens Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modulating control valves PN16 with magnetic actuators
CE1N4361en
11.11.2003
Signal priority
1.
2.
3.
4.
Hand wheel position Man or Off
Forced control signal Z
Phase-cut signal
Signal input Y
Dimension
4361D02
MVF461H...
pv
p 100 [%]
1
Saturated steam
flow chart
0,
k VS
b
6
1,
k VS
5
5
k VS
3
k VS
12
30
20
8
k VS k VS k VS k VS
a
0,42
0,30
0,20
0,15
0,10
0,05
100
200
300
500
1
2
3
5
3
1000 [k Pa]
7
10
4
5
7
101
2
3
4
5
7
102
2
3
4
5
103
7
2
[b ar ]
3 [k g /h ]
.
m
p1
p1
= absolute pressure at inlet side
p3
= absolute pressure at outlet side
Calculation of kvs
a) At below the critical pressure drop
p 1 - p3
p1
∆pv = differential pressure across the
valve
m
= volume of steam kg/h
k
= factor for superheated steam
kvs = 0.042
= 1 + 0.0013 x ∆T superheat
(with saturated steam k = 1)
Pressure ratio =
p1 - p3
p1
100 < 42 %
m
b) At above critical pressure drop
p1 - p3
p1
100 [%]
100 > 42 %
Pressure ratio < 42 % (below critical
press. drop)
m
kvs = 0.084
k
p1
Pressure ratio ≥ 42 % (above critical
press. drop)
Example to a) below critical
Example to b) above critical
Given:
Given:
Saturated steam =
133.54 [° C]
p1 = 3.0 [bar]
k
p3 (p1 - p3)
300 [kPa]
Saturated steam =
133.54 [° C]
p1 = 3.0 [bar]
300 [kPa]
m = 110 [kg/h]
m = 110 [kg/h]
Pressure ratio = 12 %
Pressure ratio: admissible,
above critical (≥ 42 %)
Required: kvs valve type
Required: kvs valve type
Solution:
Solution:
p3 = p1 = 3 -
12
100
12
100
kvs = 0.084
p1
110
2.64 (3 - 2.64)
3
1
= 3.08
3 = 2.64 [bar]
Selected: kvs = 3
264 [kPa]
kvs = 0.042
110
Typ MVF 461H15-3
1
= 4.739
Selected:
kvs = 5
Typ MVF 461H20-5
5/10
Siemens Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modulating control valves PN16 with magnetic actuators
CE1N4361en
11.11.2003
Water flow chart
4361D01
10 0
20
MVF461H...
30
D
DN
DN
.
V 100 [ m 3 / h ]
10
7
DN
5
4
DN
3
2
1
40
32
25
k
VS
k
VS
k
VS
k
VS
k
VS
k
VS
20
1
DN
5
1
DN
5
1
DN
10
20
12
5
4
8
3
5
2
7
3
1
0 ,7
k
1 ,5
VS
0 ,5
0 ,4
0 ,3
0 ,7
0 ,5
30
.
20
0
N5
5
k
0 ,6
p max.10 bar
50
40
V 100 [ l / s]
70
VS
0 ,4
0 ,3
0 ,2
0 ,2
0 ,1
0 ,0 7
0 ,0 5
10
20
30
50
70
100
200
300
0 ,1
0,2
0,3
0 ,5
0 ,7
1
2
3
500
5
700
7
1 00 0
[ k Pa ]
10
[b a r ]
p v100
∆pV100
= differential pressure across the fully open valve and the valve’s control path by a volume
flow V100
V100
= volume flow through the fully open valve (H100)
∆pmax
= max. permissible differential pressure across the valve’s control path for the entire actuating
range of the motorised valve (maximum recommendedoperatingdifferential pressure)
100 kPa = 1 bar ≈ 10 mWG
3
1 m /h = 0.278 l/s water at 20 °C
Valve characteristic
Equal-percentage
Linear
Volumetric flow
Volumetric flow
[%]
[%]
90063
100
80
80
60
60
40
40
20
20
0
90064
100
0
0
2
4
6
8
10 [V]
0
2
4
6
2
6
10 [V]
2
6
4
12
20 [mA]
4
12
Positioning signals
8
10 [V]
10 [V]
20 [mA]
Positioning signals
Mounting notes
The valve is supplied complete with Mounting Instructions 74 319 0378 0.
Caution
The valve may only be used in flow direction (A – AB).
Observe the direction of flow!
6/10
Siemens Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modulating control valves PN16 with magnetic actuators
CE1N4361en
11.11.2003
Mounting position
90°
IP31
90°
IP31
Installation notes
• The actuator may not be lagged
For electrical installation, refer to «Connection diagrams».
Maintenance notes
The low friction and robust, maintenance-free design makes regular servicing
unnecessary and ensure a long service life.
The valve stem is sealed from external influences by a maintenance-free gland.
If the red LED is lit, the electronics must be recalibrated or replaced.
Should the valve electronics prove faulty, the ASE12 electronics module must be
replaced (refer to Mounting Instructions 74 319 0404 0).
Caution
Always disconnect power before fitting or removing the electronics module.
After replacing the electronics module, calibration must be triggered in order to
optimally match the electronics to the valve (refer to «Calibration»).
Disposal notes
The actuator contains electric and electronic components and may not be disposed of
together with household waste.
Local and currently valid legislation must be observed.
Technical data
Power supply
• AC 24 V
• DC 24 V
Functional data of actuator
• Input
For use with low-voltage only (SELV, PELV)
Operating voltage
AC 24 V +20 / –15 %
Frequency
45 ... 65 Hz
Typical power consumption Pmed
refer to «Type summary»
Standby
< 1 W (valve fully closed)
Nominal apparent power SNA
refer to «Type summary»
Suitable fuse
slow (refer to «Type summary»)
Operating voltage
DC 20 ... 30 V
Control signal Y
Impedance
DC 0/2 ... 10 V
DC 0/4 ... 20 mA
DC 0/2 ... 10 V or DC 0/4 ... 20 mA
or DC 0 ... 20 V Phs
100 kΩ // 5nF
240 Ω // 5nF
Forced control
Impedance
22 kΩ
Closing the valve (Z connected to G0) < AC 1 V; < DC 0.8 V
Opening the valve (Z connected to G) > AC 6 V; > DC 5 V
7/10
Siemens Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modulating control valves PN16 with magnetic actuators
CE1N4361en
11.11.2003
• Output
Functional data of valve
No function (Z not wired up)
Position feedback signal voltage
current
Stroke measurement
Nonlinearity
Pressure class
Perm. operating pressure 1)
Differential pressure ∆pmax / ∆pS
Leakage rate at ∆p = 0.1 MPa (1 bar)
Medium temperature
Valve characteristic 2)
Materials
Electrical connections
Stroke resolution ∆H / H100
Control mode
Position when actuator is deenergized
Mounting position
Running time
Valve body
Covering flange
Seat / plug
Valve stem seal
Cable entries
Connection terminals
Min. cross-sectional area 3)
Max. cable length
Dimensions
Weight
1)
2)
3)
Norms and standards
phase-cut or control signal Y active
DC 0/2 ... 10 V; load resistance > 500 Ω
DC 0/4 ... 20 mA; load resistance ≤ 500 Ω
inductive
± 3 % of end value
PN16 to EN 1333
Water up to 120 °C: 1.6 MPa (16 bar)
Water above 120 °C: 1.3 MPa (13 bar)
Saturated steam: 0.9 MPa (9 bar)
1 MPa (10 bar)
A → AB max. 0.05 % kVS (to IEC 534-4)
>1 ... 180 °C
equal-percentage or linear,
optimized near the closing point
(refer to Data Sheet 4023)
1 : 1000 (H = stoke)
modulating
A → AB closed
upright to horizontal
<2s
modular cast iron EN-GJS-400-18-LT
modular cast iron EN-GJS-400-18-LT
CrNi-steel
EPDM (O-ring)
3 x M20 x 1.5 or PG13.5 / G1/2
screw terminals for 4 mm2 wires
0.75 mm2
refer to «Type summary»
refer to «Dimensions»
refer to «Dimensions»
Tested at 1.5 x PN (24 bar), similar to DIN 3230-3
Can be selected via DIP switch
In case of strong vibrations, use high-flex stranded wires
Degree of protection
Conforming to
AC + DC: Immunity
AC: Emissions
DC: Emissions
Immunity (HF)
Emissions (HF)
Vibration 3)
IP31 to IEC 529
CE- requirements
UL to UL 873
certified to Canadian standard
C22.2 No. 24
C-Tick N 474
PED 97/23/EC:
pressure-carrying parts
Par. 1, section. 2.1.4 / Par. 3, section 3
Fluid group 2
Industrial IEC 61000-6-2
Residential IEC 61000-6-3
CISPR 22, class B
IEC 1000-4-3; IEC 1000-4-6 (10 V/m)
EN 55022, CISPR 22, Klasse B
IEC 68-2-6
(1 g acceleration, 1 ... 100 Hz, 10 min)
8/10
Siemens Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modulating control valves PN16 with magnetic actuators
CE1N4361en
11.11.2003
General environmental
conditions
Operation
IEC 721-3-3
Climatic conditions
Transport
IEC 721-3-2
Storage
IEC 721-3-1
Class 3K5
Class 2K3
Class 1K3
Temperature
–5 ... +45 °C
–25 ... +70 °C
–5 ... +45 °C
Humidity
5 ... 95 %r.F.
5 ... 95 %r.F.
5 ... 95 %r.F.
Mechanical conditions
IEC 721-3-6
Class 3M2
Connection diagrams
Caution
If controller and valve receive their power from separate sources, only one
transformer may be earthed on the secondary side.
Caution
In case of DC power supply, a 4-wire connection is mandatory!
Controllers with
control signal
DC 0 ... 10 V
DC 2 ... 10 V
DC 0 ... 20 mA
DC 4 ... 20 mA
Transformer
F
Controller
G0
G0
System neutral (SN)
G
G
System potential (SP)
Y
Y
DC 0 ... 10 V / 2 ... 10 V
Control signal
0 ... 20 mA / 4 ... 20 mA
Measuring neutral (= G0)
M
M
U
Controllers with
phasecut signal
DC 0 ... 20 V
AC/DC 24 V Operating voltage
U
DC 0 ... 10 V / 2 ... 10 V
Positioning feedback signal
0 ... 20 mA / 4 ... 20 mA
Z
Override input
Transformer
F
Controller
G0
G0
System neutral (SN)
G
G
System potential (SP)
AC/DC 24 V Operating voltage
DC 0 ... 10 V / 2 ... 10 V
0 ... 20 mA / 4 ... 20 mA Control signal
Measuring neutral (= G0)
Y
M
U
U
DC 0 ... 10 V / 2 ... 10 V
Positioning feedback signal
0 ... 20 mA / 4 ... 20 mA
Z
Override input
DC 0 ... 20 V Phase-cut signal
Application examples
The examples shown below are basic diagrams with no installation-specific details.
9H808 A
9H807 A
D
E
9/10
Siemens Building Technologies
HVAC Products
Modulating control valves PN16 with magnetic actuators
CE1N4361en
11.11.2003
D : District heating (supply heating) system, indirect connection.
E : District heating (supply heating) system, directly connected to
water-heating system
Caution
The valve may only be used in flow direction (A – AB).. The direction of flow must
be observed!
Dimensions
100
ø 50
F
øE
H
min.
4361M01
Flange dimensions to DIN2533, PN16
A
AB
øD
ø D2
øK
B
L
Type reference
DN
L
[mm]
øD
ø D2
B
øK
H
øE
F
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
Weight
[kg]
8,3
MVF461H15-0.6
15
130
95
4x14
14
65
340
80
115
MVF461H15-1.5
15
130
95
4x14
14
65
340
80
115
8,3
MVF461H15-3
15
130
95
4x14
14
65
340
80
115
8,3
MVF461H20-5
20
150
105
4x14
16
75
339
80
115
8,9
MVF461H25-8
25
160
115
4x14
16
85
346
80
115
10,0
MVF461H32-12
32
180
140
4x18
18
100
384
100
125
15,7
MVF461H40-20
40
200
150
4x18
18
110
401
100
125
17,8
MVF461H50-30
50
230
165
4x18
20
125
449
125
138
27,2
Weight incl. packaging
10/10
Siemens Building Technologies
HVAC Products
 2003 Siemens Building Technologies Ltd.
Modulating control valves PN16 with magnetic actuators
Subject to alteration
CE1N4361en
11.11.2003
4
VVF53..
405
VXF53..
ACVATIX™
VVF53..
2- and 3-port valves with
flanged connections, PN 25 VXF53..
From the large-stroke valve line
•
•
•
•
•
•
High-performance valves for medium temperatures from -20…220 °C
Valve body of nodular cast iron EN-GJS-400-18-LT
DN 15…150
kvs 0.16…400 m3/h
Flange type 21, flange design B
Equipable with electro-hydraulic actuators SAX.. or SKD.., SKB.., SKC..
Use
In boiler, district heating and refrigeration plants, cooling towers, heating groups, and in
air handling units as control or shutoff valves.
For use in closed or open hydraulic circuits (observe cavitation).
CE1N4405en
16.08.2011
Building Technologies
Type summary
Valves
VVF53.15-0.16
VVF53.15-0.2
VVF53.15-0.25
VVF53.15-0.32
VVF53.15-0.4
VVF53.15-0.5
VVF53.15-0.63
VVF53.15-0.8
VVF53.15-1
VVF53.15-1.25
VVF53.15-1.6
VVF53.15-2
VVF53.15-2.5
VVF53.15-3.2
VVF53.15-4
VVF53.20-6.3
VVF53.25-5
VVF53.25-6.3
VVF53.25-8
VVF53.25-10
VVF53.32-16
VVF53.40-12.5
VVF53.40-16
VVF53.40-20
VVF53.40-25
VVF53.50-31.5
VVF53.50-40
3)
VVF53.65-63
3)
VVF53.80-100
3)
VVF53.100-160
3)
VVF53.125-250
VVF53.150-400
Stock number
S55208-V100
S55208-V101
S55208-V102
S55208-V103
S55208-V104
S55208-V105
S55208-V106
S55208-V107
S55208-V108
S55208-V109
S55208-V110
S55208-V111
S55208-V112
S55208-V113
S55208-V114
S55208-V116
S55208-V117
S55208-V118
S55208-V119
S55208-V120
S55208-V122
S55208-V123
S55208-V124
S55208-V125
S55208-V126
S55208-V127
S55208-V128
S55208-V129
S55208-V130
S55208-V131
S55208-V132
S55208-V133
Actuators
Stroke
Positioning force
Data sheet
DN
kvs
SV
3
[m /h]
15
0.16
15
0.2
15
0.25
15
0.32
15
0.4
> 50
15
0.5
15
0.63
15
0.8
15
1
15
1.25
15
1.6
15
2
15
2.5
15
3.2
15
4
20
6.3
25
5
25
6.3
25
8
25
10
32
16
> 100
40
12.5
40
16
40
20
40
25
50
31.5
50
40
65
63
80
100
100
160
125
250
150
400
VVF53.15-0.16
VVF53.15-0.2
VVF53.15-0.25
VVF53.15-0.32
VVF53.15-0.4
VVF53.15-0.5
VVF53.15-0.63
VVF53.15-0.8
VVF53.15-1
VVF53.15-1.25
VVF53.15-1.6
VVF53.15-2
VVF53.15-2.5
VVF53.15-3.2
5)
VVF53.15-4
5)
VVF53.20-6.3
VVF53.25-5
VVF53.25-6.3
VVF53.25-8
5)
VVF53.25-10
5)
VVF53.32-16
VVF53.40-12.5
VVF53.40-16
VVF53.40-20
5)
VVF53.40-25
VVF53.50-31.5
VVF53.50-40
S55208-V100
S55208-V101
S55208-V102
S55208-V103
S55208-V104
S55208-V105
S55208-V106
S55208-V107
S55208-V108
S55208-V109
S55208-V110
S55208-V111
S55208-V112
S55208-V113
S55208-V114
S55208-V116
S55208-V117
S55208-V118
S55208-V119
S55208-V120
S55208-V122
S55208-V123
S55208-V124
S55208-V125
S55208-V126
S55208-V127
S55208-V128
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
20
25
25
25
25
32
40
40
40
40
50
50
PN 25
1)
PN 16
Fluids
Steam
4)
0.16
0.2
0.25
0.32
0.4
0.5
0.63
0.8
1
1.25
1.6
2
2.5
3.2
3.6
5
5
6.3
8
8
15
12.5
16
20
23
31.5
40
SAX..
2)
800 N
N4501
Δps
Δpmax
2500
2)
SKD..
SKB..
20 mm
1000 N
2800 N
N4561
N4664
Δps
Δpmax
Δps
Δpmax
[kPa]
SKC..
40 mm
2800 N
N4566
Δps
Δpmax
2500
1200
1200
2500
1200
1600
-
650
400
250
160
100
-
2100
900
750
1200
1100
550
500
750
650
2000
350
300
450
400
1200
-
-
-
-
-
1150
-
-
700
450
300
175
125
2500
1200
-
> 50
1200
-
-
2500
> 100
1000
600
2 / 14
Siemens
Building Technologies
2- and 3-port valves with flanged connections, PN 25
CE1N4405en
16.08.2011
Valves
PN 25
1)
PN 16
Steam
4)
Fluids
VVF53.65-63
VVF53.80-100
5)
VVF53.100-160
5)
VVF53.125-250
5)
VVF53.150-400
VXF53.15-1.6
VXF53.15-2.5
VXF53.15-4
VXF53.20-6.3
VXF53.25-6.3
VXF53.25-10
VXF53.32-16
VXF53.40-16
VXF53.40-25
VXF53.50-40
3)
VXF53.65-63
3)
VXF53.80-100
3)
VXF53.100-160
3)
VXF53.125-250
VXF53.150-400
Stock number
S55208-V129
S55208-V130
S55208-V131
S55208-V132
S55208-V133
Stock number
S55208-V140
S55208-V141
S55208-V142
S55208-V144
S55208-V145
S55208-V146
S55208-V148
S55208-V149
S55208-V150
S55208-V152
S55208-V153
S55208-V154
S55208-V155
S55208-V156
S55208-V157
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
DN
kvs
15
15
15
20
25
25
32
40
40
50
65
80
100
125
150
[m /h]
1.6
2.5
4
6.3
6.3
10
16
16
25
40
63
100
160
250
400
SAX..
2)
800 N
N4501
Δps
Δpmax
-
-
2)
SKD..
SKB..
20 mm
1000 N
2800 N
N4561
N4664
Δps
Δpmax
Δps
Δpmax
[kPa]
-
-
-
SKC..
40 mm
2800 N
N4566
Δps
Δpmax
-
2500
1000
750
500
300
200
200
-
-
-
650
400
250
160
100
200
200
150
100
70
Δpmax
[kPa]
SV
3
1200
1200
200
> 100
200
750
1100
500
650
300
-
100
-
400
-
1200
1150
-
-
DN 15…50: Flange dimensions for PN 16 and PN 25
DN 65…150: Flange dimensions only for PN 25
Usable up to a max. medium temperature of 150 °C
3
3
Valve characteristic for kvs value 63 m /h from 90% stroke, kvs value 100, 160 and 250 m /h
from 80% stroke is optimized for maximum volumetric flow
Operate with opposite flow direction with steam
Reduced kvs value
DN
kvs
Sv
∆ps
∆pmax
Note
Actuators
Stroke
Positioning force
Data sheet
DN
kvs
SV
3
[m /h]
65
63
80
100
> 100
100
150
125
220
150
360
= Nominal size
= Flow nominal value of cold water (5...30 °C) through the fully opened valve (H100) at a
differential pressure of 100 kPa (1 bar)
= Rangeability
= Maximum permissible differential pressure at which the motorized valve still closes securely
against the pressure
= Maximum permissible differential pressure across the valve’s throughport for the entire
positioning range of the motorized valve
When using a stem heating element with a medium temperature of below –5 °C,
the stem sealing gland must be replaced. In this case, the sealing gland must be
ordered separately (Stock number: 4 284 8806 0).
Ordering
Example
Product number
Stock number
Description
VXF53.25-6.3
S55208-V145
3-port valve with flange, PN 25
SAX31.03
S55150-A106
Electro-hydraulic actuator
Delivery
Valves, actuators and accessories are packed and delivered as separate items.
Note
Counter-flanges, bolts and gaskets must be provided on site.
Spare parts, Rev.-Nr.
See page 13
3 / 14
Siemens
Building Technologies
2- and 3-port valves with flanged connections, PN 25
CE1N4405en
16.08.2011
Equipment combinations
Product
number
Description
SAX31.00
S55150-A105
SAX31.03
S55150-A106
SAX61.03
SAX61.03U
S55150-A100
S55150-A100-A100
SAX81.00
S55150-A102
SAX81.03
SAX81.03U
S55150-A103
S55150-A103-A100
SKD32.21
SKD32.21
SKD32.50
SKD32.50
SKD32.51
SKD32.51
SKD60
SKD60
SKD62
SKD62U
SKD62
SKD62U
SKD62UA
SKD62UA
SKD82.50
SKD82.50U
SKD82.50
SKD82.50U
SKD82.51
SKD82.51U
SKD82.51
SKD82.51U
SKB32.50
SKB32.50
SKB32.51
SKB32.51
SKB60
SKB60
SKB62
SKB62U
SKB62
SKB62U
SKB62UA
SKB62UA
SKB82.50
SKB82.50U
SKB82.50
SKB82.50U
SKB82.51
SKB82.51U
SKB82.51
SKB82.51U
SKC32.60
SKC32.60
SKC32.61
SKC32.61
SKC60
SKC60
SKC62
SKC62U
SKC62
SKC62U
SKC62UA
SKC62UA
SKC82.60
SKC82.60U
SKC82.60
SKC82.60U
SKC82.61
SKC82.61U
SKC82.61
SKC82.61U
Stroke
Positioning
force
Operating
voltage
Positioning Spring
Positioning
signal
return time time
800 N
AC 230 V
Manual
adjuster
Auxiliary
functions
120 s
3-position
20 mm
LED
-
0…10 V
4…20 mA
0…1000 Ω
30 s
1)
-
Push and fix
2) 3)
,
120 s
3-position
-
Opening: 30 s
Closing: 10 s
8s
AC 230 V
3-position
8s
20 mm
0…10 V
4…20 mA
0…1000 Ω
1000 N
30 s
-
1)
Push and fix
1)
-
120 s
Opening: 30 s
Closing: 15 s
15 s

Turn, Position
is maintained
2)
4)
AC 24 V
3-position
120 s
-
1)
120 s
-
1)
Opening: 120 s
Closing:10 s

8s
AC 230 V
20 mm
3-position
0…10 V
4…20 mA
0…1000 Ω
2800 N
10 s
10 s
2)
Turn, Position
is maintained
AC 24 V
3-position
4)
120 s
-
1)
120 s
-
1)
Opening: 120 s
Closing: 20 s

10 s
AC 230 V
40 mm
3-position
0…10 V
4…20 mA
0…1000 Ω
2800 N
18 s
20 s
2)
Turn, Position
is maintained
AC 24 V
3-position
120 s
4)
1)
-
18 s
1)
2)
3)
4)
Auxiliary switch, potentiometer
Position feedback, forced control, selection of valve characteristic
Optional: Sequence control, selection of acting direction
Plus sequence control, stroke limitation, and selection of acting direction
Product documentation
• Mounting Instructions
• Basic documentation
M4030
P4030
74 319 0749 0
Contains background information and
technical basic knowledge of valves
Technical and mechanical design
The illustrations below show the basic design of the valves. Constructional
features, such as the shape of plugs, may differ.
4 / 14
Siemens
Building Technologies
2- and 3-port valves with flanged connections, PN 25
CE1N4405en
16.08.2011
2-port valves
Note
Fluids
Steam
Closing against the pressure
Closing with the pressure
2-port valves do not become 3-port valves by removing the blank flange!
3-port valves
Fluids
Mixing valve (preferred use)
Diverting valve
Accessories
Product
number
ASZ6.5
Stock number
ASZ6.5
ASZ6.6
S55845-Z108
-
428488060
Adapter
type
Stock number
Description
Note
Stem heating
element
Required for medium temperatures < 0 °C
Stem sealing
gland
When using valves of the V..F53.. lines with a stem heating
element and a medium temperature below -5 °C, the stem
sealing gland must be replaced.
Bolts included
ALF41B15
S55845-Z110
4x M12x90mm
ALF41B25
S55845-Z111
4x M12x90mm
ALF41B40
S55845-Z112
4x M16x90mm
ALF41B50
S55845-Z113
4x M16x90mm
Description
VXF41..
DN 15
Adapter for replacing 3-port valves VXF41.. by
DN 25
VXF53..
• Due to different dimensions of the bypass
DN 40
flange
• Every valve to be replaced requires an adapter DN 50
• Adapter is supplied with the required number
and size of bolts and nuts as well as two
suitable flat sealings
DN 15
Replace 3-port valves VXF41.., DN 65…150 by
3-port valvesVXF43.. (data sheet N4404).
5 / 14
Siemens
Building Technologies
2- and 3-port valves with flanged connections, PN 25
CE1N4405en
16.08.2011
Sizing
30
15
20
3
4
5
6
8
10
1,5
2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,8
1
0,2
0,03
0,04
0,05
0,06
0,08
0,1
0,02
0,01
Flow chart
3000
800
600
500
400
300
250
200
150
2000
1500
1000
800
600
500
400
300
200
150
100
80
60
50
40
30
25
20
15
k VS
360
100
80
60
50
40
30
250
160
100
63
20
10
8
6
5
4
3
2
1
0,8
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,1
0,08
0,06
0,05
0,04
0,03
10
8
6
5
4
3
2,5
2
1,5
40
5
31.
25
20
16
5
12.
10
8
6 .3
5
4
3 .2
2 .5
2
1 .6
5
1.2
1
0 .8
3
0 .6
0 .5
0 .4
2
0.3
5
0 .2
0 .2
6
0 .1
1
0,8
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,25
0,2
0,15
0,1
0,08
0,06
0,05
0,04
0,03
0,025
0,02
0,015
0,01
0,008
0,006
3000
1500
2000
300
400
500
600
800
1000
200
30
40
50
60
80
100
20
3
4
5
6
8
10
2
1
0,02
Δpmax values apply for the mixing function. Δpmax values for the diverting function see table “Type
summary”, page 2
Δpmax values for kvs value 16, DN 32, see table "Type summary", page 2
6 / 14
Siemens
Building Technologies
2- and 3-port valves with flanged connections, PN 25
CE1N4405en
16.08.2011
Flow rate kv / kvs
Valve characteristics
2-port valves
0…30%:
Linear
30…100%: Equal percentage
ngl = 3 to VDI / VDE 2173
For high kvs values the valve characteristic is
optimized for maximum volumetric flow kV100.
For product lines:
VVF53.125-250
VVF53.150-400
Flow rate kv / kvs
Stroke H / H100
0…100%:
Linear
Stroke H / H100
Throughport A-AB
0...30%:
Linear
30...100%: Equal percentage
ngl = 3 to VDI / VDE 2173
Flow rate kv / kvs
3-port valves
For high kvs values the valve characteristic is
optimized for maximum volumetric flow kV100.
Bypass B-AB
0...100%: Linear
Stroke H / H100
Mixing:
Diverting:
Volumetric flow from port A and port B to port AB
Volumetric flow from port AB to port A and port B
Throughport A-AB
0...100%: Linear
Flow rate kv / kvs
For product lines:
VXF53.125-250
VXF53.150-400
Port AB = constant volumetric flow
Port A = variable volumetric flow
Port B = Bypass (variable volumetric
flow)
Bypass B-AB
0...100%: Linear
Stroke H / H100
7 / 14
Siemens
Building Technologies
2- and 3-port valves with flanged connections, PN 25
CE1N4405en
16.08.2011
Fluids
with V..F53..
Operating pressure [bar]
Operating pressure and
medium temperature
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
1
0
-20 -10 0
20
80
100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240
Medium temperature [°C]
Curve for saturated steam; steam forms below this line
Operating pressure according to EN 1092
Operating pressure and operating temperatures according to ISO 7005,
EN 1092 and EN 12284
Saturated steam
Superheated steam
with VVF53..
• All relevant local directives must be observed
Abs. operating pressure [bar]
Notes
Medium temperature [°C]
Wet steam
Saturated steam
Superheated steam
A
B
To be avoided
Permissible operating range
Subcritical pressure ratio
Supercritical pressure ratio
8 / 14
Siemens
Building Technologies
2- and 3-port valves with flanged connections, PN 25
CE1N4405en
16.08.2011
Cold water
Hot water
1)
High-temperature hot water
Water with antifreeze
Cooling water
Brines
2)
Saturated steam
3)
Superheated steam
Heat transfer oils
Super-clean water
(demineralized and deionized)
1)
2)
3)
1
150
VXF53..
Valve
Temperature
range
Tmin
Tmax
[°C]
[°C]
1
25
1
130
130
150
150
180
180
220
-5
150
-10
150
-20
150
1
25
-5
150
-10
150
-20
150
100
150
100
220
120
150
120
220
20
220
VVF53..
Medium
Medium
compatibility and
temperature ranges
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
-
-
Note
V..F53: With a medium temperature of below
-5 °C, the stem sealing gland must be replaced
V..F53: With a medium temperature of below
-5 °C, the stem sealing gland must be replaced
On the basis of mineral oil
Differentiation due to saturated steam curve
Open circuits
Operate with inverted flow direction with steam
Fields of use
Fields of use
Generation
Distribution
1)
Boiler plants
District heating plants
Refrigeration plants
1)
Cooling towers
Heating groups
Air handling units
Valve
VVF53..
■
■
■
■
■
■
VXF53..
■
■
■
■
■
Open circuits
Engineering notes
Mounting location
Preferably mount the valves at the return, as the temperature is lower there and
the strain on the stem sealing gland is lower.
Operate valves of the product lines VVF53.. with inverted flow direction for steam.
Dirt trap
Cavitation
Mount a dirt filter or dirt trap before the valve to ensure proper functioning, and a
long service life of the valve.
Remove dirt, welding beads, etc. from the valves and pipes.
Cavitation can be avoided by limiting the pressure differential across the valve
depending on the medium temperature and the prepressure.
Mounting notes
Mounting position
Indoors
1)
Outdoors
1)
Only in combination with weather shield ASK39.1 and actuators SAX..
Mounting positions apply to both 2- and 3-port valves.
9 / 14
Siemens
Building Technologies
2- and 3-port valves with flanged connections, PN 25
CE1N4405en
16.08.2011
Commissioning notes
The valve may be put into operation only if actuator and valve are correctly
assembled.
Note
Function check
Ensure that actuator stem and valve stem are rigidly connected in all positions.
Valve
Throughport AAB
Bypass BAB
Valve stem extends
Closes
Opens
Valve stem retracts
Opens
Closes
Maintenance notes
The valves are maintenance-free.
When servicing valves or actuators:
• Deactivate the pump and turn off the power supply
• Close the shutoff valves
• Fully reduce the pressure in the piping system and allow pipes to completely
cool down
Disposal
If necessary, disconnect the electrical wires.
Due to the different types of material used, the valve must be disassembled prior to
disposal. Special handling of certain valve components may be required by law or
may be sensible from an ecological point of view.
Local and currently valid legislation must be observed.
Warranty
Application-related technical data are guaranteed only when the valves are used in
connection with the Siemens actuators listed under ”Equipment combinations”,
page 3.
When used with actuators of other manufacture, any warranty by Siemens
becomes void.
10 / 14
Siemens
Building Technologies
2- and 3-port valves with flanged connections, PN 25
CE1N4405en
16.08.2011
Technical Data
Functional data
PN class
PN 25
Connection
Flange
Operating pressure
See Section "Operating pressure and medium
temperatures" page 8
Valve characteristics 1)
See section "Valve characteristics", page 7
Leakage rate
0…0.01% of kvs value (Class IV)
Throughport
Bypass
0.5…2% of kvs value with SKD.., SKB.., SKC..
0.05% of kvs value with SAX..
Medium temperature
See table " Medium compatibility and
temperature ranges", page 9
-20…220 °C 2)
Rangeability
DN 15‚ kvs ≤ 1.25 m³/h: >50
Permissible media
DN 15...150: >100
Nominal stroke
Materials
Valve body / Blank flange
Up to DN 50: 20 mm
From DN 65: 40 mm
EN-GJS-400-18-LT / P265GH
Valve stem, seat, plug
Stainless steel
Stem sealing gland
Stainless steel
FEPM (silicone-free)
Standards
Adapter ALF41B..
Steel S235JRG2
Pressure Equipment Directive
PED 97/23/EC
Pressure-carrying accessories
According to article 1, section 2.1.4
Fluid group 2
PN 25
without CE certification according
to article 3, section 3 (good
engineering practice)
≤ DN 40
Category I, with CE certification
DN 50…100
Category II, with CE certification,
notified body identification
number 0036
DN 125…150
PN class
ISO 7268
Operating pressure
ISO 7005, DIN EN 12284
Flanges
ISO 7005
Length of flanged valves
DIN EN 558-1, line 1
Valve characteristic
VDI 2173
Leakage rate
Throughport, Bypass according to
EN 60534-4 / EN 1349
Water treatment
VDI 2035
11 / 14
Siemens
Building Technologies
2- and 3-port valves with flanged connections, PN 25
CE1N4405en
16.08.2011
Environmental conditions
Storage: IEC 60721-3-1
Transport: IEC 60721-3-2
Operation: IEC 60721-3-3
Dimensions / Weight
Class
Temperature
Rel. humidity
Class
Temperature
Rel. humidity
Class
Temperature
Rel. humidity
1K3
-15…+55 °C
5…95% r.H.
2K3, 2M2
-30…+65 °C
< 95% r.H.
3K5, 3Z11
-15…+55 °C
5…95% r.H.
Environmental compatibility
ISO 14001 (environment)
ISO 9001 (quality)
SN 36350 (environmentally compatible
products)
RL 2002/95/EG (RoHS)
Dimensions
See „Dimensions“, page 12
Weight
See „Dimensions“, page12
1)
2)
For certain valve lines and high kvs values, the valve characteristic is optimized for maximum
volumetric flow kV100
For medium temperatures < -5 °C, the stem sealing gland must be replaced. The sealing gland must
be ordered separately (Stock number: 4 284 8806 0).
Dimensions
VVF53..
Product
number
VVF53..
B
DN
15
20
25
32
40
50
65
80
100
125
150
4.2
5.4
6.1
8.8
10.2
13.7
21.8
28.1
38
51.9
74.1
14
16
15
17
16
16
17
17
17
17
17
ØD
95
105
115
140
150
165
185
200
235
270
297
Ø D1
46
56
65
76
84
99
118
132
156
184
211
Ø D2
14 (4x)
14 (4x)
14 (4x)
19 (4x)
19 (4x)
19 (4x)
19 (8x)
19 (8x)
23 (8x)
28 (8x)
28 (8x)
L1
130
150
160
180
200
230
290
310
350
400
480
L2
65
75
80
90
100
115
145
155
175
200
240
L3
87.5
99.5
104.5
119
129
146
178
190
212.5
242
284
ØK
65
75
85
100
110
125
145
160
190
220
250
H1
63
63
63
60
60
100
115
115
146
159
186.5
H2
159.5
144.4
159.5
156.5
156.5
196.5
231.5
231.5
262.5
275.5
303
H
SAX..
505
505
505
502
502
542
-
SKD..
563
563
563
560
560
600
-
SKB..
638
638
638
635
635
675
-
SKC..
690
690
721
734
762
12 / 14
Siemens
Building Technologies
2- and 3-port valves with flanged connections, PN 25
CE1N4405en
16.08.2011
VXF53..
Product
number
VXF53..
B
DN
15
20
25
32
40
50
65
80
100
125
150
3.2
4.1
4.6
6.1
7.2
9.8
16.8
21.2
29
39.7
57
14
16
15
17
16
16
17
17
17
17
17
ØD
Ø D1
95
105
115
140
150
165
185
200
235
270
297
46
56
65
76
84
99
118
132
156
184
211
Ø D2
14 (4x)
14 (4x)
14 (4x)
19 (4x)
19 (4x)
19 (4x)
19 (8x)
19 (8x)
23 (8x)
28 (8x)
28 (8x)
L1
130
150
160
180
200
230
290
310
350
400
480
L2
65
75
80
90
100
115
145
155
175
200
240
L3
65
75
80
90
100
115
145
155
175
200
240
ØK
65
75
85
100
110
125
145
160
190
220
250
H1
H2
SAX..
63 159.5 505
63 159.5 505
63 159.5 505
60 156.5 502
60 156.5 502
100 196.5 542
115 231.5
115 231.5
146 262.5
159 275.5
186.5 303
-
H
SKD..
563
563
563
560
560
600
-
SKB..
638
638
638
635
635
675
-
SKC..
690
690
721
734
762
Spare parts
Stem sealing gland
Product
number
DN
VVF53..
VXF53..
DN 15…150
Stock number
Comments
74 284 0061 0
-
4 284 8806 0
When operating with medium
temperatures below -5 °C
13 / 14
Siemens
Building Technologies
2- and 3-port valves with flanged connections, PN 25
CE1N4405en
16.08.2011
Revision numbers
Product number
Valid from rev. no.
Product number
Valid from rev. no.
VVF53.15-0.16
..A
VXF53.15-1.6
..A
VVF53.15-0.2
..A
VXF53.15-2.5
..A
VVF53.15-0.25
..A
VXF53.15-4
..A
VVF53.15-0.32
..A
VXF53.20-6.3
..A
VVF53.15-0.4
..A
VXF53.25-6.3
..A
VVF53.15-0.5
..A
VXF53.25-10
..A
VVF53.15-0.63
..A
VXF53.32-16
..A
VVF53.15-0.8
..A
VXF53.40-16
..A
VVF53.15-1
..A
VXF53.40-25
..A
VVF53.15-1.25
..A
VXF53.50-40
..A
VVF53.15-1.6
..A
VXF53.65-63
..A
VVF53.15-2
..A
VXF53.80-100
..A
VVF53.15-2.5
..A
VXF53.100-160
..A
VVF53.15-3.2
..A
VXF53.125-250
..A
VVF53.15-4
..A
VXF53.150-400
..A
VVF53.20-6.3
..A
VVF53.25-5
..A
VVF53.25-6.3
..A
VVF53.25-8
..A
VVF53.25-10
..A
VVF53.32-16
..A
VVF53.40-12.5
..A
VVF53.40-16
..A
VVF53.40-20
..A
VVF53.40-25
..A
VVF53.50-31.5
..A
VVF53.50-40
..A
VVF53.65-63
..A
VVF53.80-100
..A
VVF53.100-160
..A
VVF53.125-250
..A
VVF53.150-400
..A
14 / 14
 2011 Siemens Switzerland Ltd
Siemens
Building Technologies
2- and 3-port valves with flanged connections, PN 25
Subject to change
CE1N4405en
16.08.2011
PLANMIX OY
Monontie 4 A 1
15900 LAHTI
Phone / fax +358 3 7537735 Mob +358 40 7353426 E-mail [email protected]
DIRTSTRAINERS
MATERIALSPECIFICATION
1
2
3
4
Body
Welding ends
Filter
Plug
St 35.8
St 37.0
AISI 304
Steel
5
6
7
DIMENTIONS
OPERATING TEMPERATURE AREA
PRESSURE CLASS
KV – VALUES
DN
15
20
KV
7,96
15,69
25
22,57
32
32,68
Plug sealing
Flange
Flange sealing
DN 15 – 100
0 – 180 C
DN 15-50
DN 65 – 100
40
37,59
50
99,51
Copper
Steel ( dn 32 –100 )
PTFE / FPM O-ring
PN 40
PN 25
65
80
133,05 160,10
100
458,88
2.1.4
Safety relief valve, tap water
Safety valve 514
Area of application:
Safety valve for tap water installations.
Design:
Valve body made in CR-brass.
Membrane in EPDM rubber.
Inlet connection male G15.
O-ring sealed to ensure an easy fitting to other
LKA valves.
Outlet connection with 15 mm compression fitting.
Max working temperature: 120°C
Max blow-off capacity: se the list below.
Type Approval Certificate: SWEDCERT TG 0196
Measures:
Fitting/Installation:
The safety valve can be installed horizontally or
vertically, i.e. with the valve knob facing outwards
or upwards. In horizontal installation, the outlet
must be positioned so that a water pocket can not
be formed.
The o-ring seal ensures simple fitting to other LKA
valves.
Tighten first by hand and then with a spanner,
1 - 1,5 turn until the desired position of the
discharge pipe is achieved.
If the valve is fitted to other components than a
LKA valve, the thread has to be sealed in the usual
manner.
Operation and maintenance:
The safety relief valve requires no maintenance.
The opening function should, however, be checked
2 - 3 times a year.
Turn the knob anticlockwise by hand, until water flows
out. Let the water flush through for a moment. Then turn
the knob until a click is heard, about ¼ turn, and the
knob returns to close position.
The safety valve is designed in such a way that the
water heater can be drained using the overflow on the
safety valve, which should always be fitted.
The safety valve may open after a large amount of water
has been drained from the water heater.
This is a normal function since the pressure relief level in
the water heater can be reached due to the increased
volume of the water when heated.
Article
Dimension
Art.no
Pack qty
Opening pressure and max blow-off capacity
514-0,4
514-0,6
514-0,7
514-0,9
514-1,0
G15 male / 15 mm
G15 male / 15 mm
G15 male / 15 mm
G15 male / 15 mm
G15 male / 15 mm
090112
090113
090114
090115
090116
1
1
1
1
1
4 bar = 96 l/m
6 bar = 118 l/m
7 bar = 104 l/m
9 bar = 122 l/m
10 bar =148 l/m
Issued 1/06.10.23
2.2.4
Safety relief valve, heating systems
Safety valve 514
Area of application:
Safety valve for heating, recycling and cooling
systems with only thermal expansion.
The valve must not be used for steam.
Design:
High lifting and soft sealing safety valve.
Valve body made in CR-brass.
Membrane in EPDM rubber.
Inlet male connection G15
Outlet connection with 15 mm compression
fitting.
Max working temperature: 120°C
Max blow-off capacity: se the list below.
Type Approval Certificate: SWEDCERT TG 0196
Measures:
Fitting/Installation:
The safety valve can be installed horizontally or
vertically, i.e. with the valve knob facing outwards
or upwards.
Operation and maintenance:
The safety relief valve requires no maintenance.
The opening function should, however, be checked
2 - 3 times a year.
The o-ring seal ensures simple fitting to other LKA
valves.
Turn the knob anticlockwise by hand, until water
flows out. Let the water flush through for a moment.
Then turn the knob until a click is heard, about ¼
turn, and the knob returns to close position.
Inlet and outlet pipes shall comply with national
regulations (e.g. VVA 93 in Sweden).
It is easier to fit the compression fitting if
lubricant is applied to the thread and bevel.
Tighten first by hand and then with a spanner.
Number of turns to be tightened with a spanner:
copper pipe 1 turn, steel pipe ¾ turn.
Soft pipes are to be fitted with a support sleeve.
Article
Dimension
Art.no
Pack qty Opening pressure and max blow-off capacity
514-0,15
514-0,2
514-0,25
514-0,3 SWEDCERT TG 0197
514-0,4 SWEDCERT TG 0197
514-0,6 SWEDCERT TG 0197
G15 male / 15 mm
G15 male / 15 mm
G15 male / 15 mm
G15 male / 15 mm
G15 male / 15 mm
G15 male / 15 mm
090109
090108
090110
090111
090112
090113
1
1
1
1
1
1
1,5 bar = 31 l/m
2 bar = 35 l/m
2,5 bar = 50 l/m
3 bar = 81 l/m
4 bar = 96 l/m
6 bar = 118 l/m
Issued 1/06.10.23
Heating Systems
Filling Valve 4160
TECHNICAL DATA
B
Functions:
shut-off valve, inspection plug, nonreturn valve and shut-off valve
Working pressure: 1 MPa (10 bar)
Raw material:
dezincification resistant brass
Ball seals:
PTFE
Rubber seals:
EPDM
Non-return valve:
spring-loaded
H
Type approval resolution by the Ministry for the
Environment of Finland,
nro 191/6121/96
L
Size
Oras No.
DN
G
15
20
25
1/2
3/4
1
416 015
416 020
416 025
LVI-code
4012204
4012206
4012208
Dimensions mm
L
B
H
127
144
174
47
47
47
55
55
60
Recommendation for Installation.
ORAS OY, P.O.Box 40, FIN- 26 101 Rauma, FINLAND Tel. +358 2 83 161, Telefax +358 2 831 6300
5.116
Domestic Water Supply Systems
Feeding Valve 4140
Feeding valve with a safety valve (10 bar) for water heaters
B
TECHNICAL DATA
Functions:
shut-off valve,
non-return valve, safety
valve, plug for pressure
gauge, and copper tube
coupling
Working pressure: 1 MPa (10 bar)
Raw material:
dezincification resistant
brass
Ball seals:
PTFE
Rubber seals:
EPDM
Non-return valve: spring-loaded
Type approval resolution by the Ministry
for the Environment of Finland, No.
260/6221/2001
H
D
L
Size
Oras No.
LVI-code
Dimensions mm
DN / Cu G
15/12
15/15
20/18
20/22
25/28
32/35
40/42
50/54
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
414 012
414 015
414 018
414 022
414 028
414 035
414 042
414 054
4012304
4012306
4012308
4012310
4012312
4012314
4012316
4012318
D
L
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
3/4
3/4
108
110
125
125
145
169
191
225
B
H
95
95
95
95
120
120
155
155
112
112
120
120
150
155
160
173
Protecting distances for installation.
ORAS OY, P.O.Box 40, 26 101 Rauma, Finland Tel. +358 2 83 161, Telefax +358 2 831 6300
29.07.2002
5.205
340T
Valvola a sfera in ottone a passaggio totale
Brass ball valve full bore
Threaded ends F-F NPT
F339VR040.1202
F339VR050.1202
F339VR065.1202
008 - 1/4"
010 - 3/8"
015 - 1/2"
020 - 3/4"
025 - 1"
032 - 1 1/4"
040 - 1 1/2"
050 - 2"
065 - 2 1/2"
80
80
80
60
45
30
24
15
6
136
116
222
321
516
773
1260
1830
3751
11
9
18
19
23
23
30
27
23
Chrome-plated ball, blow-out proof stem
F339VR080.1202
080 - 3"
4
5132
21
PTFE Seats, brass adjustable packing, steel handle
F339VR100.1202
100 - 4"
4
7780
31
600WOG
Estremità filettate F-F NPT
Sfera cromata, asta antiscoppio
Seggi in PTFE, premistoppa in ottone, leva in acciaio
Condizioni di esercizio:
Acqua: da 0°C a +150°C; Aria: da -10°C a +150°C
F339VR008.1202
F339VR010.1202
F339VR015.1202
F339VR020.1202
F339VR025.1202
F339VR032.1202
Working conditions:
Water: 0°C to +150°C; Air: -10°C to +150°C Versione a farfalla disponibile allo stesso prezzo (1/4"-2")
Butterfly handle option at same price (1/4"-2")
350
Valvola a sfera in ottone DZR
DZR Brass ball valve full bore
PN40
Estremità filettate F-F
Sfera ottone DZR cromata, Asta antiscoppio
Seggi in PTFE, premistoppa in ottone, leva in acciaio
Condizioni di esercizio:
Acqua: da 0°C a +150°C; Aria: da -10°C a +150°C
Oltre i 95°C PN25
Threaded ends F-F
Chrome-plated DZR brass ball, Blow-out proof stem
PTFE Seats, brass adjustable packing, steel handle
Working conditions:
Water: 0°C to +150°C; Air: -10°C to +150°C
PN 25 beyond 95°C
323 - 324
Mini valvola a sfera in ottone
F3500G008.569
008 - 1/4"
100
147
15
F3500G010.569
010 - 3/8"
015 - 1/2"
020 - 3/4"
025 - 1"
032 - 1 1/4"
040 - 1 1/2"
050 - 2"
100
75
40
25
20
12
8
132
188
339
570
800
1270
2030
13
14
14
14
16
15
16
F3500G015.569
F3500G020.569
F3500G025.569
F3500G032.569
F3500G040.569
F3500G050.569
Disponibile anche nella versione depiombata
Lead washing treatment on request
Versione a farfalla disponibile allo stesso prezzo (1/4"-2")
Butterfly handle option at same price (1/4"-2")
F3230A008.1162
008 - 1/4"
32
80
3
F3230A010.1162
010 - 3/8"
015 - 1/2"
020 - 3/4"
32
24
16
72
100
200
2
2
3
008 - 1/4"
010 - 3/8"
015 - 1/2"
020 - 3/4"
32
32
24
16
95
80
115
210
3
3
3
3
FT3Z0A010.130
010 - 3/8"
100
214
21
3 ways "T" & "L" port brass ball valve
FT3Z0A015.130
Nichelata, estremità filettate F-F-F
Valvola a passaggio ridotto
Sfera cromata, asta antiscoppio
Due seggi in PTFE, premistoppa PTFE
Condizioni di esercizio:
Acqua: da 0°C a +150°C; Aria: da -10°C a +150°C
Nikel plated, threaded ends F-F-F
Reduced bore valve
Chrome-plated ball, blow-out proof stem
Two PTFE seats, PTFE packing nut
Working conditions:
Water: 0°C to +150°C; Air: -10°C to +150°C
FT3Z0A020.130
015 - 1/2"
020 - 3/4"
025 - 1"
032 - 1 1/4"
040 - 1 1/2"
050 - 2"
80
60
40
25
20
15
277
366
739
1167
1676
2953
22
22
30
29
34
44
010 - 3/8"
015 - 1/2"
020 - 3/4"
025 - 1"
032 - 1 1/4"
040 - 1 1/2"
050 - 2"
100
80
60
40
25
20
15
170
255
374
833
1250
1860
3270
17
20
22
33
31
37
49
010 - 3/8"
015 - 1/2"
020 - 3/4"
025 - 1"
032 - 1 1/4"
040 - 1 1/2"
050 - 2"
100
80
60
40
25
20
15
214
277
366
739
1167
1676
2953
21
22
22
30
29
34
44
010 - 3/8"
015 - 1/2"
020 - 3/4"
025 - 1"
032 - 1 1/4"
040 - 1 1/2"
050 - 2"
100
80
60
40
25
20
15
170
255
374
833
1250
1860
3270
17
20
22
33
31
37
49
PN25
Brass mini ball valve
F3230A015.1162
Estremità filettate M-F o F-F
F3230A020.1162
Sfera cromata, asta antiscoppio
Seggi in PTFE, O-ring in NBR
Leva in alluminio
Versione F-F
Condizioni di esercizio:
F-F version
F3240A008.1162
Acqua: da 0°C a +80°C; Aria: da -10°C a +120°C
F3240A010.1162
Threaded ends M-F or F-F
F3240A015.1162
Chrome-plated ball, blow-out proof stem
F3240A020.1162
PTFE Seats, NBR O-ring
Aluminium handle
Working conditions:
Water: 0°C to +80°C; Air: -10°C to +120°C
300T
300T - 300L
Valvola a sfera 3 vie a "T" e a "L" in ottone
PN16
FT3Z0A025.130
FT3Z0A032.130
FT3Z0A040.130
FT3Z0A050.130
300L
FL3Z0A010.130
FL3Z0A015.130
FL3Z0A020.130
FL3Z0A025.130
FL3Z0A032.130
FL3Z0A040.130
FL3Z0A050.130
300T
300T - 300L
Valvola a sfera 3 vie a "T" e a "L" in ottone
3 ways "T" & "L" port brass ball valve
PN40
Nichelata, estremità filettate F-F-F
Valvola a passaggio ridotto
Sfera cromata, asta antiscoppio
Due seggi in PTFE, premistoppa PTFE
Condizioni di esercizio:
Acqua: da 0°C a +150°C; Aria: da -10°C a +150°C
Nikel plated, threaded ends F-F-F
Reduced bore valve
Chrome-plated ball, blow-out proof stem
Two PTFE seats, PTFE packing nut
Working conditions:
Water: 0°C to +150°C; Air: -10°C to +150°C
FT3Z0A010.1415
FT3Z0A015.1415
FT3Z0A020.1415
FT3Z0A025.1415
FT3Z0A032.1415
FT3Z0A040.1415
FT3Z0A050.1415
300L
FL3Z0A010.1415
FL3Z0A015.1415
FL3Z0A020.1415
FL3Z0A025.1415
FL3Z0A032.1415
FL3Z0A040.1415
FL3Z0A050.1415
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
146SC
DESCRIPTION
146SC
Complete boiler drain ball valve.
Base 1/2”M x 1/2 ”M
Hose union 14.5 mm
Cap 1/2” F
According to EN 13828
DIMENSIONS
DxB
D1
d
H
I1
L
Gr.
1/2"M x 14.5
1/2"M
15
28
13
82
183
All threads are in accordance with ISO 7/1 or ISO 228
MATERIALS
TAIL VARIANTS
144SC
145SC
146SC
Body
CuZn40Pb2 Cw617N (DIN 50930 part.6)
Ball
CuZn40Pb2 Cw617N (DIN 50930 part.6)
Diamond polished and chrome plated.
Spindle
CuZn39Pb3 Cw614N (DIN 50930 part.6)
Stuffing box
CuZn39Pb3 Cw614N (DIN 50930 part.6)
Adjustable
Seats
PTFE
O-rings
2 x Viton®, NBR
Lever
-
Cap
CuZn40Pb2 Cw617N (DIN 50930 part.6)
Hose union
CuZn39Pb3 Cw614N (DIN 50930 part.6)
HANDLE VARIANTS
146SC
APPROVALS
M X hose union, 1/2”F x 3/4 “M
F X hose union, 1/2”F x 1/2 “M
M X hose union, 1/2”M x 1/2“M
M X hose union, 1/2”F x 3/4 “M
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
146SC
PRESSURE DROP DIAGRAM
Dim.
Kv
30%
0.18
40%
0.46
50%
60%
70%
80%
0.8
1.2
1.9
2.6
100%
5
TEMPERATURE / PRESSURE DIAGRAM
RECOMMENDED WORKING TEMPERATURE/ PRESSURE LIMIT
10 bar - 115°C - non shock
Ball valves, steel
15.5.2006
Vexve Type 100
Steel,
with welded/welded ends
Material
Body:
Steel, EN 10217-2 P235GH (1.0345)
Ball:
Stainless steel, EN X5CrNi18-10 (1.4301)
Stem:
Stainless steel, EN X8CrNiS18-9 (1.4305)
Stem seals:
FPM
Ball seals:
Carbonized PTFE
Handle:
DN 10 - 150
DN 200 - 250
DN 300
Galvanized steel
Painted carbon steel
Without handle
We recommend manual gear operation
for DN 150 - 300
Operating conditions
Temperature:
-30 °C - +200 °C
Below 0 ºC contact manufacturer
MPa
DN 10 – 50
PN 40
4
3
DN 65 – 300
PN 25
2
1
Not for steam
-30
0 +30 60 90 120 150 180 210 °C
DN
PN
Product No.
10
15
20
25
32
40
50
65
80
100
125
150
200
250
300
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
100 010
100 015
100 020
100 025
100 032
100 040
100 050
100 065
100 080
100 100
100 125
100 150
100 200
100 250
100 300
D
D1
D2
S
H
H1
A
L
Kv
10
10
15
20
25
32
40
50
65
80
100
125
150
200
250
17,2
21,3
26,9
33,7
42,4
48,3
60,3
76,1
88,9
114,3
139,7
168,3
219,1
273,0
323,9
33,7
33,7
42,4
48,3
60,3
76,1
88,9
114,3
139,7
168,3
177,8
219,1
273,0
355,6
457,0
2,0
2,0
2,3
2,6
2,6
2,6
2,9
2,9
3,2
3,6
4,0
4,5
4,5
5,0
5,6
100
100
100
105
105
125
130
180
190
220
245
265
260
300
-
23
23
24
40
39
59
59
71
77
92
95
103
92
108
132
120
120
120
150
150
190
190
280
280
280
420
600
900
1200
-
230
230
230
230
260
260
300
300
300
325
325
350
400
530
550
8
8
14
25
41
65
103
180
290
470
830
1150
1750
3200
4600
Weight
0,5
0,5
0,7
1,0
1,4
1,9
2,7
4,2
5,5
8,3
13,3
18,5
39,0
74,0
110,0
Vexve Oy | Pajakatu 11 | FI-38200 Vammala | Finland | Tel. +358 10 734 0800 | Fax +358 10 734 0839 | [email protected] | www.vexve.fi
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
188NDA
DESCRIPTION
188NDA
Non return valve conform to BS 6282/1 standard, made of non
dezincifiable brass.
DIMENSIONS
D
H
I
g
1/2"
48
11.5
100
3/4"
56
13
160
1"
64
14.5
290
1 1/4"
72
17
420
1 1/2"
78
17
550
2"
100.5
21
987
All threads are conform to ISO 7/1 or ISO 228 standards.
MATERIALS
TAIL VARIANTS
Body
CW602N - DIN 50930 part.6 – (CuZn36Pb2As)
Cap*
CW602N - DIN 50930 part.6 – (CuZn36Pb2As)
Non return
valve
Ocean valve type “10”
188
Non return valve F x F, “Glory” type
188CRM
Non return valve made of non
dezincifiable brass. Compression
ends.
* cap for check point
APPROVALS
Via Pianelli,38 - 28017 S.Maurizio d’Opaglio (NO) ITALY Tel. +39 0322 96217 - Fax. +39 0322 96546 - www.pettinaroli.com
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
188NDA
PRESSURE DROP DIAGRAM
Dim.
Kv
1/2"
6
3/4"
11
1"
15
1 1/4"
28
1 1/2"
45
2"
80
RECOMMENDED WORKING TEMPERATURE/ PRESSURE LIMIT
16 bar - 100°C - non rottura
Via Pianelli,38 - 28017 S.Maurizio d’Opaglio (NO) ITALY Tel. +39 0322 96217 - Fax. +39 0322 96546 - www.pettinaroli.com
District heating substation
Environmental declaration
Product name
Maxi
Product
District heating substation
COMPANY INFORMATION
Name, address, phone, fax, E-mail)
Alfa Laval Lund AB
Box 38
SE-372 21 Ronneby
Phone +46 (0)46 36 65 00
Fax +46 (0)457 664 80
Date of declaration
2011-04-20
Quality security system is established
Quality security system is supported by
Environmental policy is established
Yes
No
Yes
No
Certified by ISO 9000
General information: Alfa Laval and its subcontractor Jitech has routines for approvals
and environmental reports, delegating environmental responsibility, environmental
declarations, environmental accounts, environmental information and environmental
communication, supplier classifications, emergency preparedness, waste handling,
chemical handling, etc.
PRODUCT INFORMATION, FIELD OF APPLICATION , MARKING ETC
Recommended field of application can be concluded from technical documentation
Yes
No
The product is provided with clear and durable marking (manufacturer, product name, No etc)
The marking links to technical documentation so the product can be clearly identified
Yes
Yes
No
No
PRODUCT INFORMATION, CONTENTS DECLARATION
Subject
1. RESOURCE USAGE
Content of
Wheight %
Carbon steel
Stainless steel
Copper/ Brass
10-20
20-50
20-30
Other, depending on level of
equipment
1-10
Gaskets
Electronics, cables
Aluminum details
PUR/ ABS- insulation
2. PRODUCTION
Production facilities are subject to authorization or reporting in accordance with Regulations for
Yes
No
environmentally hazardous activity and health protection (1998:899)
Environmental accounting in the latest balancing of the books
Yes
No
Production facilities are approved and registered under the EMAS-regulations
Yes
No
General information: Alfa Laval and its subcontractor Jitech has routines for approvals
and environmental reports, delegating environmental responsibility, environmental
declarations, environmental accounts, environmental information and environmental
communication, supplier classifications, emergency preparedness, waste handling,
checmical handling, etc.
3. DISTRIBUTION OF READY PRODUCT
The product is manufactured in
Tingsryd, Sweden
Packing material used
Plastic
Steel
Wood
Cardboard/Pap
er
Other Metal
4. INSTALLATION
Documented instructions for assembly and installation are available
The instructions comprise demands and recommendations for:
minimizing the waste
condition description if the producer recovers the waste
5. USE
The product demands energy supply (electricity, fuel, etc) for operation in intended
application
The product demands checmical products (cooling medium, lubrication oil, etc) for
operation in intended application
The product emits environmentally straining emissions to air/water (outer environment)
when operated as intended
The product demands other products for normal maintenance (gaskets, filters, etc)
Type of other products: Gaskets
The product demands chemical products at normal maintenance (detergent, etc)
Normal maintenance might give environmentally straining emissions to air/water (outer
environment)
It is possible to estimate the approximate life length of the product on beforehand
Documented trade standard for expected life length at different conditions is available
Documented instructions for operation and maintenance are available
The instructions comprise:
How life length at normal wearing and intended use can be optimized
Energy use, needed effects and water consumption during normal function
How to dismount the product (take apart)
How to recycle product and packing
How to recover product material
6. DEMOLITION
The product is prepared for environmentally suited dismounting (disassembly)
The manufacturer/or assigned will take back the product
7. REST PRODUCTS
Product recycling is possible
Material recycling is possible
Energy recovery is possible
Energy recovery is recommended
No risk for environmentally straning emissions when burning
Instructions for the handling of waste products when burning not applicable
8. WASTE PRODUCTS
Does the product comprise parts not possible to recover
The product or product parts might be classified as hazardous waste
Not applicable
Not applicable
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No